FOREWORD

This Indian Standard (Third Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized
by the Structural Engineering and Structural Sections Sectional Committee had been approved by the Civil
Engineering Division Council.
The steel economy programme was initiated by erstwhile Indian Standards Institution in the year 1950 with the
objective of achieving economy in the use of structural steel by establishing rational, efficient and optimum
standards for structural steel products and their use. IS 800 : 1956 was the first in the series of Indian Standards
brought out u"der this programme. The standard was revised in 1962 and subsequently in 1984, incorporating
certain very important changes.
IS 800 is the basic Code for general construction in steel structures and is the prime document for any structural
design and has influence on many other codes governing the design of other special steel structures, such as
towers, bridges, silos, chimneys, etc. Realising the necessity to update the standard to the state of the art of the
steel construction technology and economy, the current revision of the standard was undertaken. Consideration
bas been given to the developments taking place in the country and abroad, and necessary modifications and
additions have been incorporated to make the standard more useful.
The revised standard will enhance the confidence of designers, engineers, contractors, technical institutions,
professional bodies and the industry and will open a new era in safe and economic construction in steel.
In this revision the following major modifications have been effected:
a) In view of the development and production of new varieties of medium and high tensile structural steels
in the country, the scope of the standard has been modified permitting the use of any variety of structural
steel provided the relevant provisions of the standard are satisfied.
b) The standard has made reference to the Indian Standards now available for rivets; bolts. and other fasteners.
C) The standard is based on limit state method, reflecting the latest developments and the state of the art.
The revision of the standard was based on a review carried out and the proposals framed by Indian Institute of
Technology Madras (IIT Madras). The project was supported by Institute of Steel Development and Growth
(INSDAG) Kolkata. There has been considerable contribution from INSDAG and IlT Madras, with assistance
from a number of academic, research, design and contracting instituteslorganizations, in the preparation of the
revised standard.
In the formulation of this standard the following publications have also been considered:
AS-4100 -1998 Steel structures (second edition), Standards Australia (Standards Association of Australia),
Homebush, NSW 2140.
BS-5950-2000 Structural use of steelwork in buildings:
Part 1 Code of practice for design in simple and continuous construction: Hot rolled sections, British
Standards Institution, London.
CANICSA- Limit states design of steel structures, Canadian Standards Association, Rexdale (Toronto),
S16.1-94 Ontario, Canada M9W 1R3.
ENV 1993-1-1: Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures:
1992 Part 1-1 General rules and rules for buildings
The composition of the Committee responsible for the formulation of this standard is given in Annex J.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard, is complied with, the final value,
- .
observed or calculated.. ex~ressinethe result of a test or analysis.. 'shall be rounded off in accordance with
A

IS 2 : 1960 'Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)'. The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
 Contents

SECTION 1GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 References
-.
1.3 Terminologv
1.4 Svmbols
~
<
~
~

1.5 Units
1.6 Standard Dimensions, Form and Weight
1.7 Plans and Drawings
1.8 Convention for Member Axes
SECTION 2 MATERIALS
2.1 General
2.2 Structural Steel
2.3 Rivets
2.4 Bolts, Nuts and Washers
2.5 Steel Casting
2.6 Welding Consumable
2.7 Other Materials
SECTION 3 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Basis for Design
3.2 Loads and Forces
3.3 Erection Loads
3.4 Temperature Effects
3.5 Load Combinations
3.6 Geometrical Properties
3.7 Classification of Cross-Sections
3.8 Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio
3.9 Resistance to Horizontal Forces
3.10 Expansion Joints
SECTION 4 METHODS OF STRUCTURALANALYSIS
4.1 Methods of DeterminingAction Effects
4.2 Forms of Construction Assumed for StructuralAnalysis
4.3 Assumptions in Analysis
, 4.4 ElasticAnalysis
4.5 PlasticAnalysis
4.6 Frame Buckling Analysis
SECTION 5 LIMIT STATE DESIGN
5.1 Basis for Design
5.2 Limit State Design
5.3 Actions
5.4 Strength
5.5 Factors Governing the Ultimate Strength
5.6 Limit State of Serviceability
SECTION 6 DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS
6.1 Tension Members
6.2 Design Strength Due to Yielding of Gross Section
6.3 Design Strength Due to Rupture of Critical Section
6.4 Design Strength Due to Block Shear
i
SECTION 7 DESIGN O F COMPRESSION MEMBERS
7.1 Design Strength
7.2 Effective Length of Compression Members
7.3 Design Details
7.4 Column Bases
7.5 Angle Struts
7.6 Laced Columns
7.7 Battened Columns
7.8 Compression Members Composed of Two Components Back-to-Back
SECTION 8 DESIGN OF MEMBERS SUBJECTED TO BENDING
8.1 General
8.2 Design Strength in Bending (Flexure)
8.3 Effective Length for Lateral Torsional Buckling
8.4 Shear
8.5 Stiffened Web Panels
8.6 Design of Beams and Plate Girders with Solld Webs
8.7 Stiffener Design
8.8 Box Girders
8.9 Purlins and Sheeting Rails (Girts)
8.10 Bending in a Non-Principal Plane
SECTION 9 MEMBER SUBJECTED TO COMBINED FORCES
9.1 General
9.2 Combined Shear and Bending
9.3 Combined Axial Force and Bending Moment
SECTION 10 CONNECTIONS
10.1 General
10.2 Location Details of Fasteners
10.3 Bearing Type Bolts
10.4 Friction Grip Type Bolting
10.5 Welds and Welding
10.6 Design of Connections
10.7 Minimum Design Action on Connection
10.8 Intersections
10.9 Choice of Fasteners
10.10 Connection Components
10.11 Analysis ofaBolUWeld Group
10.12LugAngles
SECTION 11 WORKING STRESS DESIGN
11.1 General
11.2 Tension Members
11.3 Compression Members
11.4 Members Subjected to Bending
11.5 Combined Stresses
11.6 Connections
SECTION 12 DESIGN AND DETAILING FOR EARTHQUAKE LOADS
12.1 General
12.2 Load and Load Combinations
12.3 Response Reduction Factor
12.4 Connections. Joints and Fasteners
12.5 Columns
12.6. Storey Drift
12.7 Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF)
 12.8 Special Concentrically Braced Frames (SCBF)
12.9 Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)
12.10 Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF)
12.11 Special Moment Frames (SMF)
12.12ColumnBases
SECTION 13 FATIGUE
13.1 General
13.2 Design
13.3 Detail Category
13.4 Fatigue Strength
13.5 Fatigue Assessment
13.6 Necessity for Fatigue Assessment
SECTION 14 DESIGN ASSISTED BY TESTING
14.1 Need for ~ e s t i n ~
14.2 Types of Test
14.3 Test Conditions
14.4 Test Loading
14.5 Criteria for Acceptance
SECTION 15DURABILITY
15.1 General
15.2 Requirements for Durability
SECTION 16 FIRE RESISTANCE
16.1 Requirements
16.2 Fire Resistance Level
16.3 Period of Structural Adequacy (PSA)
16.4 Variation of Mechanical Properties of Steel with Temperature
16.5 Limiting Steel Temperature
16.6 Temperature Increase with Time in Protected Members
16.7 Temperature Increase with Time in Unprotected Members
16.8 Determination of PSAfrom a Single Test
16.9 Three-Sided Fire Exposure Condition
16.10Special Considerations
16.11Fire Resistance Rating
SECTION 17 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
17.1 General
17.2 Fabrication Procedures
17.3 Assembly
17.4 Riveting
17.5 Bolting
17.6 Welding
17.7 Machining of Butts, Caps and Bases
17.8 Painting
17.9 Marking
17.10 Shop Erection
17.11 Packing
17.12 Inspection and Testing
17.13 Site Erection
17.14Painting After Erection
17.16 Steelwork Tenders and Contracts
 ANNEX A LIST OF REFERRED INDIAN STANDARDS
ANNEX B ANALYSIS AND DESIGN METHODS
B-1 Advanced Structural Analysis and Design
8-2 Second Order Elastic Analysis and Design

1' .
B-3 FrameInstabilityAnalysis
ANNEX C DESIGN AGAINST FLOOR VIBRATION
C-1 General
C-2 Annoyance Criteria
\ C-3 Floor Frequency
C-4 Damping
I
1 C-5 Acceleration
i
4 ANNEX D DETERMINATION OF EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
! D-1 Method for Determining Effective Length of Columns in Frames
i
D-2 Method for Determining Effective Length for Stepped Columns (see 7.2.2)
t D-3 Effective Length for Double Stepped Columns
t
I ANNEX E ELASTIC LATERALTORSIONALBUCKLING
.. E-1 Elastic Critical Moment
., . ANNEX F CONNECTIONS
:
! F-1 General
F-2 Beam Splices
j F-3 Column Splice
i
j. F-4 Beam-to-Column Connections
i F-5 Column Bases
i
i~
:, ~:
ANNEX GGENERALRECOMMENDATIO~SFOR STEELWORKTENDERS
: I
, d AND CONTRACTS
i
8 i- G-1 General
:I G-2 Exchange of Information
1 G-3 Infonnation Required by the Steelwork Designer
i i
1 i. G 4 Information Required by Tenderer (If Not Also Designer)
G-5 Detailing
I i G-6 Time Schedule
: t G-7 Procedure on Site
j
! G-8 Inspection
i j
G-9 Maintenance
i
.. 'I
e

ANNEX H PLASTIC PROPERTIES OF BEAMS

i
 Indian Standard
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION IN
STEEL - CODE OF PRACTICE
( Third Revision )
SECTION 1 1.3.1 Accidental Loads - Loads due to explosion,
GENERAL impact of vehicles, or other rare loads for which the
structure is considered to be vulnerable as per the user.
1.1Scope 1.3.2 Accompanying Lond - Live (imposed) load
1.1.1 This standard applies to general construction acting along with leading imposed load but causing
using hot rolled steel sections joined using riveting, lower actions andlor deflections.
bolting and welding. Specific provisions for bridges, 1.3.3Action Effect orLoadEffect-The internal force,
chimneys, cranes, tanks, transmission line towers, bulk axial, shear, bending or twisting moment, due to
storage structures, tubular structures, cold formed light external actions and temperature loads.
gauge steel sections, etc, are covered in separate
standards. 1.3.4 Action - The primary cause for stress or
deformations in a structure such as dead, live, wind,'
1.1.2This standard gives only general guidance as regards seismic or temperatureloads.
thevarious loads to be considered in design. For the actual
loads and load combinations lo be used, reference may 1.3.5 Actual Length -The length between centre-to-
be made to IS 875 for dead, live, snow and wind loads centre of intersectionpoints, with supporting members
and to IS 1893 (Part 1) for eaahquake loads. or the cantilever length in the case of a free standing
member.
1.1.3 Fabrication and erection requirements covered
in this standard are general and the minimum necessary 1.3.6 Beam - A member subjected predominatly to
quality of material and workmanship consistent with bending.
ass;mptions in the design rules. The actual 1.3.7 Bearing Type Connectiorl -A connection made
requirements may be further developed as per other
using bolts in 'snug-tight' condition, or rivets where
standards or the project specification, the type of the load is transferred by bearing of bolts or rivets
structure and the method of construction. against plate inside the bolt hole.
1.1.4 For seismic design, recommendations pertaining
to steel frames only are covered in this standard. For
1.3.8 Braced Member - A member in which the
relative transverse displacement is effectively prevented
more detailed information on seismic design of other
by bracing.
structural and non-structural components, refrence
should be made to IS 1893 (Part l j a n d other special 1.3.9 Brittle Cladding -Claddings, such as asbestos
publications on the subject. cement sheets wh'ich get damaged before undergoing
considerable deformation.
1.2 References
1.3.10 Buckling Load-The load at which an element,
The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions a member or a structure as a whole, either collapses in
which through reference in this text, constitute service or buckles in a load test and develops excessive
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, lateral (out of plane) deformation or instability.
the editions indicated were valid. All standards are
subject to revision and parties to agreements based on 1.3.11 Buckling Strength or Resistance - Force or
this standard are encouraged to investigate the moment, which a member can withstand without
possibility of applying the most recent editions of the buckling.
standards indicated in Annex A. 1.3.12 Built-up ~ e c t i o n- A member fabricated by
interconnecting more than one element to form a
1.3 Terminology compound section acting as a single member.
For the purpose of this standard, the followilig 1.3.13 Camber-Intentionally introduced pre-curving
definitions shall apply. (usually upwards) in a system, member or any portion
 of a member with respect to itschord. Frequently, 1.3.28 Detail Category - Designation given to a
camber is introduced to compensate for deflections at particular detail to indicate the S-N curve to be used in
a specific level of loads. fatigue assessment.
1.3.14 Characteristic Load (Action) -The value of 1.3.29 Discontinuity - A sudden change in cross-
specified load (action), above which not more than a section of a loaded member, causing a stress
specified percentage (usually 5 percent) of samples of concentration at the location.
corresponding load are expected to be encountered.
1.3.30 Ductility -It is the property of the material or
1.3.15 Characteristic Yield/Ultimate Stress - The a structure indicating the extent to which it can deform
minimum value of stress, below which not more than beyond the limit of yield deformationbefore failure or
a specified percentage (usually 5 percent) of fracture. The ratio of ultimate to yield deformation is
corresponding stresses of samples tested are expected usually termed as ductility.
to occur.
1.3.31 Durability - It is the ability of a material to
1.3.16 Column - A member in upright (vertical) resist deterioration over long periods of time.
position which supports a roof or floor system and
1.3.32 Earthquake Loads - The inertia forces
predominantly subjected to compression.
produced in a structure due to the ground movement
1.3.17 Compact Section -A cross-section, which can during an earthquake.
develop plastic moment, but has inadequate. plastic
1.3.33Edge Distance -Distance from the centre of a
rotation capacity needed for formation of a plastic
fastener hole to the nearest edge of an element
collapse mechanism of the member or structure.
measured perpendicular to the direction of load
1.3.18 Constant Stress Range - The amplitude transfer.
between which the stress ranges under cyclic loading
1.3.34 Effective Lateral Restraint - Restraint, that
is constant during the life of the structure or a structural
produces sufficient resistance to prevent deformation
element.
in the lateral direction.
1.3.19 Corrosion -An electrochemical process over
1.3.35Effective Length -Actual length of a member
the surface of steel, leading to oxidation of the metal.
between points of effective restraint or effective
1.3.20 Crane Load - Horizontal and vertical loads restraint and free end, multiplied by a factor to take
from cranes. account of the end conditions in buckling strength
calculations.
1.3.21 Cumulative Fatigue - Total damage due to
fatigue loading of varying stress ranges. 1.3.36 Elastic Cladding - Claddings, such as metal
sheets, that can undergo considerable deformation
1.3.22 Cut-offLimit-The stress range, corresponding
without damage.
to the particular detail, below which cyclic loading need
not be considered in cumulative fatigue damage 1.3.37 Elastic Critical Moment -The elasticmoment,
evaluation (corresponds to lo8 numbers of cycles in which initiates lateral-torsional buckling of a laterally
most cases). unsupported beam.
1.3.23 Dead Loads - The self-weights of all 1.3.38Elastic Design -Design, which assumes elastic
permanent constructions and installations including the behaviour of materials throughout the service load
self-weight of all walls, partitions, floors, roofs, and range.
other permanent fixtures acting on a member.
1.3.39Elastic Limit -It is the stress below which the
1.3.24 Deflection - It is the deviation from the material regains its original size and shape when the
standard position of a member or structure. load is removed. In steel design, it is taken as the yield
stress.
1.3.25 Design Life-Time period for which a structure
or a structural element is required to perform its 1.3.40 End Distance -Distance from the centre of a
function without damage. fastener hole to the edge of an element measured
parallei'to the direction of load transfer.
1.3.26 Design LoadFactored Load - A load value
obtained by multiplying the characteristic load with a 1.3.41 Erection Loads - The actions (loads and
load factor. deformations) experienced by the structure exclusively
during erection.
1.3.27 Design Spectrnrn - Frequency distribution of
the stress ranges from all the nominal loading events 1.3.42 Erection Tolerance - Amount of deviation
during the design life (stress spectrum). related to the plumbness, alignment, and level of the
element as a whole in the erected position. The 1.3.53 Flexural Stiffness - Stiffnsss of a member
deviations are determined by considering the locations against rotation as evaluated by the value of bending
of the ends of the element. deformation moment required to cause a unit rotation
1.3.43 Exposed Surface Area to Mass Ratio -The while all other degrees of freedom of the joints of the
ratio of the surface area exposed to the fire (in mm2) to member except the rotated one are assumed to be
the mass of steel (in kg). restrained.
NOTE- In the case of members with tire pratectian material 1.3.54 Friction Type Connection - Connection
applied, the exposed surface area is to be taken as the internal effected by using pre-tensioned high strength bolts
surface area of the fire protection material. where shear force transfer is due to mobilisation of
1.3.44 Fabrication Tolerance -Amount of deviation friction between the connected plates due to clamping
allowed in the nominal dimensions and geometry in force developed at the interface of connected plates
fabrication activities, such as cutting to length, finishing by the bolt pre-tension.
of ends, cutting of bevel angles, etc.
1.3.55 Garrge-The spacing between adjacent parallel
1.3.45 Factor of Safety -The factor by which the yield lines of fasteners, transverse to the direction of load1
stress of the material of a member is divided to arrive stress.
at the permissible stress in the material.
1.3.56 Gravity Load - Loads arising due to
1.3.46 Fatigue - Damage caused by repeated gravitational effects.
fluctuations of stress, leading to progressive cracking
of a structural element. 1.3.57 Gusset Plate-the plate to which the members
intersecting at a joint are connected.
1.3.47 Fatigue Loading - Set of nominal loading
events, cyclic in nature, described by the distribution 1.3.58 High Shear - High shear condition is caused
of the loads, their magnitudes and the number of when the actual shear due to factored load is greater
applications in each nominal loading event. than a certain fraction of design shear resistance
(see 9.2.2).
1.3.48 Fatigue Strength -The stress range for a
category of detail, depending upon the number of 1.3.59 I~nposed(Live) Load - The load assumed to
cycles it is required to withstand during design life. be produced by the intended use or occupancy
including distributed, concentrated, impact, vibration
1.3.49 Fire Exposrrre Condition
and snow loads but excluding, wind, earthquake and
a) Three-sidedfire exposure condition - Steel temperature loads.
member incorporated in or in contact with a
concrete or masonry floor or wall (at least
1.3.60 Instability -The phenomenon which disables
against one surface). an element, member or a structure to carry further load
due to excessive deflection lateral to the direction of
NOTES
1 Three-sided fire exposure condition is to be considered loading and vanishing stiffness.
separately unless otherwise specifled (see 16.10).
1.3.61 Lateral Restraintfor a Beam (see 1.3.34)
2 Members with more than one face in conlact with a
concrete or masonry floor ar wall may he treated as 1.3.62 Leading Imposed Load -Imposed load causing
three-sided fire exposure.
higher action andlor deflection.
b) Fo~rr-sidedfire exposure condition - Steel
member, which may be exposed to fire on all 1.3.63 Limit State -Any limiting condition beyond
sides. which the structure ceases to fulfil its intended function
(see also 1.3.86).
1.3.50 Fire Protection System -The fire protection
material and its method of attachment to the steel 1.3.64 Live Load (see 1.3.59)
member. 1.3.65 Load -An exter~iallyapplied force or action
1.3.51 Fire Resistance -The ability of an element, (see also 1.3.4).
component or structure, to fulfil for a stated period of
1.3.66 Main Member - A structural member, which
time, the required stability, integrity, thermal insulation
is primarily responsible for carrying and distributing
andlor other expected performance specified in a
the applied load or action.
standard fire test.
1.3.52 Fire Resistance Level-The fmresistance grading 1.3.67 Mill Tolerance -Amount of variation allowed
period for a structural element or system, in minutes, from the nominal dimensions and geometry, with
which is required to be attained in the standardfKe respect to cross-sectional area, non-parallelism of
 flanges, and out of straightness such as sweep or structures, members or connections that are nominally
camber, in a product, as manufactured in a steel mill. identical (full scale) to the units tested.
1.3.68 Normal Stress - Stress component acting 1.3.82 Prying Force - Additional tensile force
normal to the face, plane or section. developed in a bolt as a result of the flexing of a
connection component such as a beam end plate or leg
1.3.69 Partial Safety Factor - The factor normally of an angle.
greater than unity by which either the loads (actions)
are multiplied or the resistances are divided to obtain 1.3.83 Rotation - The change in angle at a joint
the design values. between the original orientation of two linear member
and their final position under loading.
1.3.70 Period of Structural Adequacy under Fire -
The time (t),in minutes, for the member to reach the 1.3.84 Secondary Member - Member which is
limit state of structural inadequacy in a standard fire provided for overall stability and or for restraining the
test. main members from buckling or similar modes of
failure.
1.3.71 Permissible Stress -When a structure is being
designed by the working stress method, the maximum 1.3.85 Semi-compact Section -Cross-section, which
can attain the yield moment, but not the plastic moment
stress that is permitted to be experienced in elements,
before failure by plate buckling.
members or structures under the nominal/service load
(action). 1.3.86 Serviceability Limit State - A limit state of
acceptable service condition exceedence of which
1.3.72 Pitch -The centre-to-centre distance between causes serviceability failure.
individual fasteners in a line, in the direction of load/
stress. 1.3.87 Shear Force - The inplane force at any
transverse cross-section of a straight member of a
1.3.73 Plastic Collapse -The failure stage at which column or beam.
sufficient number of plastic hinges have formed due
to the loads (actions) in a structure leading to a failure 1.3.88 Shear Lag -The in plane shear deformation
mechanism. effect by which concentrated forces tangential to the
surface of aplate gets distributed over the entire section
1.3.74 Plastic Design -Design against the limit state perpendicular to the load over a finite length of the
of plastic collapse. plate along the direction of the load.
1.3.75 Plastic Hinge - A yielding zone with 1.3.89 Shear Stress -The stress component acting
significant inelastic rotation, whichforms in amember, parallel to a face, plane or cross-section.
when the plastic moment is reachedat a section.
1.3.90 Slender Section - Cross-section in which the
1.3.76 Plastic Moment-Moment capacity of across- elements buckle locally before reaching yield moment.
section when the entire cross-section has yielded due
1.3.91 Slenderness Ratio -The ratio of the effective
to bending moment.
length of a member to the radius of gyration of the
1.3.77 Plastic Section - Cross-section, which can cross-section about the axis under consideration,
develop a plastic hinge and sustain plastic moment over 1.3.92 Slip Resistance - Limit shear that can be
sufficient plastic rotation required for formation of applied in afriction grip connection before slip occurs.
plastic failure mechanism of the member or structure.
1.3.93 S-N Cume -The curve defining the relationship
1.3.78 Poisson's Ratio - It is the absolute value of between the number of stress cycles to failure (N,,) at
the ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain under a constant stress range (S,),during fatigue loading of
uni-axial loading. a structure.
1.3.79PmofStress -The stress to which high strength 1.3.94 Snow Load - Load on a structure due to the
friction grip (HSFG) bolts are pre-tensioned. accumulation of snow and ice on surfaces such as roof.
1.3.80 Proof Testing -The application of test loads 1.3.95 Snug Tight -The tightness of a bolt achieved
to a structure, sub-structure, member or connection to by a few impacts of an impact wrench or by the full
ascertain the structural characteristics of only that effort of a person using a standard spanner.
specific unit.
1.3.96 Stability Limit State - A limit state
1.3.81 Prototype Testing -Testing of structure, sub- corresponding to the loss of static equilibrium of a
structure, members or connections to ascertain the structure by excessive deflection transverse to the
structural characteristics of that class of structures, sub- direction of predominant loads.
1.3.97 Stickability -The ability of the fire protection 1.3.115 Transverse -Direction along the stronger axes
system to remain in place as the member deflects under of the cross-section of the member.
load during a fire test. 1.3.116 Ultbnate Limit State -The state which, if
1.3.98 Stiffener- An element used to retain or prevent exceeded can cause collapse of a part or the whole of
the out-of-plane deformations of plates. the structure.
1.3.99 Strain - Deformation per unit length or unit 1.3.117 Ultimate Stress (see 1.3.113)
angle. 1.3.118 Wind Loads -Load experienced by member
1.3.100 Strain Hardening - The phenomenon of or structure due to wind pressure acting on the surfaces.
increase in stress with increase in strain beyond
1.3.119 Yield Stress -The characteristic stress of the
yielding. material in tension before the elastic limit of the
1.3.101 Stre~zgth- Resistance to failure by yielding material is exceeded, as specified in the appropriate
or buckling. Indian Standard, as listed in Table 1.
1.3.102 Strength Limit State -A limit state of collapse 1.4 Symbols
or loss of structural integrity.
Symbols used in this standard shall have the following
1.3.103 Stress -The internal force per unit area of meanings with respect to the structure or member or
the original cross-section. condition, unless otherwise defined elsewhere in this
1.3.104 StressAnal.ysis -The analysis of the internal Code.
force and stress condition in an element, member or A - Area of cross-section
structure. - Area at root of threads
A,
1.3.105 Stress Cycle Counting - Sum of individual A, - Effective cross-sectional area
stress cycles from stress history arrived at using. any A,, - Reduced effective flange area
rational method. - Total flange area
A,
1.3.106 Stress Range -Algebraic difference between A, - Gross cross-sectional area
two extremes of stresses in a cycle of loading. A,, - Gross cross-sectional area of flange
1.3.107 Stress Spectrum -Histogram of stress cycles - Gross cross-sectional area of
produced by a nominal loading event design spectrum, outstanding (not connected) leg of a
during design life. member
1.3.108 Strirct~tralAdequacy for Fire -The ability of
- Net area of the total cross-section
the member to carry the test load exposed to the -Net tensile cross-sectional areaof bolt
standard fire test. - Net cross-sectional area of the
connected leg of a member
1.3.109 Strucnrral Analysis -The analysis of stress,
strain, and deflection characteristics of a structure.
- Net cross-sectional area of each
flange
1.3.110 Strut -A compression member, which may - Net cross-sectional area of
be oriented in any airection. outstanding (not connected) leg of a
1.3.111 Sway -The lateral deflection of a frame. member
- Nominal bearing area of bolt on any
1.3.112 Sway Member - A member in which the plate
transverse displacement of one end, relative to the other
-Cross-sectional area of a bearing
is not effectively prevented.
(load carrying) stiffener in contact
1.3.113 Tensile Stress - The characteristic stress with the flange
corresponding to rupture in tension, specified for the - Tensile stress area
grade of steel in the appropriate Indian Standard, as -Gross cross-sectional area of a bolt
A,,
listed in Table 1. at the shank
1.3.114 Test Load- The factored load, equivalent to At8
-Gross sectional area in tension from
a specified load combination appropriate for the type the centre of the hole to the toe of
of test being performed. the angle sectionlchannel section,etc
(see 6.4) perpendicular to the line of
force
 IS 800 :2007

At, - Net sectional area in tension from the compression flange angles, plates or
centre of the. hole to the toe of tongue plates to the neutral axis
the angle perpendicular to the line -
of force (see 6.4)
4 Diameter of a bolt1 rivet hole
do -Nominal diameter of the pipe column
A, - Shear area or the dimensions of the column in
4 - Gross cross-sectional area in shear the depth direction of the base plate
along the line of transmitted force
(see 6.4) 4 - Panel zone depth in the beam-column
junction
A,, - Net cross-sectional area in shear E - Modulus of elasticity for steel
along the line of transmitted force
(see 6.4 )
E (T) - Modulus of elasticity of steel at T°C
E (20) - Modulus of elasticity of steel at 20°C
a, b - Larger and smaller projection of the
slab base beyond the rectangle E~ - Modulus of elasticity of the panel
circumscribing the column, material
respectively (see 7.4) F,, - Buckling strength of un-stiffened
beam web under concentrated load
a, - Peak acceleration
a, - Unsupported length of individual Fd - Factored design load
elements being laced between lacing Fn - Normal force
points F, - Minimum proof pretension in high
B - Length of side of cap or base plate of strength friction grip bolts.
a column F,, - Bearing capacity of load carrying
b - Outstandlwidth of the element stiffener
b~ - Stiff bearing length, Stiffener bearing Fq - Stiffener force
length F,,, - Stiffener buckling resistance
be - Effective width of flange between Fte,, - Test load
pair of bolts F,,,,,, - Load for acceptance test
br - Width of the flange F ,,,,,M - Minimum test load from the test to i
failure 'I
bi - Width of flange as an internal element
i
b, - Width of flange outstand F,<,,,, - Test load resistance
b, - Panel zone width between column F,,,,, - Strength test load
flangesat beam-column junction Fw - Design capacity of the web in bearing
bs - Shear lag distance F, - External load, force orreaction
b, - Width of tension field Fxd - Buckling resistance of load carrying
bw - Width of outstanding leg web stiffener
C - Centre-to-centre longitudinal f . - Actual normal stress range for the
distance of battens detail category
cm - Coefficient of thermal expansion f, - Frequency for a simply supported one
C,,, C,, - Moment amplification factor about way system
respective axes A -- Frequency of floor supported on steel
c - Spacing of transverse stiffener girder perpendicular to the joist
cb - Moment amplification factor for f. - Calculated stress due to axial force
, braced member at service load

1
..
!
- Moment reduction factor for lateral -Permissible bending stress in
i
1i
Cm f,bc

torsional buckling strength compression at service load

calculation f, - Permissible compressive stress at
Cs - Moment amplification factor for service load
I sway frame - Permissible bending stress in tension
1 :
1
D - Overall depthfdiameter of the cross-
f,b,
at service load
I ~ section f,,, - Permissible bearing stress of the bolt
I j d - Depth of web, Nominal diameter at service load
1 ' '

- Permissible stress of the bolt in shear

4 - Twice the clear distance from the f,a
i z at service load

;!
f", - Permissible tensile stress at service fv - Applied shear stress in the panel
load designedutilizing tension field action
Ltb
- Permissible tensile stress of the bolt fw - Actual stress of weld at service load
at service load fwd - Design stress of weld at service load
LW - Permissible stress of the weld at f,. - Nominal strength of fillet weld
service load f" - Maximum longitudinal stress under
.fh
."
- Actual bending stress at service load combined axial force and bending
fk - Actual bending stress in compression - Characteristic yield stress
at service load - Yield stress of steel at T "C
fbd - Design bending compressive stress - Yield stress of steel at 20°C
corresponding to lateral buckling - Characteristic yield stress of bolt
fb,
- Actual bearing stress due to bending - Characteristic yield stress of flange
at service load
- Average yield stress as obtained from
fbt
- Actual bending stress in tension at test
service load
- Characteristic yield stress of
fb. - Permissible bending stress in column connected plate
base at service load
- Characteristic yield stress of stiffener
f" - Actual axial compressive stress at material
service load
- Characteristic yield stress of the web
f", - Elastic buckling stress of a column, material
Euler buckling stress
- Modulus of rigidity for steel
f, - Design compressive stress - Gauge length between centre of the
f,, b
- Extreme fibre compressive stress holes perpendicular to the load
corresponding elastic lateral buckl~ng direction, acceleration due to gravity
moment
- Depth of the section
f" - Equivalent stress at service load
- Total heightfrom the base to the floor
f, - Fatigue stress range corresponding to level concerned
5 x 106cyclesof loading
- Height of the column
Aeq - Equivalent constant amplitude stress - Effective thickness
f, - Design normal fatigue strength - Cenre-to-centre distance of flanges
A,Max - Highest normal stress range - Thickness of fire protection material
- Normal fatigue stress range
f, - Height of the lip
f., - Normal stress in weld at service load - Storey height
f, - Proof stress - Distance between shear centre of the
fP
- Actual bearing stress at service load two flanges of a cross-section
fpb
- Actual bearing stress in bending at - Moment of inertia of the member
service load about an axis perpendicular to the
fpSd - Bearing strength of the stiffeners plane of the frame
f, - Frequency - Moment of inertia of the compression
f,, - Actual shear stress in bolt at service flange of the beam about the axis
load parallel to the web
f, - Actual tensile stress at service load - Moment of inertia of the tension
- Actual tensile stress of the bolt at flange of the beam about minor axis
f b
service load - Moment of inertia of a pair of
- Characteristic ultimate tensile stress stiffener about the centre of the web,
f" or a single stiffener about the face of
f"b - Characteristic ultimate tensile stress
of the bolt the web
- Second moment of inertia
f". - Average ultimate stress of the
material as obtained from test - Second moment of inertia of the
- Characteristic ultimate tensile stress
stiffener about the face of the element
f", perpendicular to the web
of the connected plate
 - Transformed moment of ~nertiaof the - Centre-to-centre length of the
one way system (in terms of supporting member
equivalent steel, assuming the - Distance between prying force and
concrete flange of width equal to the bolt centre line
spacing of the beam to be effective) - Grip length of bolts in a connection
- St. Venant's torsion constant
- Length of the joint
- Warping constant
- Length between points of lateral
- Moment of inertia about the minor support to the compression flange in
axis of the cross-section a beam
- Moment of inertia about the major - Distance frem bolt centre line to the
axis of the cross-section toe of fillet weld or to half the root
- Effective stiffness of the beam and radius for a rolled section
column - Length of weld
- Reduction factor to account for the - Bending moment
high strength friction grip connection - Applied bending moment
bolts in over sized and slotted holes
- Elastic critical moment
- Effective length of the member corresponding to lateral torsional
- Appropriate effective slenderness buckling of the beam
ratio of the section - Design flexural strength
- Effective slenderness ratio of the
- Moment capacity of thesection under
section about the minor axis of the high shear
section
- Design bending strength about the
- Effective slenderness ratio of the minor axis of the cross-section
section about the major axis of the
section
- Design bending strength about the
major axis of the cross-section
- Actual maximum effective - Reduced effective moment
slenderness ratio of the laced column
- Reduced plastic moment capacity of
- Effective slenderness ratio of the the flange plate
= laced column accounting for shear Mid - Design plastic resistance of the flange
deformation alone
Kv - Shear buckling co-efficient - Design bending strength under
combined axial force and uniaxial
Kw - Warping restraint factor moment
k - Regression coefficient
M,,-Design bending strength under
ksm - Exposed surface area to mass ratio combined axial force and the
L - Actual length, unsupported length, respective uniaxial moment acting
Length centre-to-centre distance of alone
the intersecting members, Cantilever
- Plastic moment capacity of the
length
section
LC - Length of end connection in bolted - Moment in the beam at the
and welded members, taken as the
intersection of the beam and column
distance between outermost fasteners
centre lines
in the end connection, or the length
of the end weld, measured along the - Moments in the column above and
length of the member below the beam surfaces
LLT - Effective length for lateral torsional - Plastic design strength
buckling - Plastic design strength of flanges only
- Maximum distance from the restraint - Applied moment on the stiffener
to the compression flange at the - Moment at service (working) load
plastic hinge to an adjacent restraint - Moment resistance of tension flange
(limiting distance) - Factored applied moment about the
- Length between points of zero minor axis of the cross-section
moment (inflection) in the span
MY, - Moment capacity of the stiffener - Net shear in bolt group at bolt "i"
based on its elastic modulus - Response reduction factor
Mz - Factored applied moment about the - Flange shear resistance
major axis of the cross-section - Ultimate strength of the member at
N - Number of parallel planes of battens room temperature
Nd - Design strength in tension or in - Appropriate radius of gyration
compression - Minimum radius of gyration of the
Nt - Axial force in the flange individual element being laced
Nsc - Number of stress cycles together
n - Number of bolts in the bolt group1 - Ratio of the design action on the
critical section member under fire to the design
- Number of effective interfaces capacity
4
offering frictional resistance to slip - Radius of gyration about the minor
- Number of shear planes with the axis (v-v) of angle section.
no
threads intercepting the shear plane - Radius of gyration about the minor
in the bolted connection axis
n, - Number of shear planes without - Radius of gyration about the major
threads intercepting the sbear plane axis
in the bolted connection - Minimum transverse distance
P - Factored applied axial force between the centroid of the rivet or
PC. - Elastic buckling load bolt group or weld group
- Design axial compressive strength - Constant stress range
pd
Pap,,- Design compression strength as - Design strength
governed by flexural buckling about - Original cross-sectional area of the
the respective axis test specimen
p. - Elastic Euler buckling load - Spring stiffness
PM,, - Minimum required strength for each - Ultimate strength
flange splice - Anchorage length of tension field
4 - Required compressive strength along the compression flange
p, - Actual compression at service load - Anchorage length of tension field
- Yield strength of the cross-section along the tension flange
P
Y
under axial compression - Actual stiffener spacing
P - Pitch length between centres of holes - Temperature in degree Celsius;
parallel to the direction of the Factored tension
load - Applied tension in bolt
P, - Staggered pitch length along the - Thickness of compression flange
direction of the load between lines of - Design strength under axial tension
the bolt holes (see Fig. 5)
- Yielding strength of gross section
Q - Prying force under axial tension
9, - Accidental load (Action) - Rupture strength of net section under
Q, - Characteristic loads (Action) axial tension
Qd - Design load (Action) - Design strength of bolt under axial
QP - Permanent loads (Action) tension; Block shear strength at
Q, - Variable loads (Action) end connection
- Shear stress at service load - Externally applied tension
4
R - Ratio of the mean compressive stress - Factored tension force of friction type
in the web (equal to stress at bolt
middepth) to yield stress of the web; - Limiting temperature of the steel
reaction of the beam at support - Nominal strength of bolt under axial
Rd - Design strength of the member at tension
room temperature - Design tension capacity
 Tndr - Design tension capacity of friction member with respect to extreme
type bolt compression fibre
Tnr - Nominal tensile strength of friction - Elastic section modulus of the
type bolt member with respect to extreme
- Actual tension under service load tension fibre
T,
I - Thickness of elementlangle, time in - Plastic section modulus
minutes - Contribution to the plastic section

+ - Thickness of flange
- Thickness of plate
modulus of the total shear area of the
cross-section
t~ - Distance between point of application
tDk
- Thickness of packing of the load and shear centre of
14
- Thickness of stiffener the cross-section
4 - Thickness of base slab - Co-ordinate of the shear centre in
8, - Effective throat thickness of welds respect to centroid
~.:. . I, - Thickness of web, - Imperfection factor for buckling
. . V - Factored applied shear force strength in columns and beams
vb
- Shear in batten plate - Coefficient of thermal expansion
- Factored frictional shear force in - Ratio of smaller to the larger bending
vw moment at the ends of a beam
friction type connection
- Critical shear strength corresponding
column
vcr ,,
- Equivalent uniform moment factor
to web buckling
for flexural buckling for y-y and z-z
vd - Design shear strength axes respectively
- Block shear strength
- Equivalent uniform moment factor
- Nominal shear strength of bolt for lateral torsional buckling
- Bearing capacity of bolt for friction - Strength reduction factor to account
type connection for buckling under compression
- Plastic shear resistance under pure - Strength reduction factor, X, atf,
shear - Strength reduction factor to account
- Nominal shear strength for lateral torsional buckling of
- Nominal bearing strength of bolt beams
- Nominal shear capacity of a bolt - Storey deflection
- Nominal shear capacity of bolt as - Horizontal deflection of the bottom
governed by slip in friction type of storey due to combined gravity
connection and notional load
- Transverse shear at service load - Load amplification factor
- Factored shear force in the bolt - Horizontal deflection of the top of
- Design shear capacity storey due to combined gravity and
- Design shear strength in friction type
notional load
bolt - Inclination of the tension field stress
- Factored design shear force of in web
friction bolts - Unit weight of steel
- Applied transverse shear - Partial safety factor for load
- Shear resistance in tension field - Partial safety factor for material
- Total load - Partial safety factor against yield
stress and buckling
- Uniform pressure from below on the
slab base due to axial compression - Partial safety factor against ultimate
under the factored load stress
- Width of tension field - Partial safety factor for bolted
connection with bearing type bolts
- Torsional index
- Partial safety factor for bolted
- Elastic section modulus connection with High Strength
- Elastic section modulus of the Friction Grip bolts
 Ym - Partial safety factor for fatigue load a) Forces and loads, in kN, kNlm, kN/m2;
Ymf, - Partial safety factor for fatigue b) Unit mass, in kg/m3;
strength C) Unit weight, in kN/m3;
Y"," - Partial safety factor against shear d) Stresses and strengths, in N/mm2 (MN/mz or
failure MPa); and
- Partial safety factor for strength of Moments (bending, etc), in kNm.
Ymw e)
weld
For conversion of one system of units to another
E - Yield stress ratio (250 If,) 'I2 system, IS 786 (Supplement) may be referred.
h - Non-dimensional slenderness ratio =
1.6 Standard Dimensions, Form and Weight
The dimensions, form, weight, tolerances of all rolled
shapes, all rivets, bolts, nuts, studs, and welds and other
members used in any steel structure shall conform to
A,, - Elastic buckling load factor IS 808 and IS 1852, wherever applicable.
4 - Equivalent slenderness ratio
- Non-dimensional slenderness ratio in 1.7 Plans and Drawings
LT
lateral bending 1.7.1 Plans, drawings and stress sheet shall be prepared
a, - Elastic buckling load factor of each according to IS 8000 (Parts 1 to 4), IS 8976 and IS 962.
storey
1.7.1.1 Plans
P - Poisson's ratio
The plans (design drawings) shall show the sizes,
K - Correction factor
- Coefficient of friction (slip factor) sections, and the relative locations of the various
PF members. Floor levels, column centres, and offsets
H - Capacity reduction factor
shall be dimensioned. Plans shall be drawn to a scale
t3 - Ratio of tbe rotation at the hinge point large enough to convey the information adequately.
to the relative elastic rotation of the Plans shall indicate the type of construction to be
far end of the beam segment employed; and shall be supplemented by such data on
containing plastic hinge the assumed loads, shears, moments and axial forces
P - Unit mass of steel to be resisted by all members and their connections, as
Z - Actual shear stress range for the detail may be required for the proper preparation of shop
category drawings. Any special precaution to be taken in the
- Buckling shear stress erection of structure, from the design consideration
Zb
- Permissible shear stress at the service shall also be indicated in the drawing.
Tab
load 1.7.1.2 Shop drawings
=cc,*
- Elastic critical shear stress Shop drawings, giving complete information
Tr - Fatigue shear stress range necessary for the fabrication of the component parts
7,. a,, - Highest shear stress range of the structure including the location, type, size,
b - Design shear fatigue strength length and detail of all welds and fasteners shall be
- Fatigue shear stress range atN,,cycle prepared in advance of the actual fabrication. They
Tin
for the detail category shall clearly distinguish between shop and field rivets,
bolts and welds. For additional information to be
7" - Actual shear stress at service load
included on drawings for designs based on the use of
W - Ratio of the moments at the ends of welding, reference shall be made to appropriate Indian
the laterally unsupported length of Standards. Shop drawings shall b e niade in
a beam conformity with IS 962. A marking diagram allotting
r - Frame buckling load factor distinct identification marks to each separate part of
NOTE -The subscripls ): r denote the y-y and 2-z axes of the steel work shall be prepared. The diagram shall be
section, respectively. For symmetrical sections, y-y denotes the
sufficient to ensure convenient assembly and erection
minor principal axis whilst r-z denotes the major principal axis
(see 1.8). at site.

1.5 Units 1.7.2 Symbols used for welding on plans and shop
drawings shall be according to IS 813.
For the purpose of design calculations the following
units are recommended:
1.8 Convention for Member Axes 2.2.3.1 Steel that is not supported by mill test result
may be used only in unimportant members and details,
Unless otherwise specified convention used for
where their properties such as ductility and weldability
member axes is as follows (see Fig. 1):
would not affect the performance requirements of the
a) x-x along the member. members and the structure as a whole.
b) y-y an axis of the cross-section. However, such steels may be used in structural system
1) perpendicular to the flanges, and after confirming their quality by carrying out
2) perpendicular to the smaller leg in an appropriate tests in accordance with the method
angle section. specified in IS 1608.
C) z-z an axis of the cross-section 2.2.4 Properties
1) axis parallel to flanges, and
The properties of structural steel for use in design, may
2) axis parallel to smaller leg in angle be taken as given in 2.2.4.1 and 2.2.4.2.
section.
d) u-n major axis (when it does not coincide with 2.2.4.1 Physical properties of structural steel
z-z axis). irrespective of its grade may be taken as:
e) v-v minor axis (when it does not coincide with a) Unit mass of steel, p = 7 850 kg/&
y-y axis). b) Modulus of elasticity, E = 2.0 x loS Nlmm2
SECTION 2 (MPa)
MATERIALS c) Poisson ratio, p = 0.3
d) Modulus of rigidity, G = 0.769 x loSN/mm2
2.1 General (MPa)
The material properties given in this section are e) Co-efficient of thermal expansion 4 = 12 x
nominal values, to he accepted as characteristic values 10-01°C
in design calculations. 2.2.4.2 Mechanical properties of structrcmi steel
2.2 Structural Steel The principal mechanical properties of the structural
'steel important in design are the yield stress,<: the
2.2.1 The provisions in this section are applicable to tensile or ultimate stress, f";the maximum percent
the steels commonly used in steel construction, namely, elongation on a standard gauge length and notch
structural mild steel and high tensile structural steel. toughness. Except for notch toughness, the other
2.2.2 All the structural steel used in general properties are determined by conducting tensile tests
construction,coming under the purview of this standard on samples cut from the plates, sections, etc, in
shall before fabrication conform to IS 2062. accordance with IS 1608. Commonly used properties
for the common steel products of different
2.2.3 Structural steel other than those specified in 2.2.2 specifications are summarized in Table 1.
may also be used provided that the permissible stresses
and other design provisions are suitably modified and 2.3 Rivets
the steel is also suitable for the type of fabrication
adopted. 2.3.1 Rivets shall be manufactured. from steel

Frc. 1 AXESOF MEMBERS

 Table 1 Tensile Properties of Structural Steel Products
(Clauses 1.3.113, 1.3.119 nnd2.2.4.2)

SI Indian Grade/Classification Properties

No. Standard A 7
/'- Yield Stress Ultimate Tensile Stress Elongation.
MPa, Min MPa. Min Percent,
Min

(1) (2) (3) (4) (51 (6)

0 - - -
i) IS513
I D
m~o
280
250
220
270-410
270-370
270-350
28
32
35

I
Ex4Oxx 330 410-540 16
Ex4 l xx 330 410-540 20
Er42xx 330 410-540 22
Ex43xx 330 41 0-540 24
Ex44xx 330 410.540 24
Ex5Oxx 360 510-610 16
ii) IS 814 Ex5lxx 360 510-610 18

I I I
A A r-'-7
516 >16 and M 0 and >60 and >I00 G d 260 >60 and >loo' s60 >60
s40 560 5100 5350 5100 and and
5350 5350

vii) IS 2002
i i 235
265
290
225
255
285
215
245
280
200
215
255
185
200
230
360-480 360-480 350-480
410-530 410-530 400-530
460-580 450-570 440-570
24
22
21
23
21
20
 Table 1 (Concluded)

Sf Indian GradelClassification Properties

No. Standard A
F 7
Yield Stress Ultimate Tensile Stress Elongation,
MPa, Min MPa, Mi* Percent, Min
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
dort
-7
c 20 20-40 > 40
E 165 (Fe 290) 165 165 165 290 23
E 250 (Fe410 W) A 250 240 230 410 23
E250(Fe410W)B 250 240 230 410 23
E250(Fe410 W)C 250 240 230 410 23
300 290 280 440 22

-
E 350 (Fe 490) 350 330 320 490 22
E 410 (Fe 540) 410 390 380 540 20
E 450 (Fe 570) D 450 430 420 570 20
E 450 (Fe 590) E 450 430 420 590 20

dart

r Grade 1 240 350-450 25

Annealed Condition

As-Drawn Condition

HFC 240lCDS
240IERW240

I 170 290 30
2 210 330 28
xiii) IS 10748 3 240 410 25
4 275 430 20
5 310 490 15
NOTES
1 Pcl.rent ofelongation shall be taken over the gauge length 5.65 & where So= Original cross-sectiond =area of the test specimen.
2 Abbreviations: 0 =Ordinary, D = Drawing, DD = Deep Drawing, EDD = Extla Deep Drawing.
I) Stress at 0.2 percent inon-pmportional elongation, Min.
conforming to IS 7557. They may also be construction and use and have adequate resistance to
manufactured from steel conforming to IS 2062 certain expected accidental loads and fire. Structure
provided that the steel meets the requirements given should be stable and have alternate load paths to prevent
in IS 1148. disproportionate overall collapse under accidental
loading.
2.3.2 Rivets shall conform to IS 1929 and IS 2155 as
appropriate. 3.1.2 Methods of Design
2.3.3 High Tensile Steel Rivets 3.1.2.1 Structure and its elements shall normally, be
designed by the limit state method. Account shouid be
High tensile steel rivets, shall be manufactured from
taken of accepted theories, experimental information
steel conforr~lingto IS 1149.
and experience and the need to design for durability.
2.4 Bolts, Nuts and Washers Calculations alone may not produce safe, serviceable
and durable structures. Suitable materials, quality
Bolts, nuts and washers shall conform as appropriate control, adequate detailing and good supervision a1.e
to IS 1363 (Parts 1 to 3). IS 1364 (Parts 1 to 5), IS 1367 equally imporlant.
(Parts 1 to 20), IS 3640, IS 3757, IS 4000, IS 5369,
IS 5370, IS 5372, IS 5374, IS 5624, IS 6610, IS 6623, 3.1.2.2 Where the limit states method cannot be
IS 6639, and IS 6649. The recommendations in IS 4000 conveniently adopted; the working stress design (see
shall be followed. Section 11) may be used.

2.5 Steel Casting 3.1.3 Design Process

Steel casting shall conform to IS 1030 or IS 2708 Structural design, including design for durability,
construction and use should be considered as a whole.
2.6 Welding Consumable The realization of design objectives requires
compliance with clearly defined standards for
2.6.1 Covered electrodes shall conform to IS 814 or materials, fabrication, erection and in-service
IS 1395, as appropriate. maintenance.
2.6.2 Filler rods and wires for gas welding shall
conform to IS 1278. 3.2 Loads and Forces

2.6.3 The supply of solid filler wires for submerged 3.2.1 For the purpose of designing any element,
arc welding of structural steels shall conform to member or a structure, the following loads (actions)
IS 1387. and their effects shall be taken into account, where
applicable, with partial safety factors and combinations
2.6.4 The bare wire electrodes for submerged arc (see 5.3.3):
welding shall conform to IS 7280. The combination
of wire and flux shall satisfy the requirements of a) Dead loads;
IS 3613. b) Imposed loads (live load, crane load, snow
load, dust load, wave load, earth pressures,
2.6.5 Filler rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded etc);
metal arc welding shall conform to IS 6419 and
c) Wind loads;
IS 6560, as appropriate.
d) Earthquake loads;
2.7 Other Materials e) Erection loads;
Other materials used in association with structural steel t) Accidental loads such as those due to blast,
work shall conform to appropriate Indian Standards. impact of vehicIes, etc; and
g) Secondary effects due to contraction or
SECTION 3 expansion resulting from temperature
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS changes, differential settlements of the
structure as a whole or of its components,
3.1 Basis for Design eccentric connections, rigidity of joints
differing from design assumptions.
3.1.1 Design Objective
3.2.1.1 Dead loads should be assumed in design as
The objective of design is the achievement of an
specified in IS 875 (Part 1).
acceptable probability that structures will perform
satisfactorily for the intended purpose during the design 3.2.1.2 Imposed loads for different types of occupancy
life. With an appropriate degree of safety, they should and function of structures shall be taken as
sustain all the loads and deformations, during recorrmended in IS 875 (Part 2). Imposed loads arising
 from equipment, such as cranes and machines should 3.5 Load Combinations
be assumed in design as per manufacturerslsuppliers i
3.5.1 Load combinations for design purposes shall be :
data (see 3.5.4). Snow load shall be taken as per
those that produce maximum forces and effects and
IS 875 (Part 4).
consequently maxxmum stresses and deformations.
3.2.1.3 Wind loads on structures shall be taken as per The foilowing combination of loads with appropriate
the recommendations of IS 875 (Part 3). partial safety factors (see Table 4) may be considered.
3.2.1.4 Earthquake loads shall be assumed as per the a) Dead load +imposed load,
recommendations of IS 1893 (Part 1). b) Dead load + imposed load + wind or
3.2.1.5 The erection loads and temperature effects shall earthquake load,
be considered as s~ecifiedin 3.3 and 3.4 res~ectivelv. c) Dead load + wind or earthquake load, and
d) Dead load + erection load.
3.3 Erection Loads
NOTE - In the case of structures supporting crones, imposed
All loads required to be carried by the structure or any loads shall include the crane effects as given in 3.5.4.
part of it due to storage or positioning of construction 3.5.2 Wind load and earthquake loads shall not he
material and erection equipment, including all loads assumed to act simultaneously. The effect of each shall
due to operation of such equipmentshall be considered be considered separately.
as erection loads. Proper provision shall be made,
including temporary hracings, to takecare of all stresses 3.5.3 The effect of cranes to be considered under
developed during erection. Dead load, wind load and imposed loads shall include the vertical loads,
also such parts of the live load as would he imposed eccentricity effects induced by the vertical loads,
on the structure during the period of erection shall be impact factors, lateral (surge) and longitudinal
taken as acting together with the erection loads. The (horizontal) thrusts, not acting simultaneously, across
structure as a whole and all parts of the structure in and along the crane rail, respectively [see IS 875
conjunction with the temporary bracings shall be (Part Z)].
capable of sustaining these loads during erection. 3.5.4 The crane loads and their comhinations to be
3.4 Temperature Effects considered shall be as indicated by the customer. In
the absence of any specific indications, the load
3.4.1 Expansion and contraction due to changes in combinations shall be in accordance with the
temperature of themembers and elements of a structure provisions in IS 875 (Part 2) or as given below:
shall be considered and adequate provision made for
such effect. a) Vertical loads with full impact from one
.loaded crane or two cranes in case of tandem
3.4.2 The temperature range varies for different operation, together with vertical loads without
localities and under different diurnal and seasonal impact from as many loaded cranes as may
conditions. The absolute maximum and minimum be positioned for maximum effect, along with
temperatures, which may be expected in different maximum horizontal thrust. from one crane
localities of the country, may be obtained from the only or two in case of tandem operation;
Indian Metrological Department and used in assessing b) Loads as specifiedin 3.5.4(a), subject to
the maximum variations of temperature for which cranes in maximum of any two bays of the
provision for expansion and contraction has to be made building cross-section shall heconsidered for
in the structure. multi-bay multi-crane gantries;
3.4.3 The range of variation in temperature of the c) The longitudinal thrust on a crane track rail
building materials may be appreciably greater or lesser shall be considered for a maximum of two
than the variation of air temperature and is influenced loaded cranes on the track; and
by the condition of exposure and the rate at which the d) Lateral thrust (surge) and longitudinal thrust
materials composing the structure absorb or radiate acting across and along the crane rail
heat. This difference in temperature variations of the respectively, shall be assumed not to act
material and air shall be given due consideration. The simultaneously. The effect of each force, shall
effect of differential temperature within an element or however be investigated separately.
member, due to part exposure to direct sunlight shall
also be constdered. 3.5.5 While investigating the effect of earthquake
forces, the resulting effect from dead loads of all cranes
3.4.4 The co-efficient of thermal expansion for steel is parked in each bay, positioned to cause maximum effect
as given in 2.2.4.1(e). shall be considered.
3.5.6 The crane runway girders supporting bumpers shall be less than that specified under Class 1
shall be checked for bumper impact loads also, as (Plastic), in Table 2.
specified by the manufacturers. h) Class 2 (Compact) - Cross-sections, which
3.5.7 Stresses developed due to secondary effects such can develop plastic moment of resistance, but
as handling; erection, temperature and settlement of have inadequate plastic hinge rotation
foundations, if any, shall be appropriately added to the capacity for formation of plastic mechanism,
stresses calculated from the combination of loads stated due to local buckling. The width to thickness
in 3.5.1, with appropriate partial safety factors. ratio of plate elements shall be less than that
specifiedunder Class 2 (Compact), but greater
3.6 Geometrical Properties than that specified under Class 1 (Plastic), in
Table 2.
3.6.1 General
C) Class 3 (Semi-compact) - Cross-sections,
The geometrical properties of the gross and the in which the extreme fiber in compression can
effective cross-sections of a member or part thereof, reach yield stress, but cannot develop the
shall be calculated on the following basis: plastic moment of resistance, due to local
buckling. The width to thickness ratio of plate
a) The properties of the gross cross-section shall
he calculated from the specified size of the elements shall he less than that specified under
member or part thereof or read from Class 3 (Semi-compact),but greater than that
appropriate table. specified under Class 2 (Compact), inTahle 2.
d) Class 4 (Slender) -Cross-sections in which
b) The properties of the effective cross-section the elements buckle locally even before
shall becalculated by deducting from the area
reaching yield stress. The width to thickness
of the gross cross-section, the following:
ratio of plate elements shall be greater than
1) The sectional area in excess of effective that specified under Class 3 (Semi-compact),
plate width, in case of slender sections inTable 2. In such cases, the effective sections
(see 3.7.2). for design shall be calculated either by
2) The sectional areas of all holes in thesection following the provisions of IS 801 to account
except for parts in compression. In case of for the post-local-buckling strength or by
punched holes, hole size 2 rnm in excess deducting width of the compression plate
of the actual diameter may he deducted. element in excess of the semi-compact section
limit.
3.7 Classification of Cross-Sections
When different elements of a cross-section fall under
3.7.1 Plate elements of a cross-section may buckle different classes, the section shall be classified as
locally due tocompressive stresses. The local buckling governed by the most critical element.
can be avoided before the limit state is achieved by
limiting the width to thickness ratio of each element The maximum value of limiting width to thickness
of across-section subjected to compression due to axial ratios of elements for different classifications of
force, moment or shear. sections are given in Table 2.
3.7.1.1 When ~lasticanalvsis is used, the members ihall 3.7.3 Types of Elements
be capable of forming plastic binges with sufficient
a) Internal elements - These are elements
rotation capacity (ductility) without local buckling, to attached along both longitudinal edges to
enable the redistribution of bending moment required other elements or to longitudinal stiffeners
before formation of the failure mechanism. connected at suitable intervals to transverse
3.7.1.2 When elastic analysis is used, the member shall stiffeners, for example, web of I-section and
be capable of developing the yield stress under flanges and web of box section.
compression without local buckling. b) Outside elements or outstands - These are
3.7.2 On basis of the above, four classes of sections elements attached along only one of the
are defined as follows: longitudinal edges to an adjacent element, the
other edge being free to displace out of plane,
a) Class 1 (Plastic) - Cross-sections, which for example flange overhang of an 1-section,
can develop plastic hinges and have the stem of T-section and legs of an angle section.
rotation capacity required for failure of the C) . Taperedelements -These may be treated as
structure by formation of plastic mechanism. flat elements having average thickness as
The width to thickness ratio of plate elements defined in SP 6 (Part 1).
 I S 800 :2007

Table 2 Limiting Width to Thickness Ratio

i
(Clattses 3.7.2 a n d 3.7.4) i
i
.-
ri
I
i
Compression Element Ratio
Class I
Class of Seclion
Class 2
Class 3 1
1
I (1) (2)
Plastic

(3)
Compact

(4)
Semi-compact

(5)
i
Rolled section b/tr 9.4.5 10.56 15.78
Outslandi~gelement of
compression flange Welded section b/ r, 8.46 9.46 13.66

I Internal element of
coinpression flange
Compression due to
bending
b/t, 29.38
33.56 1 426

1 1: 1
- -
I Axial compression I
-
b/ tr
- -
Not applicable 1
Neutral axis at mid-depth dh, 848 1056 3266

If r , is negative:
Web of an 1,
H or box Generally
-
iz6,il~
105.0 E 1+25
section -
I f r , is positive : but 5 426 1+1.5r; but 5 4 2 s
I but542~
Axial compression #Im Not applicable 42c
Web of achannel NIw 428 426 426
Angle, compression due to bending (Both criteria should b/r 9.46 10.5~ 15.7s
be satisfied) d/r 9.4 E 10.5~ 15.78

1 Single angle, or double angles with the components

separated, axial compression (All three criteria should be
satisfied)
1I 2
(b+d)/l
1I Not applicable
I
15.78
256
Outstanding leg of an angle in contact back-to-back in a
#I 9.46 10.56 15.76
doubleangle member

I Outstanding leg of an angle with its back in continuous

conlact w ~ t hanother component

I Stem of a T-section, rolled or cut from a rolled I-or M-

section
I D/tt 1 8.48 ( 9.4s I i 8.96'
I
Circular hollow tube, including welded tube subjected to:
a) moment D/t 422 522 146s'

b) axial compression D/t Not applicable 882

NOTES
I Elements which exceed semi-compact limits are to be taken as ofslender cross-section.
2 E = (250lfi)"?.
3 Webs shall be cheoked for shear buckling in accordance with 8.4.2 when dlt > 6 7 ~where, , b is the width of the element (may be
taken as clear distance between lateral suppons or between lateral suppott and free edge, as appropriate), I is the thickness of
element, d i s the depth of the web, D is the outer diameter of the element (see Fig. 2.3.7.3 and 3.7.4).
4 Different elements of a cross-section can be in different classes. In such cases the section is classified based on the least
favourable ciassifiealion.
5 The stress ratio rl and r: are defined as:
Acl~alavelagc nx:al stress (n:gative if tr~lslle)
7, =
I)r.sign comprecsivc stress of web alone
Act~nla%er3geaxis1 strr'ss (negatibe ittcnrile)
,) =
Dcs~cncompressisc stress of o\crll section
The design of slender compression element (Class 4) 3.7.4 Con~polrndElements in Built-irp Section
considering the strength beyond elastic local buckling (see Fig. 2)
of element is outside thd scope of this standard.
In case of compound elements consisting of two or
Reference may be made to IS 801 for such design more elements bolted or welded together, the limiting
provisions. The design of slender web elements may
width to thickness ratios as given in Table should be
be made as given in 8.2.1.1 for flexure and 8.4.2.2 for considered on basis of the following:
shear.

ROLLED BEAMS ROLLED RECTANGULAR CIRCULAR

AND COLUMNS CHANNELS HOLLOW HOLLOW
SECTIONS SECTIONS

SINGLE ANGLES TEES ' DOUBLE ANGLES

(BACK TO BACK)

BUILT-UP
SECTIONS

COMPOUND ELEMENTS

Q - Internal Element Width

be - External Element Width

FIG.2 DIMENSIONS
OF SECTIONS
 a) Outstanding width of compound element (b,) are capable of effectively transmitting all the horizontal
to its own thickness. forces directly to the foundations, the structural steel
b) The internal width of each added plate framework may he designed without considering the
between the lines of welds or fasteners effect of wind or earthquake.
connecting it to the original section to its own 3.9.3 Wind and earthquake forces are reversible and
thickness. therefore call for rigidity and strength under force
C) Any outstand of the added plates beyond the reversal in both longitudinal and transverse directions.
line of welds or fasteners connecting it to To resist torsional effects of wind and earthquake
original section to its own thickness. forces, brac~ngsin plan should be provided and
integrally connected with the longitudinal and
3.8 Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio
transverse bracings, to impart adequate torsional
The maximum effective slenderness ratio, KL/<values resistance to the structure.
of a beam, strut or tension member shall not exceed
3.9.3.1 In shed type steel mill buildings, adequate
those given in Table 3. 'KC is the effective length of
bracings shall be provided to transfer the wind or
the member and 'r' is appropriate radius of gyration
earthquake loads from their points of action to the
based on the effective section as defined in 3.6.1.
appropriate supporting members. Where the
connections to the interior columns or frames are
Table 3 Maximum Values of Effective
designed such that the wind or earthquake loads will
Slenderness Ratios
not be transferred to the interior columns, the
SI Member Maximum exterior columns or frames shall be designed to resist
No. Effective the total wind or earthquake loads. Where the
Slenderness connections to the interior columns and frames are
Ratio
(KUrJ designed such that the wind or earthquake effects
(1) (2) (3) are transferred to the interior columns also, and
i) A member carrying compressive loads 180 where adequate rigid diaphragm action can be
resulting from dead loads and imposed mobilized as in the caseof the cast-in place RC slab.
loads both exterior and interior columns and frames may
ii) A tension member in which a reversal 180 be designed on the assumption that the wind or
of direct stress occurs due to loads other
than wind or seismic forces earthquake load is divided among them in proportion
iii) A member subjected to compression 250 to their relative stiffness. Columns also should be
forces resulting only from combination designed to withstand the net uplifting effect caused
with windlearthquake actions, provided by excessive wind or earthquake. Additional axial
the deformation of such member does
not adversely affect the stress in any forces arising in adjacent columns due to the vertical
pad of the structure component of bracings or due to frame action shall
iv) Compression flange of a beam against 300 also be accounted for.
lateral torsional buckling
V) A member normally acting as a tie in a 350 3.9.3.2 Earthquake forces are proportional to the
roof truss or a bracing system not seismic mass as defined in IS 1893. Earthquake forces
considered. effective when subject to should be applied at the centre of gravity of all such
possible reversal of stress into
compression resulting from the action components of mass and their transfer to the foundation
of wind ?r earthquake forces" should be ensured. Other construction details,
vi) Members always under tension" (other 400 stipulated in IS 4326 should also he followed.
than pre-tensioned members)
"Tension members, such as bracing's, pre-tensioned to avoid 3.9.3.3 In buildings where high-speed travelling cranes
sag, need not satisfy the mnximum slenderness ratio limits. are supported or where a building or structure is
otherwise subjected to vibration or sway, triangulated
bracing or rigid portal systems shall be provided to
3.9 Resistance to Horizontal Forces reduce the vibration or sway to an acceptable
3.9.1 In designing the steel frame work of a building, minimum.
provision shall be made (by adequate moment 3.9.4 Forrndations
connections or by a system of bracing) to effectively
transmit to the foundations ail the horizontal forces, The foundations of a building or other structures shall
giving due allowance for the stiffening effect of the be designed to provide the rigidity and strength that
walls and floors, where applicable. has been assumed in the analysis and design of the
superstructure.
3.9.2 When the walls, or walls and floors andlor roofs
3-95 Eccentrically Placed Loads at the centre of the building or building section, the
length of the building section may be restricted to
Where a wall, or other gravity load, is placed 180 m in case of covered buildings and 120 m in case
eccentrically upon the flange of a supporting steel of open gantries (see Fig. 3).
beam, the beam and its connections shall be designed
for torsion, unless the beam is restrained laterally in
such a way as to prevent the twisting of the beam.
3.10 Expansion Joints
3.10.1 In view of the large number of factors involved
in deciding the location, spacing and nature of
expansion joints, the decision regarding provision of
expansion joints shall be left to the discretion of the
designer.
3.10.2 Structures in which marked changes in plan END OF COVERED BUILDINGISECTION
dimensions take place abruptly, shall he provided with
expansion joints at the section where such changes FIG.3 MAXIMUM LENGTH OF BUILDING WLTH ONE

occur. Expansion joints shall be so provided that the BAYOF BRACING

necessary movement occurs with minimum resistance 3.10.3.2 If more than one bay of longitudinal bracing
at the joint. The gap at the expansion joint should be is provided near the centre of the building/section, the
such that; maximum centre line distance between the two lines
of bracing may be restricted to 50 m for covered
a) It accommodates the expected expansion1 buildings (and 30 m for open gantries) and the
contraction due to seasonal and durinal maximum distance between the centre of the bracing
variation of temperature, and to the nearest expansionjointlend of building or section
b) It avoids pounding of adjacent units under may be restricted to 90 m (60 m in case of open
earthquake.The structure adjacent to thejoint gantries). The maximum length of the building section
should preferably be supported on separate thus may be restricted to 230 m for covered buildings
columns but not necessarily on separate (150 m for open gantries). Beyond this, suitable
foundations. expansion joints shall be provided (see Fig. 4).
3.10.3 The details as to the length of a structure where 3.10.3.3 The maximum width of the covered building
expansion jdints have to be provided may be section should preferably be restricted to 150 m beyond
determined after taking into consideration various which suitable provisions for the expansion joint may
factors such as temperature, exposure to weather and be made.
structural design. The provisions in 3.10.3.1 to 3.10.3.3
are given as general guidance.
3.10.4 When the provisions of these sections are met
for a building or open structure, the stress analysis due
3.10.3.1 If one bay of longitudinal bracing is provided to temperature is not required.

+EXPANSION
. JOINT
I
I
I
I
I

I
FIG.4 MAXIMUM
LENGTH WITH TWOBAYSOF BRACLNGS
OF BUILD~NG/~ECTION
 SECTION 4 loading given in 4.3.6 satisfies the following
METHODS OF STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS criteria:
1) For clad frames, when the stiffening
4.1 Methods of Determining Action Effects effect of the cladding is not taken into
4.1.1 General account in the deflection calculations:

For the purpose of complying with the requirements 62- h,

of the limit states of stability, strength and serviceability 2 000
specified in Section 5, effects of design actions on a 2) For unclad frame or clad frames, when
structure and its members and connections, shall be the stiffening effect of the cladding is
determined by structural analysis using the assumptions taken into account in the deflection
of 4.2 and 4.3 and one of the following methods of calculations:
analysis:
a) Elastic analysis in accordance with 4.4, 6s- h,
4 000
b) Plastic analysis in accordance with 4.5,
3) A frame, which when analyzed
C) Advanced analysis in accordance with
Annex B, and considering all the lateral supporting
system does not comply with the above
d) Dynamic analysis in accordance with IS 1893 criteria, should be classified as a sway
(Part 1). frame, even if it is braced or otherwise
The design action effects for design basis earthquake laterally stiffened.
loads shall be obtained only by an elastic analysis. The 4.2 F~~~~of ~ ~~~~~~~d for~structural ~
maximum credible earthquake loads shall be assumed ~ ~ ~ l ~ ~ i ~
to correspond to the load at which significant plastic
hinges are formed in the structure and the 4.2.1 The effects of design action in the members and
corresponding effects shall be obtained by plastic or connections of a structure shall be determined by
advanced analysis. More information on analysis and assuming singly or in combination of the following
design to resist earthquake is given in Section 12 and forms of construction (see 10.6.1).
IS 1893 (Part 1).
4.2.1.1 Rigid consrr~rction
4.1.2 Non-sway and Sway Frames
In rigid construction, the connections between
For the purpose of analysis and design, the structural members (beam and column) at theirjunction shall be
frames are classified as non-sway and sway frames as assumed to have sufficient rigidity to hold the original
given below: angles between the members connected at a joint
unchanged under loading.
a) Non-sway frame - O n e in which the
transverse displacement of one end of the 4.2.1.2 Semi-j-igid construction
member relative to the other end is effectively
prevented, This applies to triangulated frames In semi-rigid construction, the connections between
and trusses or to frames where in-plane members (beam and column) at theirjunctionmay not
stiffness is provided by bracings, or by shear have sufficient rigidity to hold the original angles
walls, or by floor slabs and roof decks secured between the members at a joint unchanged, but shall
horizontally to walls or to bracing systems be assumed to have the capacity to furnish a dependable
parallel to the plane of Ioadillg alld bending and known degree of flexural restraint. The relationship
of the frame. between the degree of flexural restraint and the level
b) Sway frame - One in which the transverse of the load effects shall be established by any rational
displacement of one end of the method or based on test results (see Annex F).
relative to the other end is not effectively 4.2.1.3 Sinlple consrriiction
prevented. Such members and frames occur
in structures which depend on flexural action In simple construction, the connections between
of members to resist lateral loads and sway, members (beam and column) at theirjunction will not
as in moment resisting frames. resist any appreciable moment and shall be assumed
to be hinged.
C) A rigid jointed multi-storey frame may be
considered as a non-sway frame if in every 4.2.2 of ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
individual storey, the deflection 6, over a
storey height h,, due to the notional horizontal The design of all connections shall be consistent with

22
the form of construction, and the behaviour of the c) Where the imposed load is variable and
connections shall not adversely affect any other part exceeds three-quarters of the dead load,
of the structure beyond what is allowed for in design. arrangements of live load acting on the floor
Connections shall be designed in accordance with under consideration shall include the
Section 10. following cases:
1) Imposed load on alternate spans,
4.3 Assumptions in Analysis
2) Imposed load on two adjacent spans, and
4.3.1 The structure shall be analyzed in its entirety 3) Imposed load on all the spans.
except as follows:
4.3.4 Base Stifiess
a) Regular building structures, with orthogonal
frames in plan, may he analyzed as a series In the analysis of all structures the appropriate base
of parallel two-dimensional sub-structures stiffness about the axis under consideration shall be
(part of a structure), the analysis being carried used. In the absence of the knowledge of the pedestal
out in each of the two directions, at right and foundation stiffness, the following may be
angles to each other, except when there is assumed:
significant load redistribution between the a) When the column is rigidly connected to a
sub-structures (part of a structure). For suitable foundation, the stiffness of the
earthquake loading three dimensional analysis pedestal shall be taken as the stiffness of the
may he necessary to account for effects of column above base plate. However in case of
torsion and also for multi-component very stiff pedestals and foundations the
earthquake forces [see IS 1893 (Part I)]. column may be assumed as fixed at base.
h) For vertical loading in amulti-storey building
structure, provided with bracing or shear walls b) When the column is nominally connected
to resist all lateral forces, each level thereof, to the foundation, a pedestal stiffness of
together with the columns immediately above I0 percent of the column stiffness may be
and below, may be considered as a sub- assumed.
structure, the columns being assumed fixed. c) When an actual pin or rocker is provided in
at the ends remote from the level under the connection between the steel column and
consideration. pedestal, the column is assumed as hinged at
C) Where beams at a floor level in a multi-bay base and the pedestal and foundation may be
building structure are considered as a sub- appropriately designed for the reactions from
structure (part of a structure), the bending the column.
moment at the support of the beam due to
d) In case of (a) and (b), the bottom of the
gravity loads may be determined based on the pedestal shall be assumed to have the
assumption that the beam is fixed at the far following boundary condition in the absence
end support, one span away from the span of any detailed procedure based on theory or
under consideration, provided that the floor tests:
beam is continuous beyond that support point.
1) When the foundation consist of a group
4.3.2 Span Length of piles with a pile cap, raft foundation
The span length of a flexural member ir a continuous or an isolated footing resting on rock or
frame system shall he taken as the distdoce between very hard soil, the pedestal shall be
centre-to-centre of the supports. assumed to be fixed at the level of the
bottom of footing or at the top of pile
4.3.3 Arrangelnents of Zn~posedLoads in Buildings cap.
For building structures, the various arrangements of 2) When the foundation consist of an
imposed loads considered for the analysis, shall include isolated footing resting on other soils,
at least the following: pedestal shall be assumed to be hinged
Where the loading pattern is fixed, the at the level of the bottom of footing.
a)
arrangement concerned. 3) When the pedestal is supported by a
single pile, which is laterally surrounded
h) Where the imposed load is variable and not
greater than three-quarters of the dead load. by soil providing passive resistance, the I

the live load may be taken to be acting on all pile shall be assumed to be fixed at a
depth of 5 times the diameter of the pile
spans.
 below the ground levelin case of compact 4.4.2 First-Order Elastic Analysis
ground or the top level of compact soil
In a first-order elastic analysis, the equilibrium of the
in case of poor soil overlying compact
frame in the undeformed geometly is considered, the
soil.
changes in the geometry of the frame due to the loading
4) When the column is founded into rock, are not accounted for, and changes in the effective
it may be assumed to he fixed at the stiffness of the members due to axial force are
interface of the column and rock. neglected. The effects of these on the first-order
4.3.5 Simple Consmfction bending moments sball be allowed for by usingone of
Bending members may be assumed to have their ends the methods of moment amplification of 4.4.3.2
connected for shear only and to be free to rotate. In or 4.4.3.3 as appropriate. Where the moment
triangulated structures, axial Forces may be determined amplification factor C,, C,, calculated in accordance
by assumingthat all members are pin connected. The with 4.4.3.2 or 4.4.3.3 as appropriate, is greater than
eccentricity for stanchion and column shall he assumed 1.4, a second-order elastic analysis in accordance with
in accordance with 7.3.3. Annex B sball be carried out.
4.3.6 Notional Horizontal Loads 4.4.3 Second-Order Elastic Analysis
To analyze a frame subjected to gravity loads, 4.4.3.1 The analysis sball allow for the effects of the
considering the sway stability of the frame, notional design loads acting on the structure and its members
horizontal forces should be applied. These notional in their displaced and deformed configuration. These
horizontal forces account for practical imperfections second-order effects shall be taken into account by
and should be taken at each level as being equal to 0.5 using either:
percent of factored dead load plus vertical imposed
a) A first-order elastic analysis with moment
loads applied at that level. The notional load should
amplification in accordance with 4.4.2,
not be applied along with other lateral loads such as
provided the moment amplification factors,
wind and earthquake loads in the analysis.
Cyand Cz are not greater than 1.4; or
4.3.6.1 The notional forces should be applied on the b) A second-order elastic analysis in accordance
wholestructure, in both orthogonal directions, in one with Annex B.
direction at a time, at roof and all floor levels or their
equivalent.. They should be taken as acting 4.4.3.2Moment nmnpl@cationfor members in non-sway
simultaneously with factored gravity loads. frames

4.3.6.2 The notional force should not be, For a member with zero axial compression or a member
subject to axial tension, the design bending moment is
a) applied when considering overturning or that obtained from the first order analysis for factored
overall instability; loads, without any amplification.
b) combined with other horizontal (lateral)
loads; For a braced member with a design axial compressive
force P,, as determined by the first order analysis, the
C) combined with temperature effects; and design bending moment shall be calculated considering
d) taken to contribute to the net shear on the moment amplification as in 9.3.2.2.
foundation.
4.4.3.3 Moment ampl@cation for members in sway
-
4.3.6.3 The swav effect usine notional load under
gantry load case need not be considered if the ratio of
frames
height to lateral width of the building is less than unity. The design bending moment shall be calculated as the
product of moment amplification factor [see 9.3.2.2
4.4 Elastic Analysis (C,,,,, C,,)] and the moment obtained from the first
order analysis of the sway frame, unless analysis
considering second order effects is carried out
Individual members shall be assumed to remain elastic (see 4.4.3).
under the action of the factored design loads for all
limit states. 4.4.3.4The calculated bending moments from the first
order elastic analysis may be modified by redistribution
The effect of haunching or any variation of the cross- upto 15 percent of the peak calculated moment of the
section along the axis of amember shall be considered, member under factored load, provided that:
and where significant, sball be taken into account in
the determination of the member stiffness. a) the internal forces and moments in the
of the member, is applied within DL2 of a plastic hinge In the case of building structures, it is not normally
location (see 8.2.1.2). The stiffener should be provided necessary to consider the effect of alternating plasticity.
within a distance of half the depth of the member on
either side of the hinge location and be designed to 4.5.4 Second-Order Elastic Analysis
carry the applied toad in accordance with 8.7.4. If the Any second-order effects of the loads acting on the
stiffeners are flat plates, the outstand width to the structure in its deformed configuration may be
thickness ratio, b/t, should not exceed the values given neglected, provided the following are satisfied:
in the plastic section (see 3.7, Table 2). Where other
a) For clad frames, provided the stiffening effects
ofmasonry infill wall panels or diaphragms of
sections ate used the ratio [ ~ ~ ~ nothexceed
~ ~ l d profiled wall panel is not taken into account,
and where elastic buckling load factor, A=,
the values given for plastic section (for simple outstand, (see 4.6) satisfies 4jAp> 10.
as in 3.7); If 10 > dc/A,24.6 the second-order effects may
be considered by amplifying the design load
where
effects obtained from plastic analysis by a
I,, = second moment of areaof the stiffener about factor S*= {0.9 An/(dcr-I)].
'the face of the element perpendicular
~- to the If dp< 4.6, second-order elasto-plastic
web; and analysis or second-order elastic analysis
= St. Venant's torsion constant of the stiffener. (see 4.1.3) is to be carried out.
I,
4.5.2.3 The frame shall be adequately supported against b) For un-clad frames or for clad frames where
the stiffening effects of masonly iofill or dia-
sway and out-of-plane buckling, by bracings, moment
phragms of profiled wall panel is taken into
resistingframe or an independent system such as shear
wall.
account, where elastic buckling load factor, ar
(see 4.6) satisfies , l j A,>_ 20
4.5.2.4 Fabrication restriction If 20 > a!AV2 5.75 the second-order effects
may he considered by amplifying the design
Within a length equal to the member depth, on either
load effects obtained from plastic analysis by
side of a plastic hinge location, the following
a factor hp= jO.9 4, I( ,Ic,-1)).
restrictions should be applied to the tension flange and
noted in the design drawings. Holes if required, should
If a/hp< 5.75, second-order elasto-plastic
analysis or second-order elastic analysis
be drilled or else punched 2 mm undersize and reamed.
(see 4.4.3) shall be carried out.
All sheared or hand flame cut edges should be finished
smooth by grinding, chipping or planning. 4.6 Frame Buckling Analysis
4.5.3 Assumptions in Analysis 4.6.1 The elastic buckling load factor (kc,) shall be the
The design action effects shall be determined using a ratio of the elastic buckling load set of the frame to the
rigid-plastic analysis. design load set for the frame, and shall be determined
in accordance with 4.6.2..
It shall be permissible to assume full strength orpartial NOTE - The value of h., depends on the load set and has to
strength connections, provided the capacities of these be evaluated for each possible set of load combination.
are used in the analysis, and provided that 4.6.2 In-plane Frame Buckling
The elastic buckling load factor (kc,)of a rigid-jointed
a) in a full strength connection, the moment frame shall be determined by using:
capacity of the connection shall be not less
than that of the member being connected; a) One of the approximate methods of 4.6.2.1
b) in a partial strength connection, the moment and 4.6.2.2 or
capacity of the connection may be less than b) A rational elastic buckling analysis of the
that of the member being connected; and whole frame.
C) in both cases the behaviour of the connection 4.6.2.1 Regular non-swayframes (see 4.1.2)
shall be such as to allow all plastic hinges
necessary for the collapse mechanism to In a rectangular non-sway frame with regular loading
develop, and shall be such that the required and negligible axial forces in the beams, the Euler
plastic hinge rotation does not exceed the buckling stress&, for each column shall be determined
rotation capacity at any of the plastic hinges in accordance with 7.1.2.1. The elastic buckling load
in the collapse mechanism. factor (kc,) for the whole frame shall be taken as the
lowest of the ratio of (f,/Ld)for all the columns, where
f,is the axial compressive stress in the column from disproportionately under accidental events
the factored load analysis. like explosions, vehicle impact or due to
4.6.2.2 Regular sway frames consequences of human error to an extent
beyond local damage. The potential for
In a rectangular sway frame with regular loading and catastrophic damage shall be limited or
negligible axial forces in the beams, the buckling load, avoided by appropriate choice of one or more
PC=,,for each column shall he determined as PC,= A f , , of the following:
whereLCisthe elastic buckling stress of the column in 1) Avoiding, eliminating or reducing
the plane of frame, obtainedin accordance with 7.1.2.1. exposure to hazards, which the structure
The elastic buckling load factor A,, for the whole frame is likely to sustain.
shall be taken as the lowest of all the ratios, A,,,
2) Choosing structural forms, layouts and
calculated for each storey of the building, as given
details and designing such that:
below:
i) the structure has low sensitivity to
hazardous conditions; and
ii) the strlicture survives with only local
damage even after serious damage
where to any one individual element by the
P = member axial force from the factored load hazard.
analysis, with tension taken as negative; and 3) Choosing suitable material, design and
L = column length and the summation includes detailing procedure, construction
all columns in the plane frame within a specifications, and control procedures for
storey. shop fabrication and field construction as
relevant to the particular structure.
SECTION 5 The following conditions may be satisfied to avoid a
LIMIT STATE DESIGN disproportionate collapse:

5.1 Basis for Design a) The building should be effectively tied

together at each principal floor level and each
5.1.1 In the limit state design method, the structure column should he effectively held in position
shall be designed to withstand safely all loads likely to by means of continuous ties (beams) nearly
act on it throughout its life. It shall not suffer total orthogonal, except where the steel work
collapse under accidental loads such as from explosions supports only cladding weighing not more
or impact or due to consequences of human error to an than 0.7 kN/m2 along with imposed and wind
extent beyond the local damages. The objective of the loads. These ties must be steel members such
design is to achieve a structure that will remain fit for as beams, which may he designed for other
use during its life with acceptable target reliability. In purposes, steel bar reinforcement anchoring
other words, the probability of a limit state being the steel frame to concrete floor or steel mesh
reached during its lifetime should be very low. The reinforcement in composite slab with steel
acceptable limit for the safety and serviceability profiled sheeting directly connected to beam
requirements before failure occurs is called a limit state. with shear connectors. These steel ties and
In general, the structure shall be designed on the basis their end con~~ections should he capable of
of the most critical limit state and shall be checked for resisting factored tensile force not less than
other limit states. the factored dead and imposed loads acting
5.1.2 Steel structures are to be designed andconstructed on the floor area tributary to the tie nor less
to satisfy the design requirements with regard to than 75 !di. Such connection of ties to edge
stability, strength, serviceability, brittle fracture, column should also be capable of resisting
fatigue, fire, and durability such that they meet the 1 percent of the maximum axial compression
following: in the column at the level due to factored dead
and imposedloads. All column splices should
a) Remain fit with adequate reliability and be be capable of resisting a tensile force equal
able to sustain all actions (loads) and other to the largest of a factored dead and live load
influences experienced during construction reaction from a single floor level located
and use; between that column splice and the next
b) Have adequate durability under normal column splice below that splice. Lateral load
maintenance; system to resist notional horizontal loads
C) DO not suffer overall damage or collapse prescribed in 4.3.6 should be distributed
 throughout the building in nearly orthogonal no longer satisfies the performance requirements
directions so that no substantial portions is specified. The limit states nre classified as:
connected at only one point to such asystem.
Precast concrete or other heavy floor or roof a) Limit state of strength; and
units should be effectively anchored in the b) Limit state of serviceability.
direction of their span either to each other over 5.2.2.1 The limit states of strength are those associated
the support or directly to the support. with failures (or imminent failure), under the action of
b) Where the above conditions to tie the columns probable and most unfavourable combination of loads
to the floor adequately are not satisfied each on the structure using the appropriate partial safety
storey of the building should be checked to factors, which may endanger the safety of life and
ensure that disproportionate collapse would property. The limit state of strength includes:
not precipitate by the notional removal, one
a) Loss of equilibrium of the structure as a whole
at a time, of each column. or any of its parts or components.
c) Where each floor is not laterally supported b) Loss of stability of the structure (including
by more than one system, check should be the effect of sway where appropriate and
made at each storey by removing one such overturning) or any of its parts inclnding
lateral support system at a time to ensure that supports and foundations.
disproportionate collapse would not occur.
c) Failure by excessive deformation, rupture of
The collapse is considered disproportionate, the structure or any of its parts or components.
if more than 15 percent of the floor or roof d) Fracture due to fatigue.
area of 70 m2collapse at that level and at one
e) Brittle fracture.
adjoining level either above or below it, under
a load equal to 1.05 or 0.9 times the deadload, 5.2.2.2 The limit state of serviceability include:
0.33 times temporary or full imposed load of
permanent nature (as in storage buildings) and a) Deformation and deflections, which may
adversely affect the appearance or effective
0.33 times wind load acting together.
use of the structure or may cause improper
5.1.3 Structures designed for unusual or special functioning of equipment or services or may
functions shall comply with any other relevant cause damages to finishes and non-structural
additional limit state considered appropriate to that members.
structure. h) Vibrations in the structure or any of its
5.1.4 Generally structures and elements shall be components causing discomfort to people,
designed by limit state method. Where limit state damages to the structure, its contents or which
may limit its functional effectiveness. Special
method cannotbeconveniently adopted, working stress
consideration shall be given to systems
design (see Section 11) may be used.
susceptible to vibration, such as large open
5.2 Limit State Design floor areas free of partitions to ensure that
such vibrations are acceptable for the intended
5.2.1 For achieving the design objectives, the design use and occupancy (see Annex C).
shall he based on characteristic values for material
c) Repairable damage or crack due to fatigue.
strengths and applied loads (actions), which take into
d) Corrosion, durability.
account the probability of variations in the material
strengths and in the loads to be supported. The e) Fire.
characteristic values shall be based on statistical data, 5.3 Actions
if available. Where such data is not available, these
shall be based on experience. The design values are The actions (loads) to be considered in design include
derived from the characteristic values through the use direct actions (loads) experienced by the structure due
of partial safety factors, both for material strengths and to self weight, external actions etc., and imposed
for loads. In the absence of special considerations, these deformations such as that due to temperature and
factors shall have the values given in this section settlements.
according to the material, the type of load and the limit
state being considered. The reliability of design is
ensured by satisfying the requirement: Actions are classified by their variation with time as
given below:
Design action 5 Design strength
a) Permanent actions (Q ): Actions due to self-
5.2.2 L i t states are the states beyond which thestmcture weight of structuraf and non-structural
 components, fittings, ancillaries, and fixed is generally not required in building unless it is required
equipment, etc. by client or approving authority in which case,
Variable actions (Q"): Actions due to generally recommendation in 5.1.2 c) or specialist
construction and service stage loads such as literature shall be followed.
imposed (live) loads (crane loads, snow loads, 5.3.3 D~~~~~A~~~~~~
etc.), wind loads, and earthquake loads, etc.
Accidental actions (Q): Actions expected due The Design Actions, Q,, is expressed as = E Y Qrk
li~
to explosions, and impact of vehicles, etc.
where
5.3.2 Characteristic Actions (Loads)
y, = partial safety factor for different loads k,
5.3.2.1 The Characteristic Actions, Q, are the values given in Table 4 to account for:
of the different actions that are not expected to be
exceeded with more than 5 percent probability, during a) Possibility of unfavourable deviation of
the life of the structure and they are taken as: the load from the characteristic value,
b) Possibility of inaccurate assessment of
a) the self-weight, in most cases calculated on the load,
the basis of nominal dimensions and unit
c) Uncertainty in the assessment of effects
weights [see IS 875 (Part I)].
of the load, and
b) the variable loads, values of which are d) Uncertainty in the assessment of the
specified in relevant standard [see IS 875 (all
limit states being considered.
Parts) and IS 1893 (Part I)].
The loads or load effects shall be multiplied by the
C) the upper limit with a specified probability
(usually 5 percent) not exceeding during some relevant y, factors, given in Table 4, to get the design
reference period (design life). loads or design load effects.
d) specified by client, or by designer in 5.4 Strength
consultation with client, provided they satisfy The ultimate strength calculation may require
the minimum provisions of the relevant consideration of the following:
loading standard.
a) Loss of equilibrium of the structure or any
5.3.2.2 The characteristic values of accidental loads part of it, considered as a rigid body; and
generally correspond to the value specified by relevant
b) Failure by excessive deformation, rupture or
code, standard or client. The design for accidental load

Table 4 partial Safety Factors for Loads, for Limit States x,

(Clauses 3.5.1 and 5.3.3)

combination Limit State of Strength Limit State of Serviceability

A
I
/DL WUEL A? GL LL" WVEL

4
Leading Accompanying . - Leading Accompanying

(1) (2) (3) (4) 5 (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

DL+LL+CL 1.5 1.5 1.05 - - 1.0 1 .o 1.o -
DL+LLcCL+ 1.2 1.2 1.05 0.6 - 1.0 0.8 0.8 0.8
WUEL 1.2 1.2 0.53 1.2
DL+WLEL 1.5 (0.9)" - - 1.5 - 1.0 - 1.o
DL+ER 1.2 i .Z - - - - - -
(0.9p
DL+LL+AL 1.0 0.35 0.35 - 1.0 - - - -
"When action of different live loads is simultaneously considered, the leading live load shall be considered to be the one causing the
higher load effects in the member/section.
"This value is to be considered when the dead load contributes to stability against overturning is critical or the dead load causes
reduction in stress due to other loads.
Abbreviario,zr:
DL=Deod locd,LL = imposed load (Lwe loads), WL= Wind load, CL ICrane load (VerticalHorirontal), AL= Accidental load, ER =
Erection load, EL= Earthquake load.
NOTE -The effects of actions (loads) in terms of stresses or stress resultants may be obtained from an appropriate method of analysis
 loss of stability of the structure or any part of C) The permanent actions (loads) and effects
it including support and foundation. contributing to resistance shall be multiplied
5.4.1 Design Strength with a partial safety factor 0.9 and added
together with design resistance (after
The Design Strength, S,, is obtained as given below multiplying with appropriate partial safety
from ultimate strengtl~,S, and partial safety factors for factor). Variable actions and their effects
materials, y,,, given in Table 5. contributing to resistance shall be disregarded.
d) The resistance effect shall he greater than or
equal to the destabilizing effect. Combination
where partial safety factor for materials, y, account of imposed and dead loads should be such as
for: to causemost severe effect on overall stability.
a) Possibility of unfavourable deviation of
material strength from the characteristic value, 5.5.1.2 Sway stability
b) Possibility of unfavourable variation of The whole structure, including portions between
member sizes, expansion joints. shall be adequately stiff against sway.
c) Possibility of unfavourable reduction in To ensure this, in addition to designing for applied
member strength due to fabrication and horizontal loads, a separate check should be carried
tolerances, and out for notional horizontal loads such as given in 4.3.6
d) Uncertainty in the calculation of strength of to evaluate the sway under gravity loads.
the members.
5.5 Factors Governing the Ultimate Strength Generally fatigue need not he considered unless a
structure or element is subjected to numerous
5.5.1 Stability
significant fluctuations of stress. Stress changes due
Stability shall be ensured for the structure as a whole to fluctuations in wind loading normally need not be
and for each of its elements. This should include., considered. Fatigue design shall he in accordance with
overall frame stability against overturning and. sway, Section 13. When designing for fatigue, the partial
as given in 5.5.1.1 and 5.5.1.2. safety factor for load, yf,equal to unity shall be used
for the load causing stress fluctuation and stress range.
5.5.1.1 Stability against overturning
5.5.3 Plastic Collapse
The structure as a whole or any part of it shall be
designed to prevent instability due to overturning, uplift Plastic analysis and design may be used, if the
or sliding under factored load as given below: requirement specified under the plastic method of
analysis (see 4.5) are satisfied.
a) The Actions shall be divided into components
aiding instability and components resisting 5.6 Limit State of Serviceability
instability.
Serviceability limit state is related to the criteria
b) The permanent and variable actions and their
effects causing instability shall be combined governing normal use. Serviceability limit state is limit
state beyond which the service criteria specified below,
using appropriateload factors as per the Limit
State requirements, to obtain maximum are no longer met:
destabilizing effect. a) Deflection limit,

Table 5 Partial Safety Factor for Materials, y,

(Clause 5.4.1)

SI Definition Partial Safety Factor

..".
Un

i) Resistance, governed by yielding, ymo 1.10

ii) Resistance of member to buckling, y,, I.iO
iii) Resistance, governed by ultimate stress, y, 1.25
iv) Resistance of connection: Shop Fabrications Field Fabrications
a) Bolts-RietionType, y,, 1.25 1.25
b) Bolts-Eedring Type, y,, 1.25 1.25
C) Rivets, .7
. 1.25 1.25
d) Welds, y,. 1.25 1.50
 b) Vibration limit. or a building component should not impair the strength
C) Durability consideration, and of the structure or components or cause damage to
finishings. Deflections are to be checked for the most
d) Fire resistance.
adverse but realistic combination of service loads and
Unless specified otherwise, partial safety factor for their arrangement, by elastic analysis, using a load
loads, yf,of value equal to unity shall be used for all factor of 1.0. Table 6 gives recommended limits of
loads leading to serviceability limit states to check the deflections for certain structural members and systems.
adequacy of the structure under serviceability limit Circumstances may arise where greater or lesser values
states. would be more appropriate depending upon the nature
of material in element to be supported (vulnerable to
5.6.1 Deflection
cracking or not) and intended use of the structure, as
The deflection under serviceability loads of a building required by client.

Table 6 Deflection Limits

Type of Deflection Design Load Member Supporting Maximum

Building Deflection

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Elastic cladding SpanllSO
I I ~ i v load/
e Wind load Purlins and Gins Spadl80
Brittle cladding
Elastic cladding . Spann40
Live load Simple span
I Brittle cladding
Elastic cladding
Span000
SpanIiZO
-.-" Live load Cantilever span
I Brittle cladding SponIlSO

5
.-
>5 { Live load/ Wind load

Crane load (Manual

operation)
.
Rafter supeoning
I Protiled Metal Sheeting
Plastered Sheeting
Crane
Spadl80
Spad24O
Span1503
9
:
.A
TJ Crane load (Electric Gantry Crane Spun/750
( operation up to 50 1)
.-
b Crane load (Electric
-
Gantry Cnne Spunll 000
Y
P
C
\ operation over 50 t)
Elastic cladding HeighUlSO
No cranes Column
I MasonrylBrittle cladding
Crane (absolute)
Height1240
Span1403

i
Crane + wind Gantry (lateral)
I
L
Relative displacement
between rails supporting
crane
I 0 mm

Gantry (Elastic cladding: HeightnW

Columtdframe pendent opernted)
Crane+ wind
Gantry (Brittle cladding; cab
\ operated)
Elements not susceptible lo
cracking
Live load Floor and Roof
Elements susceptible to
cracking
% 5 Elements not susceptible to
.- >
.-
9
1 , Live load Cantilever
cracking
P!u Elements susceptible to
cracking
$ Eloslic cladding Height1300
Wind Building
Brittle ciudding HeighV500
Inter storey drift - Storey height1300
 5.6.1.1 Where the deflection due to the combination SECTION 6
of dead load and live load is likely to be excessive, DESIGN OFTENSION MEMBERS
consideration should be given to pre-camber the beams,
trusses and girders. The value of desired camber shall 6.1 Tension Members
be specified in design drawing. Generally, for spans
greater than 25 m, a camber approximately equal to Tension members are linear members in which axial
the deflection due to dead loads plus half the live load forces act tocauseelongation (stretch). Such members
may be used. The deflection of a member shall be can sustainloads upto the ultimate load, at which stage
calculated without considering the impact factor or they may fail by rupture at a critical section. However,
dynamiceffect of the loads on deflection.Roofs, which if the gross area of the member yields over a major
are very flexible, shall be designed to withstand any portion of its length before the ruptureload is reached,
additional load that is likely to occur as a result of the member may become non-functional due to
ponding of water or accumulation of snow or ice. excessive elongation. Plates and other rolled sections
in tension may also fail by block shear of end bolted
5.6.2 Vibration regions (see 6.4.1).
Suitable provisions in the design shall be made for The factored design tension T, in the members shall
the dynamic effects of live loads, impact loads and satisfy the following requirement:
vibration due to machinery operating loads. In severe
cases possibility of resonance, fatigue or
unacceptable vibrations shall be investigated. where
Unusually flexible structures (generally the height
to effective width of lateral load resistance system Td = design strength of the member.
exceeding 5:l) shall be investigated for lateral The design strength of a member under axial tension,
vibration under dynamic wind loads. Structures Td,is the lowest of the design strength due to yielding
subjected to large number of cycles of loading shall of gross section, Td,:rupture strength of critical section,
be designed against fatigue failure, as specified in Td,, and block shear Td,, given in 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4,
Section 13. Floor vibration effect shall be considered respectively.
'
using specialist literature (see Annex C),
6.2 Design Strength Due to Yielding of Gross Section
5.6.3 Durability
The design strength of members under axial tension.
Factors that affect the durability of the buildings, under T d ,as governed by yielding of gross section, is given
conditions relevant to their intended life, are listed by
below:
Td, = A8fY /Ymo
a) Environment, where
--

b) Degree of exposure,
c) Shape of the member and the structural detail, f , = yield stress of the material,
d) Protective measure, and A, = gross area of cross-section, and
e) Ease of maintenance. ,,y = partial safety factor for failure in tension by
yielding (see Table 5).
5.6.3.1 The durability of steel structures shall be
ensured by following 6.3 Design Strength Due to Rupture of Critical
- recommendations in Section 15.
~-.
Specialist literature may be referred to formore detailed Section
and additional information in design for durability. 6.3.1 Plates
5.6.4 Fire Resislance The design strength in tension of a plate, T,,, as
Fire resistance of a steel member is a function of its governed by rupture of net cross-sectional area, A,, at
mass, its geometry, the actions to which it is subjected, the holes is given by
its structural support condition, fire protection
measures adopted and the fire to which it is exposed.
Design provisions to resist fire are briefly discussed in
Section 16. Specialist literature may be referred to for = partial safety factor for failure at ultimate
more detailed information in design of fire resistance stress (see Table 5 ) ,
of steel structures. = ultimate stress of the material, and
= net effective area of the member given by,
 LC = length of the end connection, that is the
distance between the outermost bolts in the
end joint measured along the load direction
or length of the weld along the load
where
direction.
b, t = width and thickness of the plate, For preliminary sizing, the rupture strength of net
respectively, section may be approximately taken as:
d, = diameter of the bolt hole (2 mm in addition
to the diameter of the hole, in case the Td" = ~ A n f u / Y m l
directly punched holes), where
g = gauge length between the bolt holes, as a = 0.6 for one or two bolts, 0.7 for three bolts
shown in Fig. 5, and 0.8 for four or more bolts along the
length in the end connection or equivalent
p, = staggerekpitch length between line of bolt
holes, as shown in Fig. 5, weld length;
n = number of bolt holes in the critical section, A, = net area of the total cross-section;
A,, = net area of the connected leg;

"TI
and
i = subscript for summation of all the inclined A, = gross area of the outstanding leg; and
'legs. t = thickness of the leg.
p
-s

t
t
;;a+
@
;,

t0'
6.3.4 Other Section
The rupture strength, Td,, of the double angles,
6.3.2 Threaded Rods channels, I-sections and other rolled steel sections,
The design strength of threaded rods in tension, T,,, as connected by one or more elements to an end gusset is
governed by rupture is given by also governed by shear lag effects. The design tensile
strength of such sections as governed by tearing of net
Tdn=0.9Anfu/YmYml section may also be calculated using equation in 6.3.3,
where where p is calculated based on the shear lag distance,
b , taken from the farthest edge of the outstanding leg
A, = net root area at the threaded section. to the nearest boltlweld line in the connected leg of
the cross-section.
6.3.3 Single Angles
6.4 Design Strength Due to Block Shear
The rupture strength of an angle connected through
one leg is affected by shear lag. The design strength, The strength as governed by block shear at an end
Td,as governed by rupture at net section is given by: connection of plates and angles is calculated as given
in 6.4.1.
Td, =0.9 A,,L 1Y ~+Ip A,, f,/~,
where 6.4.1 Bolted Connections
The block shear strength, Tdbof connection shall be
P (bJLc) < ff;Ymd&Ym~) taken as the smaller of,
= 1.4- 0.076 (w/O (f,lfJ
> 0.7
-
where
w = outstand leg width,
b, = shear lag width, as shown in Fig. 6, and
 where where
A,,,A,,= minimum gross andnet areain shear along A, = effective sectional area as defined
bolt line parallel to external force, in 7.3.2, and
respectively (1-2 and 3-4 as shown in f,, = design compressive stress, obtained
Fig. 7A and 1-2 as shown in Fig. 7B), as per 7.1.2.1.
A,,, A,, = minimum gross and net area in tension 7.1.2.1 The design compressive stress,f,,, of axially
from the bolt hole to the toe of the angle, loaded compression members shall he calculated using
end bolt line, perpendicular to the line of the following equation:
force, respectively (2-3 as shown in
Fig. 7B), and
f. f, = ultimate and yield stress of the material,
respectively.
6.4.2 Welded Connection where

The block shear strength, T,, shall be checked for 0 = 0.5 [I + a ( h - 0.2)+h2]
welded end connections by taking an appropriate h = non-dimensional effectiveslenderness ratio
section in the member around the end weld, which can
shear off as a block.

SECTION 7
DESIGN OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS -
a2E
f,, = Euler buckling stress = KL
7.1 Design Strength ( A)
7.1.1 Common hot rolled and built-up steel members where
used for carrying axial compression, usually fail by KUr = effective slenderness ratio or ratio
flexural buckling. The buckling strength of these of effective length, KL to
members is affected by residual stresses, initial bow appropriate radius of gyration, r;
and accidental eccentricities of load. To account for a = imperfection factor given in
all these factors, the strength of members subjected to Table 7;
axial compression is defined by buckling class a, h, c,
or d as given Table 7. x = stress reduction factor (seeTable 8)
for different huckling class.
7.1.2 The design compressive strength Pd,of amember slenderness ratio and yield stress
is given by:

where
Pd = AeLd Lo = partial safety factor for material
strength.

7A Plate 78 Angle

SHEARFAILURE
Fro. 7 BLOCK
 NOTE -Calculated values of design compressive stress. f., can be assessed, the effective length, KL can be
for different buckling classes are given in Table 9. calculated on the basis of Table 11. Where frame
7.1.2.2 The classification of different sections under analysis does not consider the equilibrium of a framed
different buckling class a, b, c or d, is given in Table structure in the deformed shape (second-order analysis
11). The stress reduction factor X, and the design or advanced analysis), the effective length of
compressive stressf,,, for different buckling class, yield compression members in such cases can be calculated
stress, and effective slenderness ratio is given in Table using the procedure given in D-1. The effective length
8 for convenience. The curves corresponding to of stepped column in single storey buildings can be
different buckling class are presented in non- calculated using the procedure given in D-2.
dimensional form, in Fig. 8. 7.2.3 Eccentric Beam Connection
Table 7 Imperfection Factor, a In cases where the beam connections are eccentric in
(Clauses 7.1.1 and 7.1.2.1) plan with respect to the axes of the column, the same
conditions of restraint as in concentric connection shall
- --
be deemed to apply, provided the connections are
Burkline Class a b c d
carried across the flange or web of the columns as the
case may be, and the web of the beamlies within, or in
direct contactwith the column section. Where practical
7.2 Effective Length of Compression Members difficulties prevent this, the effective length shall be
taken as equal to the distance between points of
7.2.1 The effective length KL, is calculated from the restraint, in non-sway frames.
actual length L, of the member, considering the
rotational and relative translational boundary 7.2.4 Compression Members in Trusses
conditions at the ends. The actual length shall be taken In the case of bolted, riveted or welded trusses and
as the length from centre-to-centre of its intersections braced frames, the effective length, KL, of the
with the supporting members in the plane of the compression members shall be taken as 0.7 to 1.0 times
buckling deformation. In the case of a member with a the distance between centres of connections, depending
free end, the free standing length from the center of on the degree of end restraint provided. In the case of
theintersecting member at the supported end, shall be members of trusses, buckling in the plane perpendicular
taken as the actual length. to the plane of the truss, the effective length, KL shall
7.2.2 Effective Length be taken as the distance between the centres of
intersection. The design of angle struts shall be as
Where the boundary conditions in the plane of buckling specified in 7.5.
 Table 8(a) Stress Reduction Factor, x for Column Buckling Class a
(Clauses 7.1.2.1 and 7.1.2.21

Yield ~t&n,/,(MI'a)
200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.004 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1,000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.004
1.000 0.999 0.998 0.997 0.995 0.994 0.993 0.993 0.990 0.988 0.986 0.984 0.983 0.981 0.979 0.977 0.975 0.972 0.970
0.977 0.975 0.974 0.972 0.970 0.969 0.967 0.965 0.961 0.957 0.954 0.951 0.948 0.946 0.943 0.938 0.934 0.930 0.925
0.952 0.949 0.947 0.944 0.942 0.939 0.937 0.934 0.926 0.921 0.916 0.911 0.906 0.901 0.896 0.888 0.881 0.873 0.865
0.923 0.919 0.915 0.911 0.908 0.904 0.900 0.896 0.884 0.876 0.867 0.859 0.851 0.842 0.834 0.820 0.807 0.794 0.780
0.888 0.883 0.877 0.871 0.865 0.859 0.853 0.847 0.828 0.816 0.803 0.790 0.777 0.763 0.750 0.730 0.710 0.690 0.671
 Table 8@) Stress Reduction Factor, for Column Buckling Class b
(Clauses 7.1.2.1 and 7.1.2.2)

'
KLIr
200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280
Yield Stress, f,(MPa)
300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.mo 1.000 1.000
 Table 8(c) Stress Reduction Factor, x for Column Buckling Class c 2
00
0
(Clauses 7.1.2.1 and 7.1.2.2)
..
0

N
0

'
KLIr
200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280
Yield Stress, h(MPa)
300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
0
4

10 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1,000
.,

Table S(d) Stress Reduction Factor, %forColumn Buckling Class d

(Clauses 7.1.2.1 and 7.1.2.2)

'
KLlr
200 210 220 230 240 250 260 286
Yield Stress, f , (MPa).
300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 I.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 L.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
20 0.999 0.995 0.991 0.988 0.984 0.980 0.977 0.970 0.964 0.958 0.952 0.946 0.940 0.935 0.930 0.922 0.915 0.908 0.901
30 0.922 0.916 0.911 0.906 0.901 0.896 0.891 0.881 0.872 0.863 0.855 0.847 0.839 0.831 0.823 0.813 0.802 0.792 0.782
40 0.848 0.841 0.834 0.828 0.821 0.815 0.808 0.796 0.784 0.773 0.762 0.751 0.741 0.731 0.721 0.707 0.694 0.681 0.668
50 0.777 0.768 0.760 0.752 0.744 0.736 0.728 0.713 0.699 0.685 0.672 0.659 0.647 0.635 0.624 0.608 0.592 0.577 0.563
60 0.707 0.697 0.687 0.678 0.668 0.659 0.651 0.634 0.617 0.602 0.587 0.573 0.560 0.547 0.535 0.517 0.501 0.486 0.471
70 0.640 0.629 0.618 0.607 0.597 0.587 0.578 0.559 0.542 0.526 0.510 0.496 0.482 0.469 0.456 0.439 0.423 0.408 0.394
80 0.576 0.564 0.553 0.542 0.531 0.521 0.511 0.492 0.474 0.458 0.442 0.428 0.414 0.402 0.390 0.373 0.358 0.344 0.330
90 0.517 0.505 0.493 0.482 0.471 0.461 0.451 0.432 0.415 0.399 0.384 0.370 0.357 0.345 0.334 0.319 0.304 0.292 0.280
100 0.464 0.451 0.440 0.428 0.418 0.408 0.398 0.380 0.363 0.348 0.334 0.321 0.309 0.298 0.288 0.274 0.261 0.249 0.239
W 110 0.416 0.404 0.392 0.381 0.371 0.361 0.352 0.335 0.319 .0.305 0.292 0.281 0.270 0.259 0.250 0.237 0.226 0.215 0.206
w
I20 0.373 0.361 0.350 0.340 0.330 0.321 0.313 0.297 0.282 0.269 0.257 0.246 0.236 0.227 0.219 0.207 0.197 0.187 0.179
130 0.336 0.325 0.314 0.305 0.295 0.287 0.279 0.264 0.251 0.239 0.228 0.218 0.209 0.200 0.193 0.182 0.173 0.164 0.157
140 0.303 0.292 0.283 0.274 0.265 0.257 0.250 0.236 0.224 0.213 0.203 0.194 0.185 0.178 0.171 0.161 0.153 0.145 0.138
150 0.274 0.264 0.255 0.247 0.239 0.231 0.224 0.212 0.201 0.190 0.181 0.173 0.165 0.159 0.152 0.144 0.136 0.129 0.123
160 0.249 0.240 0.231 0.223 0.216 0.209 0.203 0.191 0.181 0.171 0.163 0.155 0.149 0.142 0.137 0.129 0.122 0.116 0.110
170 0.227 0.218 0.210 0.203 0.196 0.190 0.184 0.173 0.164 0.155 0.147 0.140 0.134 0.128 0.123 0.116 0.1IO 0.104 0.099
180 0.207 0.199 0.192 0.185 0.179 0.173 0.167 0.157 0.149 0.141 0.134 0.127 0.122 0.116 0.lII 0.105 0.099 0.094 0.089
190 0.190 0.183 0.176 0.169 0.164 0.158 0.153 0.144 0.136 0.128 0.122 0.116 0.111 0.106 0.101 0.095 0.090 0.085 0:081
200 0.175 0.168 0.162 0.156 0.150 0.145 0.140 0.132 0.124 0.118 0.112 0.106 0.101 0.097 0.093 0.087 0.082 0.078 0.074
210 0.161 0.155 0.149 0.143 0.138 0.134 0.129 0.121 0.1 14 0.108 0.102 0.097 0.093 0.089 0.085 0,080 0.075 0.071 0.068
220 0.149 0.143 0.138 0.133 0.128 0.123 0.119 0.112 0.105 0.100 0.094 0.090 0.086 0.082 0.078' 0.074 0.069 0.066 0.062
230 0.138 0.133 0.128 0.123 0.118 0.114 0.110 0.104 0.097 0.092 0.087 0.083 0.079 0.075 0.072 0.068 0.064 0.061 0.058
0.114 0.110 0.106 0.103 0.096 0.090 0.085 0.081 0.077 0.073 0.070 0.067 0.063 0.059 0.056 0.053
E
240 0.129 0.123 0.119 00
0
250 0.120 0.115 0.110 0.106 0.102 0.099 0.095 0.089 0.084 0.079 0.075 0.071 0.068 0.065 0.062 0.058 0.055 0.052 0.049 ..
0
h)
0
0
4
 Table 9(a) Design Compressive Stress,& (MPa) for Column Buckling Class a i;
00
(Clause 7.1.2.1) o
- ..
N
0
Yield Stress, /, (MPa) o
-4

200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
182 191 200 213 218 227 236 255 273 291 309 327 345 364 382 409 436 464 491
182 191 200 208 217 226 235 252 270 287 305 322 339 357 374 400 425 451 476
178 186 195 203 212 220 229 245 262 279 295 311 328 344 360 384 408 431 454
173 181 189 197 205 213 221 237 253 268 283 298 313 328 342 363 384 405 425
168 176 183 191 198 205 213 227 241 255 268 281 294 306 318 336 352 368 383
 Table 9(b) Design Compressive Stress,f,(MPa) for Column Buckling Class b
(Clause 7.1.2.1)

KUr Yield Stress, f, (MPa)

1
200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 182 191 200 209 218 227 236 255 273 291 309 327 345 364 382 409 436 464 491
20 182 190 199 208 217 225 234 251 268 285 302 319 336 353 369 394 419 443 468
30 175 183 192 200 208 216 224 240 256 271 287 302 318 333 348 370 392 414 435
40 168 176 I83 191 198 206 213 228 242 256 270 283 297 310 323 342 360 378 395
50 161 I67 174 181 188 194 201 214 226 238 250 261 272 283 293 308 322 335 347
60 152 158 164 170 176 181 187 197 207 217 226 235 243 251 259 269 279 287 295
70 142 147 152 157 162 166 171 179 187 194 201 207 213 218 223 230 236 241 246
80 131 135 139 143 147 150 154 160 165 I70 175 179 183 186 190 194 198 201 204
90 120 123 126 129 131 134 136 141 144 I48 151 154 156 159 161 163 166 168 170
1W LO8 110 112 114 116 118 120 123 126 I28 130 132 134 135 137 139 140 142 143
110 96.5 98.3 I00 101 103 104 105 107 109 I11 112 114 115 116 117 118 119 121 121
f: I20 86.2 87.5 88.6 89.7 90.7 91.7 92.5 94.1 95.4 96.6 97.7 98.6 100 100 101 102 103 104 104
130 76.9 77.8 78.7 79.5 80.3 81.0 81.6 82.7 83.7 84.6 85.4 86.1 86.8 87.3 87.9 88.6 89.2 89.8 90.3
140 68.7 69.4 70.1 70.7 71.3 71.8 72.3 73.1 73.9 74.6 75.2 75.7 76.2 76.6 77.1 77.6 78.1 78.5 78.9
150 61.6 62.1 62.6. 63.1 63.6 64.0 64.3 65.0 65.6 66.1 66.6 67.0 67.4 67.7 68.1 68.5 68.9 69.2 69.5
160 55.4 55.8 56.2 56.6 56.9 57.3 57.5 58.1 58.5 59.0 59.3 59.7 60.0 60.3 60.5 60.9 61.2 61.5 61.7
170 50.0 50.3 50.7 51.0 51.2 51.5 51.7 52.2 52.5 52.9 53.2 53.5 53.7 53.9 54.1 54.4 54.7 54.9 55.1
180 45.3 45.6 45.9 46.1 46.3 46.5 46.7 47.1 47.4 47.7 47.9 48.1 48.3 48.5 48.7 48.9 49.2 49.3 49.5
190 41.2 41.5 41.7 41.9 42.1 42.2 42.4 42.7 42.9 43.2 43.4 43.6 43.7 43.9 44.0 44.2 44.4 44.6 44.7
200 37.6 37.8 38.0 38.2 38.3 38.5 38.6 38.9 39.1 39.3 39.5 39.6 39.8 39.9 40.0 40.2 40.3 40.5 40.6
210 34.5 34.7 34.8 35.0 35.1 35.2 35.3 35.5 35.7 35.9 36.0 36.2 36.3 36.4 36.5 36.6 36.8 36.9 37.0
220 331.7 31.9 32.0 32.1 32.2 32.3 32.4 32.6 32.8 32.9 33.0 33.1'33.2 33.3 33.4 33.6 33.7 33.8 33.9
230 29.2 29.4 29.5 29.6 29.7 29.8 29.9 30.0 30.1 30.3 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.7 30.7 30.8 30.9 31.0 31.1
240 27.1 27.2 27.3 27.3 27.4 27.5 27.6 27.7 27.8 27.9 28.0 28.1 28.2 28.3 28.3 28.4 28.5 28.6 28.7
250 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 25.7 25.8 25.9 26.0 26.0 26.1 26.2 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.5
 Table 9(c) Design Compressive Stress,f, (MPa) For Column Buckling Class c i:
m
(Clause 7.1.2.1) 0
..
0
h)
0
KWr Yield Stress, f, (MPa)
.1 -
S
200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 3M) 380 4W 420 450 480 510 540
10 182 191 200 209 218 227 236 255 273 291 309 327 345 364 382 409 436 464 491
20 182 190 199 207 216 224 233 250 266 283 299 316 332 348 364 388 412 435 458
30 172 180 188 196 204 211 219 234 249 264 278 293 307 321 335 355 376 395 415
40 163 170 177 184 191 198 205 218 231 244 256 268 280 292 304 320 337 352 367
50 153 I59 165 172 I78 183 189 201 212 222 232 242 252 261 270 282 295 306 317
60 142 148 I53 158 163 168 173 182 I91 199 207 215 222 228 235 244 252 260 267
70 131 136 140 144 148 152 156 163 170 176 182 187 192 197 202 208 213 218 223
80 120 123 127 130 133 136 139 145 149 154 158 162 165 169 I72 176 180 183 186
90 108 111 114 116 119 121 123 127 131 134 137 140 142 144 146 149 152 154 156
100 97.5 I00 102 104 LO5 I07 109 112 114 116 119 120 122 I24 125 127 129 131 132
110 87.3 89.0 90.5 92.0 93.3 94.6 95.7 97.9 1W 102 103 104 106 107 108 110 111 112 113
N
120 78.2 79.4 80.6 81.7 82.7 83.7 84.6 86.2 87.6 88.9 90.1 91.1 92.1 93.0 93.8 94.9 95.9 96.8 97.6
I30 70.0 71.0 71.9 72.8 73.5 74.3 75.0 76.2 77.3 78.3 79.2 80.0 80.7 81.4 82.0 82.9 83.6 84.3 84.9
140 62.9 63.664.4 65.0 65.6 66.2 66.7 67.7 68.6 69.3 70.0 70.7 71.2 71.8 72.3 72.9 73.5 74.1 74.6
150 56.6 57.2 57.8 58.3 58.8 59.2 59.7 60.4 61.1 61.7 62.3 62.8 63.3 63.7 M.1 64.6 65.1 65.5 65.9
IM) 5 51.6 52.1 52.5 52.9 53.3 53.6 54.2 54.8 55.3 55.7 56.1 56.5 56.9 57.2 57.6 58.0 58.4 58.7
170 46.4 46.8 47.1 47.5 47.8 48.1 48.4 48.9 49.3 49.8 50.1 50.5 50.8 51.1 51.3 51.7 52.0 52.3 52.6
I80 42.2 42.5 42.8 43.1 43.4 43.6 43.9 44.3 44.7 45.0 45.3 45.6 45.8 46.1 46.3 46.6 46.9 47.1 47.3
190 38.5 38.8 39.0 39.3 39.5 39.7 39.9 40.3 40.6 40.9 4 . 41.4 41.6 41.8 42.0 42.2 42.5 42.7 42.9
200 35.3 35.5 35.7 35.9 36.1 36.3 36.5 36.8 37.0 37.3 37.5 37.7 37.9 38.1 38.2 38.4 38.6 38.8 39.0
210 32.4 32.6 32.8 33.0 33.1 33.3 33.4 33.7 33.9 34.1 34.3 34.5 34.7 34.8 34.9 35.1 35.3 35.4 35.6
220 29.9 30.1 30.2 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.8 31.0 31.2 31.4 31.5 31.7 31.8 31.9 32.1 32.2 32.4 32.5 32.6
230 27.6 27.8 27.9 28.0 28.2 28.3 28.4 28.6 28.8 28.9 29.1 29.2 29.3 29.4 29.5 29.7 29.8 29.9 30.0
240 25.6 25.7 25.9 26.0 26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.6 26.7 26.9 27.0 27.1 27.2 27.3 27.4 27.5 27.6 27.7
250 23.8 23.9 24.0 24.1 24.2 24.3 24.4 24.5 24.7 24.8 24.9 25.0 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 25.7
 Table 9(d) Design Compressive Stress,f, (MPa) for Column Buckling Class d
(Clause 7.1.2.1)

KUr Yield Stress, f , (MPa)

&
2W 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 182 191 200 209 218 227 236 255 273 291 309 327 345 364 382 409 436 464 491
20 182 190 198 206 215 223 231 247 263 279 294 310 325 340 355 377 399 421 442
30 168 175 182 I89 197 204 211 224 238 251 264 277 290 302 314 332 350 367 384
40 154 161 167 173 179 185 I91 203 214 225 235 246 256 266 275 289 303 316 328
50 141 147 152 157 162 167 172 I82 191 199 208 216 224 231 238 249 258 268 277
60 129 133 137 142 146 150 154 161 168 175 182 188 193 199 204 212 219 225 231
70 116 I20 124 127 130 133 137 142 148 153 158 162 167 171 174 180 184 189 193
80 105 I08 111 113 116 118 121 I25 129 133 137 140 143 146 149 153 156 159 ,162
90 94.1 96.4 98.6 101 103 105 107 110 I13 116 119 121 123 126 128 I30 133 135 137
IW 84.3 86.2 87.9 89.6 91.1 92.6 94.0 96.7 99.1 101 103 105 107 108 I10 112 114 116 117
I10 75.6 77.0 78.4 79.7 81.0 82.1 83.2 85.3 87.1 -88.8 90.4 91.8 93.1 94.4 95.5 97.1 98.5 IW 101
I20 67.8 69.0 70.1 71.1 72.1 73.0 73.9 75.5 77.0 78.3 79.5 80.6 81.7 82.6 83.5 84.7 85.8 86.9 87.8
130 61.0 62.0 62.8 63.7 64.5 65.2 65.9 67.2 68.3 69.4 70.4 71.2 72.1 72.8 73.5 74.5 75.4 76.2 76.9
140 55.0 55.8 56.5 57.2 57.8 58.4 59.0 60.0 61.0 61.8 62.6 63.3 64.0 64.6 65.2 66.0 66.7 67.3 67.9
150 49.8 50.4 51.0 51.6 52.1 52.6 53.1 53.9 54.7 55.4 56.0 56.6 57.2 57.7 58.1 58.8 59.3 59.9 60.4
160 45.2 45.7 46.2 46.7 47.1 47.5 47.9 48.6 49.3 49.9 50.4 50.9 51.3 51.7 52.1 52.7 53.1 53.6 54.0
170 41.2 41.6 42.1 42.4 42.8 43.1 43.5 44.1 44.6 45.1 45.5 45.9 46.3 46.7 47.0 47.4 47.8 48.2 48.6
180 37.7 38.0 38.4 38.7 39.0 39.3 39.6 40.1 40.5 41.0 41.3 41.7 42.0 42.3 42.6 43.0 43.3 43.6 43.9
190 34.5 34.9 35.2 35.4 35.7 35.9 36.2 36.6 37.0 37.4 37.7 38.0 38.2 38.5 38.7 39.1 39.4 39.6 39.9
2W 31.8 32.0 32.3 32.5 32.8 33.0 33.2 33.6 33.9 34.2 34.5 34.7 35.0 35.2 35.4 35.7 35.9 36.2 36.4
210 29.3 29.6 29.8 30.0 30.2 30.4 30.5 30.9 31.2 31.4 31.7 31.9 32.1 32.3 32.5 32.7 32.9 33.1 33.3
220 27.1 27.3 27.5 27.7 27.9 28.0 28.2 28.5 28.7 29.0 29.2 29.4 29.6 29.7 29.9 30.1 30.3 30.5 30.6
230 25.2 25.3 25.5 25.7 25.8 26.0 26.1 26.4 26.6 26.8 27.0 27.1 27.3 27.5 27.6 27.8 27.9 28.1 28.2
240 23.4 23.6 23.7 23.9 24.0 24.1 24.2 24.5 24.7 24.8 25.0 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.7 25.9 26.0 26.1
250 21.8 22.0 22.1 22.2 22.3 22.5 22.6 22.8 22.9 23.1 23.2 23.4 23.5 23.6 23.7 23.9 24.0 24.1 24.2
 Table 10 Buckling Class of Cross-Sections
(Clause 7.1.2.2)

Cross-Section Limils Buckling About Axis Buckling

Class

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Rolled I-Sections Idb+ 1.2 :

2-2
r, s 4 0 mm b
+Y Y-Y

Welded I-Section r, 4 0 m m 2-2 b

Y-Y C

2-2 C
Y-V d

+Y +Y
-
Hallow Sectlon
Hot roiled Any P

0
Welded Box Section
Cold formed

Generally
Any b

b
(except as below) Any

Thick welds and

b/t,< 30 2.2 c

u +Y
MI,,. < 30 Y-Y c

Channel, Angle, T and Solid Sections

Any c

+Y

Bullt-up Member

zT- -azT +Y
Any c
 Table 11 Effective Length of Prismatic Compression Members

-
(Clause 7.2.2)

Boundary Conditions Schematic Effective

h
-, Representation Length
At One End At the Other End
Rotation Translation Rotation
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Restrained Free Free

2.0L

i
2:
Free Restrained Free Restrained

Restrained Free Restrained Free

"

3
Restwined Restrained Free Restrained

i Restrained Restrained Restrained Free

Restrained Restrained Restrained Restrained

NOTE-L is the unsupported length of the compression member (see 7.2.1).

 7.3 Design Details (see 9.3.2.2).The ends of compression members faced
for bearing sball invariably he machined toensure perfect
7.3.1 Thickness ufPlate Elements
contact of surfaces in bearing.
Classification of members on the basis of thickness of
7.3.4.2Where such members are not faced for complete
constituent plate elements sball satisfy the width-
bearing, the splices shall he designed to transmit all
thickness ratio requirements specified in Table 2.
the forces to which the members are subjected.
7.3.2 Effective Sectional Area, A,
7.3.4.3 Wherever possible, splices sball be
Except as modified in 3.7.2 (Class 4), the gross proportioned and arranged so that the centroidal axis
sectional area shall be taken as the effective sectional of the splice coincides as nearly as possible with the
area for all compression members fabricated by centroidal axes of the members being jointed, in order
welding, bolting and riveting so long as the section is to avoid eccentricity; but where eccentricity is present
semi-compact or better. Holes not fitted with rivets, in the joint, the resulting stress shall be accounted for.
bolts or pins shall be deducted from gross area to
calculate effective sectional area. 7.4 Column Bases
7.3.3 Eccentricity for Stanchions and Columns 7.4.1 General
7.3.3.1 For the purpose of determining the stress in a Column bases should have sufficient stiffness and
stanchion or column section, the beam reactions or strength to transmit axial force, bending moments and
similar loads shall be assumed to be applied at an shear forces at the base of the columns :o their
eccentricity of 100 mm from the face of the section or foundation without exceeding the load carrying
at the centre of bearing whichever dimension gives the capacity of the supports. Anchor bolts and shear keys
greater eccentricity. and with the exception of the should be provided wherever necessary. Shear
following two cases: resistance at the proper contact surface between steel
base and concretelgrout may be calculated using a
a) In the case of cap connection, the load sball friction coefficient of 0.45.
be assumed to be applied at the face of the
column or stanchion section or at the edge of The nominal bearing pressure between the base plate
packing, if used towards the span of the beam. and the support below may be determined on the basis
of linearly varying distribution of pressure. The
b) In the case of a roof truss bearing on a cap,
no eccentricity be taken for simple bearings maximun~bearing pressure should not exceed the
without connections capable of developing bearing strength equal to 0.6f,,wheref,, is the smaller
any appreciable moment. In case of web of characteristic cube strength of concrete or bedding
member connection with face, actual material.
eccentricity is to be considered. 7.4.1.1 If the size of the base plate is larger than that
7.3.3.2 In continuous columns, the bending moments required to limit the bearing pressure on the base
due to eccentricities of loadiiig on the columns at any support, anequal projection c of the base plate beyond
floor may be divided equally between the columns the face of the column and gusset may be taken as
above and below that floor level, provided thal the effective in transferring the column load as given in
moment of inertia of one column section, divided by Fig. 9, such that bearing pressure on the effective area
its effective length does not exceed 1.5 times the does not exceed bearing capacily of concrete base.
correspoi~dingvalue of the other column. Where this 7.4.2 Gusseted Bases
ratio is exceeded, the bending moment shall be divided
in proportion to the moment of inertia of the column For stanchion with gusseted bases, the gusset plates,
sections divided by tbeir respective effective lengths. angle cleats, stiffeners, fastenings, etc, in combination
with the bearing area of the shaft, shall be sufficient to
7.3.4 Splices take the loads, bending moments and reactions to the
7.3.4.1 Where the ends of compression members are base plate without exceeding specified strength. All
prepared for bearing over the whole area, they shall be the bearing surfaces shall bemachined to ensure perfect
spliced to hold the connected members accurately in contact.
position, and to resist bending ortension, if present. Such 7.4.2.1 Wbere the ends of the column shaft and the
splices should maintain the intended member stiffness gusset plates are not faced for complete bearing, the
about each axis. Splices should be located as close to weldings, fastenings connecting them to the base plate
the point of inflection as possible. Otherwise tbeir sball be sufficient to transmit all the forces to which
capacity should be adequate to carry magnified moment the base is subjected.
 7.4.2.2 Column and base plate connections When only the effective area of the base plate is used
as in 7.4.1.1, c2 may be used in the above equation
where the end of the column is connected directly to
(see Fig. 9) instead of (a2- 0.3b2).
the base plate by means of full penetration butt welds,
the connection shall be deemed to transmit to the base 7.4.3.2 When the slab does not distribute the column
all the forces and moments to which the column is load uniformly, due to eccentricity of the load etc,
subjected. special calculation shall be made to show that the base
is adequate to resist the momentdue to the non-uniform
7.4.3 Slab Bases
pressure from below.
Columns with slab bases need not be provided with
7.4.3.3 Bases for bearing upon concrete or masonry
gussets, but sufficient fastenings shall be provided to
need not be machined on the underside.
retain the parts securely in place and to resist all
moments and forces, other than direct compression, 7.4.3.4 In cases where the cap or base is fillet welded
including those arising during transit, unloading and directly to the end of the column without boring and
erection. shouldering, the contact surfaces shall be machined to
..~ give a perfect bearing and the welding shall be
7.4.3.1 The minimum thickness, t,, of rectangular slab
sufficient to transmit the forces as required in 7.4.3.
.~.
+
bases, supporting columns under axial compression
shall be
Where full strength butt welds are provided, machining
- of contact surfaces is not required.
7.5 Angle Struts

where 7.5.1 Single Angle Struts

w = uniform pressure from below on the slab The compression in single angles may be transferred
.. either concentrically to its centroid through end gusset
base under the factored load axial
~ = compression; oreccentrically by connecting one of its legs to agusset
or adjacent member.
a, b = larger and smaller projection, respectively
of the slab base beyond the rectangle, 7.5.1.1 Concentric loading
.,., circumscribing the column; and
When a single angle is concentrically loaded in
t, = flange thickness of compression member. compression, the design strength may be evaluated
using 7.1.2.

EFFECTIVE PORTION

STIFFENER

Fro. 9 EFFECTIVE
AREAOF A BASEPLATE

47
 7.5.1.2 Loaded through one leg stress shall not exceed the values based on 7.1.2, The
angles shall be connected together over their lengths
The flexural torsional buckling strength of single angle
so as to satisfy the requirements of 7.8 and 10.2.5.
loaded in compression through one of its legs may be
evaluated using the equivalent slenderness ratio, 4, as 7.5.2.2 Double angle discontinuous struts connected
given below: back-to-back, to one side of a gusset or section by one
or more bolts or rivets in each angle, or by the
equivalent in welding, shall be designed in accordance
where with 7.5.1 and the angles shall be connected together
over their lengths so as to satisfy the requirements
k,, k,, k, =constants depending upon the end of 7.8 and 10.2.5.
condition, as given in Table 12,
7.5.3 Continuous Members
Double angle continuous struts such as those forming
the Ranges, chords or ties of trusses or trussed girders,
or the legs of towers shall be designed as axially loaded
compression members, and the effective length shall
where
be taken in accordance with 7.2.4.
I = centre-to-centre length of the supporting
7.5.4 Cornbilled Stresses
member,
r , = radius of gyration about the minor axis, In addition to axial loads, if thestruts carry loads which
cause transverse bending, the combined bending and
b,, b, = width of the two legs of the angle,
axial stresses shall be checked in accordance with 9.3.
r = thickness of the leg, and For determining the permissible axial and bending
E = yield stress ratio ( 250/f,)0'. stresses, the effective length shall be taken in
accordance with the 7.2 and 8.3.
Table 12 Constants k,, k, a n d k,
7.6 Laced Columns
SI No. of Bolts GusseUCon- k, k, , k,
Nu. at Each End necting 7.6.1 General
Connection Member
Fixity " 7.6.1.1 Members comprising two main co~nponents
(1) (2) (3) (41 (51 (6) laced and tied, should where practicable, have a radius
of gyration about the axis perpendicular to the plane
il Fixed 1 0.20 0.35 20
of lacing not less than the radius of gyration about the
22 axis parallel to the plane of lacing (see Fig. 10A
Hinged 0.70 0.60 5
and 10B).
ii) Fixed ( 0.75 0.35 20
7.6.1.2 As far as practicable, the lacing system shall
I
Hinged 1 1.25 0.50 60 be uniform throughout the length of the column.
" Stiffeness of in-plane rotational restraint provided by the 7.6.1.3 Except for tie plates as specified in 7.7, double
gursel/connecting member. laced systems (see Fig. 10B) and single laced systems
For partial restraint, the kc can be interpolated between the 1. ( s e e Fig. 10A) on opposite sides of the main
results for fixed and hinged cases.
components shall not becombined with cross members
7.5.2 Double Angle Struts (ties) perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of thestrut
( s e e Fig. IOC), unless all forces resulting from
7.5.2.1 For double angle discontinuous struts, deformation of the strut members are calculated and
connected back to back, on opposite sides of the gusset provided for in the design of lacing and its fastenings.
or a section, by not less than two bolts or rivets in line
7.6.1.4 Single laced systems, on opposite faces of
along the angles at each end, or by the equivalent in
the components being laced together shall preferably
welding, the load may be regarded as applied axially. be in the same direction so that one is the shadow of
The effective length, KL, in the plane of end gusset the other, instead of being mutually opposed in
shall be taken as between 0.7 and 0.85 times the direction.
distance between intersections, depending on the .
degree of the restraint provided. The effective length, 7.6.1.5 The effective slenderness ratio, (KUr),, of laced
KL, in the plane perpendicularto that of the end gusset, columns shall be taken as 1.05 times the (KUr),, the
shall be taken as equal to the distance between centres actual maximum slenderness ratio, in order to account
of intersections. The calculated average compressive for shear deformation effects.
LACING ON LACING ON LACING ON LACING ON
FACE A FACE B FACE A FACE B

PREFFERED LACING PREFFERED LACING

ARRANGEMENT ARRANGEMENT

10A Single Laced System 106 Double Laced System

10C Double Laced and Single Laced System Combined with Cross Numbers

FIG.10 LACEDCOLUMNS
 IS 800 : 2007

7.6.2 Width of Lacing Bars construction, the effective lengths shall be taken as 0.7
times the distance between the inner ends of welds
In boltedlriveted construction, the minimum width of
lacing bars shall be three times the nominal diameter connecting the single lacing bars to the members.
of the end bolt/rivet. NOTE -The required section for lacing bars as compression1
tension members shall be determined by using the appropriate
7.6.3 Thickness of Lacing Bars design stresses,& subject to the requirements given in 7.6.3,
to 7.6.6 and Td in 6.1.
The thickness of flat lacing bars shall not be less than
one-fortieth of its effective length for single lacings 7.6.7A1tachmer1t Main Members
and one-sixtieth of the effective length for double The bolting, riveting or welding of lacing bars to the
lacings. main members shall be sufficient to transmit the force
7.6.3.1 Rolled sections or tubes of equivalent strength in the bars. Where welded lacing bars
may be permitted instead of flats, for lacings. overlap the main members, the amoupt of lap measured
along either edge of the lacing bar shall be not less
7.6.4 Angle oflnclination than four times the thickness of the bar or the thickness
bars, whether in double or single systems, of the element of the members to which it is connected,
be inclined at an angle not less than 400 nor more than whichever is less. The welding should be sufficient to
70" to the axis of the built-up member. transmit the load in the bar and shall, in any case, be
provided along each side of the bar for the full length
7.6.5 Spacing of lap.
7.6.5.1 The maximum spacing of lacing bars, whether 7.6.8 End TiePlates
connected by bolting, riveting or welding, shall also
be such that the maximum slenderness ratio of the Laced compression members shall be provided with
components of the main member ( a , / r , ) ,between tie plates as per 7.7 at the ends of lacing systems and
consecutive lacing connections is not greater than 50 at intersection with other memberslstays and at points
or 0.7 times the most unfavourable slenderness ratio where the lacing systems are interrupted.
of the member as a whole, whichever is less, where a , 7.7 ~ ~,-olnmns ~ t ~ ~ ~ d
is the unsupported length of the individual member
between lacing points, and r, is the minimum radius 7.7.1 &neral
of gyration of the individual member being laced 7.7.1.1 Compression members composed of two main
together components battened should preferably have the
7.6.5.2 where lacing bars are not lapped to form the individual members of the same cross-section and
connection to the components of the members, they symmetrically disposed about their major axis. Where
shall be so connected that there is no appreciable practicable, the compression members should have a
interruption in the triangulation of the system. radius of gyration about the axis perpendicular to the
plane of the batten not less than the radius of gyration
7.6.6 Design of Lacings about the axis parallel to the plane of the batten (see
7.6.6.1 The lacing shall be proportioned to resist a total Fig. 11).
transverse shear, V,,at any point in the member, equal 7.7.1.2 Battened compression members, not complying
to at least 2.5 percent of the axial force in the member with the requirements specified in this section or those
and shall be divided equally among all transverse- subjected to eccentricity of loading, applied moments
lacing systems in parallel planes. or lateral forces in the plane of the battens (see Fig. 11).
7.6.6.2For members carrying calculated bending stress shall be designed according to the exact theory of
elastic stability or enipirically, based on verification
due to eccentricity of loading, applied end moments
by tests.
andlor lateral loading, the lacing shall be proportioned
to resist the actual shear due to bending, in addition to NOTE - I f the column section is subjected to eccentricity or
that specified in 7.6.6.1. other moments about an axis perpendicular to battens, the
battens and the column section should be specially designed
7.6.6.3 The slenderness ratio, KUr, of the lacing bars for such moments and shears.
shall not exceed 145. In boltedlriveted construction, 7.7.1.3 The battens shall be placed opposite to each
the effective length of lacing bars for the determination other at each end of the member and at points where
of the design strength shall be taken as the length the member is stayed in its length and as far as
between the inner end fastener of the bars for singie practicable, be spaced and proportioned uniformly
lacing, and as 0.7 of this length for double lacings throughout. The number of battens shall be such that
effectively connected at intersections. In welded the member is divided into not less than three bays
 within its actual length from centre-to-centre of end Battens shall be of plates, angles, channels, orI-sections
connections. and at their ends shall be riveted, bolted or welded to
the main components so as to resist simultaneously a
shear V, = V,CINS along the column axis and a moment
M = V,C/2N at each connection,
where
V , = transverse shear force as defined above;
C = distance between centre-to-centre of battens,
longitudinally;
N = number of parallel planes of battens; and
S = minimum transverse distance between the
centroid of the rivetlbolt grouplwelding
connecting the batten to the main
member.
7.7.2.2 Tie plates
plates are members provided at the ends of battened
and laced members, and shall be designed by the same
method as battens. In no case shall a tie plate and its
fastenings be incapable of carrying the forces for which
the lacing or batten has been designed.
7.7.2.3 Size
When plates are used for battens, the end battens and
- ------ -----
----------- - those at points where the member is stayed in its length

J? - : $ z ' of thethe
than
shall have
main
perpendicular
anmembers.
effectivedistance
The
depth,
intermediate
longitudinally,
between the
battens
centroids
notshall
less

-----------
- ------ ----- -
have an effective depth of not less than three quarters
of this distance, but in no case shall the effective depth

IsYI of any batten be less than twice the width of one

member, in the plane of the battens. The effective depth
of a batten shall be taken as the longitudinal distance
FIG. 11 BATTEN
COLUMN
SECTION between outermost bolts, rivets or welds at the ends.
The thickness of batten or the tie plates shall be not
7.7.1.4Theeffectiveslendemessratio(KUr),ofbattened less than one-fiftieth of the distance between the
columns, shall be taken as 1.1 times the (KLfr),, the innermost connecting lines of rivets, bolts or welds,
maximum actual slenderness ratio of the column, to perpendicular to the main member.
account for shear deformation effects. 7.7.2.4 The requirement of bolt size and thickness of
7.7.2 Design of Battens batten specified above does not apply when angles,
channels or I-sections are usedfor battens with their legs
7.7.2.1 Battens or flanges perpendicular to the main member. However,
Battens shall be designed to carry the bendingmoments it should he ensured that the ends of the compression
and shear forces arising from transverse shear force V, members are tied to achieve adequate rigidity.
equal to 2.5 percent of the total axial force on the whole 7.7.3 Spacing ofBafrens
compression member, at any point in the length of the
member, divided equally between parallel planes of In battened compression members where the individual
battens. Battened memtier carrying calculated bending members are not specifically checked for shear stress
moment due to eccentricity of axial loading, calculated and bending moments, the spacing of battens, centre-
end moments or lateral loads parallel to the plane of to-centre of its end fastenings, shall be such that the
battens, shall be designed to carry actual shear in slenderness ratio (KUr) of any component over that
addition to the above shear. The main members shall distance shall be neither greater than 50 nor greater
also be checked for the same shear force and bending than 0.7 times the slenderness ratio of the member as a
moments as for the battens. whole about its z-z (axis parallel to the battens).

51
 7.7.4 Attachment to Main Members 7.8.4.1 Compression members connected by such
riveting, bolting or welding shall not be subjected to
7.7.4.1 Welded connections
transverse loading in a plane perpendicular to the
Where tie or batten plates overlap the main members, riveted, bolted or welded surfaces.
the amount of lap shall be not less than four times the
thickness of the plate. The length of weld connecting 7.8.5 Where the components are in contact back-to-
each edge of the batten plate to the member shall, in back, the spacing of the rivets, bolts or intermittent
aggregate, be not less than half the depth of the batten welds shall not exceed the maximum spacing for
plate. At least one-third of the weld shall he placed at compression members given in (see Section 10).
each end of this edge. The length of weld and depth of
batten plate shall be measured along the longitudinal SECTION 8
axis of the main member. DESIGN OF MEMBERS SUBJECTEDTO
BENDING
In addition, the welding shall be returned along the
other two edges of the plates transversely to the axis 8.1 General
of the main member for a length not less than the
minimum lap specified above. Members subjected to predominant bending shall have
adequate design strength to resist bending moment,
7.8 Compression Members Composed of Two shear force, and concentrated forces imposed upon and
Components Back-to-Back their combinations. Further, the members shall satisfy
the deflection limitation presented in Section 5, as
7.8.1 Compression members composed of two angles,
serviceability criteria. Member subjected to other
channels, or tees back-to-back in contact or separated
forces in addition to bending or biaxial bending shall
by a small distance, shall be connected together by
be designed in accordance with Section 9.
riveting, bolting or welding so that the ratio of most
unfavourable slenderness of each member between the 8.1.1 Effective Span of Beams
intermediate connections is not greater than 40 or 0.6
The effective span of a beam shall be taken as the
times the most unfavourable ratio of slenderness of
the strut as a whole, whichever is less (see Section 10). distance between the centre of the supports, except
where the point of application of the reaction is taken
7.8.2 In no case shall the ends of the strut be connected as eccentric at the support, when it shall be permissible
together with less than two rivets or bolts or their to take the effective span as the length between the
equivalent in welding, and there shall be not less than assumed lines of the reactions.
two additional connections in between, spaced
equidistant along the length of the strut. Where the 8.2 Design Strength in Bending (Flexure)
members are separated back-to-back, the rivets or bolts
The design bending strength of beam, adequately
through these connections shall pass through solid
supported against lateral torsional buckling (laterally
washers or packing in between. Where the legs of the
supported beam) is governed by the yield stress
connected angles or the connected tees are 125 mm
wide or more, or where webs of channels are 150 mm (see 8.2.1). When a beam is not adequately supported
wide or over, not less than two rivets or bolts shall be against lateral buckling (laterally un-supported beams)
used in each connection, one on line of each gauge the design bending strength may be governed by lateral
mark. torsional buckling strength (see 8.2.2).

7.8.3 Where these connections are made by welding, The factored design moment, M at any section, in a
solid packing shall be used to effect the jointing unless beam due to external actions, shall satisfy
the members are sufficiently close together to permit M<M,
direct welding, and the members shall be connected where
by welding along both pairs of edges of the main
components. M, = design bending strength of the section,
calculated as given in 8.2.1.2.
7.8.4 The rivets, bolts or welds in these connections 8.2.1 Laterally Supported Beam
shall be sufficient to carry the shear force and moments,
if any, specified for battened struts (see 7.7.3). and in A beam may be assumed to be adequately supported
no case shall the rivets or bolts be less than 16 mm at the supports, provided the compression flange has
diameter for members upto and including 10 mm thick; full lateral restraint and nominal torsional restraint at
20 mm diameter for members upto and including supports supplied by web cleats, partial depth end
16 mm thick; and 22 mm diameter for members over plates, fin plates or continuity with the adjacent span.
16 mm thick. Full lateral restraint to compression flange may be
assumed to exist if the frictional or other positive
restraint of a floor connection to the compression flange
where
of the member is capable of resisting a lateral force
not less than 2.5 percent of the maximum force in the Md, = design bending strength under high shear as
compression flange of the member. This may be defined in 9.2.
considered to be uniformly distributed along the flange, 8.2.1.4 Holes in the tension zone
provided gravity loads constitute the dominant loading
on the member and the floor construction is capable a) The effect of holes in the tension flange, on
of resisting this lateral force. the design bending strength need not be
considered if
The design bending strength of a section which is not
susceptible to web buckling under shear before yielding
(where d/tw 5 6 7 ~ shall
) be determined according where
to 8.2.1.2.
A,, /A,, = ratio of net to gross area of
8.2.1.1 Section with webs susceptible to shear buckling the flange in tension,
before yielding
fr/f. = ratio of yield and ultimate
When the flanges are plastic, compact or semi-compact stress of the material, and
-
but the web is suscentible to shear buckline before
yielding (d/t,6 7 & ) ,the design bending strength shall y,,/y,,, = ratio of partial safety
factors against ultimate to
be calculated using one of the following methods:
yield stress (see 5.4.1).
a) The bending moment and axial force acting When the A,,/A,, does not satisfy the above
on the section may be assumed to be resisted requirement, the reduced effective flange area,
by flanges only and the web is designed only A,,satisfying the above equation may be taken
to resist shear (see 8.4). as the effective flange area in tension, instead
b) The bending moment and axial force acting of A,,.
on the section may be assumed to be resisted
by the whole section. In such a case, the web b) The effect of holes in the tension region of
shall be designed for combined shear and the web on the design flexural strength need
normal stresses using simple elastic theory in not he considered, if the limit given in (a)
caseof semi-compact webs and simple plastic above is satisfied for the complete tension
theory in the case of compact and plastic zone of the cross-section, comprising the
webs. tension flange and tension region of the
web.
8.2.1.2 When the factored design shear force does not
exceed 0.6 Vd, where V, is the design shear strength of C) Fastener holes in the compression zone of the
the cross-section (see 8.4), the design bending strength, cross-section need not be considered in design
Md shall be taken as: bending strength calculation, except for
oversize and slotted holes or holes without
any fastener.
To avoid irreversible deformation under serviceability 8.2.1.5 Shear lag effects
loads, M, shall be less than 1.2 Z, fy ly,, incase of
simply supported and 1.5 ZJYlymoin cantilever beams; The shear lag effects in flanges may be disregarded
provided:
where
a) For outstand elements (supported along one
,= 1.0 for plastic and compact sections; edge), b, < L,/20; and
& = Z/Zpforsemi-compact sections; b) For internal elements (supported along two
Z,, Z, = plastic and elastic section modulii of the edges), bi 5 Lo/ 10.
cross-section, respectively; where
fY = yield stress of the material; and
Lo = length between points of zero moment
y, = partial safety factor (see 5.4.1). (inflection) in the span,
8.2.1.3 When the design shear force (factored), V b, = width of the flange with outstand, and
exceeds 0.6Vd, where Vdis the design shear strength of bi = width of the flange as an internal element.
the cross-section (see 8.4) the design bending strength, Where these limits are exceeded, the effective width
M, shall be taken
of flange for design strength may be calculated using
 specialist literature, or conservatively taken as the value corresponding to elastic lateral buckling
satisfying the limit given above. moment (see 8.2.2.1 andTable 14).
8.2.2 Laterally Unsupported Beams 8.2.2.1 Elastic lateral torsional buckling moment
Resistance to lateral torsional buckling need not be In case of simply supported, prismatic members with
checked separately (member may be treated as laterally symmetric cross-section, the elastic lateral buckling
supported, see 8.2.1) in the following cases: moment, M , , can be determined from:
a) Bending is about the minor axis of the section,
b) Section is hollow (rectangular1 tubular) or
solid bars, and
C) In case of major axis bending, A, (as defined
herein) is less than 0.4. f,,,of non-slender rolled steel sections in the above
The design bending strength of laterally unsupported equation may be approximately calculated from the
beam as governed by lateral torsional buckling is given values given inTable 14, which has been prepared using
by: the following equation:
Md = PbZPfbd
where
= 1.0 for plastic and compact sections.
= ZCZ, for semi-compact sections. The following simplified equation may be used in the
Z,, Z, = plastic section modulus and elastic section case of prismatic members made of standard rolled
modulus with respect to extreme I-sections and welded doubly symmetric I-sections,
compression fibre. for calculating the elastic lateral buckling moment,
f,, = design bending compressive stress, Mcr (see Table 14):
obtained as -given below lsee Tables 13(a)
.,
and 13(b)]
fbd =XLT f y /Ymo
xrr=bending stress reduction factor to
Kc = h [
r 1+- 1 (- ~
20 h f / t ,
J]"~ ~ 4
account for lateral torisonal buckling, where
given by:
I, = torsional constant = - Chi t: / 3 for open
1 section;
XLT. = s 1.0 I, = warping constant;
+[&-at,]"'}
Iy,,ry= momentof inertia and radius of gyration,
respectively about the weaker axis;
@LT = 0 . 5 [ 1 + a ~ ~ ( / 2 ~ ~ - 0 . 2 ) + ~ , ~ ] LT= effective length for lateral torsional buckling
(see 8.3);
a,, the imperfection parameter is given by:
h, = centre-to-centre distance between flanges; and
a, = 0.21 for rolled steel section t, = thickness of the flange.
a,, = 0.49 for welded steel section
M,, for different beam sections, considering loading,
The non-dimensional slenderness ratio, A, is given
support condition, and non-symmetric section, shall
by be more accurately calculated using the method given
= Jm 5 in Annex E.
8.3 Effective Length for LateralTorsional Buckling
8.3.1 For simply supported beams and girders of span
where
length, L,where no lateral restraint to the compression
M,, = elastic critical moment calculated in flanges is provided, but where each end of the beam is
accordance with 8.2.2.1, and restrained against torsion, the effective length L, of
f,,,= extreme fibre bending compressive stress the lateral buckling to be used in 8.2.2.1 shall be taken
as in Table 15.
Table 13(a) Design Bending Compressive Stress Corresponding to Lateral Buckling, f,, cr,,= 021
(Clause 8.2.2)
, .. .'--' . , . ' . ' , .. ... , . I . . . .. . . , i... .. . , . , , . , .:, .,.. , . : ,.. l , .",,.....,..:. , , , .,;.,,,..
, ,I, .. .">" ....,,,,:il. ,#,..",,., *.. :, ..,;r,,. , , L.,i-., .,,
 ,
Table 14 Critical Stress,f.,,
(Clause 8.2.2.1)
 In simply supported beams with intermediate lateral at that point, relative to the end supports. The
resuaintsagainstlateraltorsiond buckling,theeffective intermediate lateral restraints should be either
length for lateral torsional buckling to be used connected to an appropriate bracing system capable
in 8.2.2.1,LTshall be taken as the length of the relevant of transferring the restraint force to the effectivelateral
segment in between the lateral restraints. The effective support at the ends of the member, or should be
length shall be equal to 1.2 times the length of the connected to an independent robust part of thesuucture
relevant segment in between the lateral restraints. capable of transferring- the restraint force. Two or more
parallel member requiring such lateral restraint shall
Restraint against torsional rotation at supports in these
not be simply connected together assuming mutual
beams may be provided by:
dependence for the lateral restraint.
a) web or flange cleats, or The intermediate lateral restraints should be connected
b) bearing stiffeners acting in conjunction with to the member as close to the compression flange as
the bearing of the beam, or practicable. Such restraints should be closer to the
C) lateral end frames o r external supports shear centre of the compression flange than to the shear
providing lateral restraint to the compression centre of the section. However, if torsional restraint
flanges at the ends, or preventing relative rotation between the two flanges is
d) their being built into walls. provided, the intermediate lateral restraint may be
connected at any appropriate level.
8.3.2 For beams, which are provided with members
giving effective lateral restraint to the compression For beams which are provided with members giving
flange at intervals along the span, in addition to the effective lateral restraint at intervals along the span,
end torsional restraint required in 8.3.1, the effective the effective lateral restraint shall be capable of resisting
length for lateral torsional buckling shall be taken as a force of 2.5 percent of the maximum force in the
the distance, centre-to-centre of the restraint members compression flange taken as divided equally between
in the relevant segment under normal loading condition the points at which the restraint members are provided.
and 1.2 times this distance, where the load is not acting Further, each restraint point should be capable of
on the beam at the shear and is acting towards the shear resisting 1 percent of the maximum force in the
centre so as to have destabilizing effect during.lateral compression flange.
torsional buckling deformation.
8.3.4.1 In a series of such beams, with solid webs,
8.3.3 For cantilever beams of projecting length L, the which are connected together by the same system of
effective length LTto be used in 8.2.2.1 shall be taken restraint members, the sum of the restraining forces
as in Table16 for different support conditions. required shall be taken as 2.5 percent of the maximum
flange force in one beam only.
8.3.4 Where a member is provided intermediate lateral
supports to improve the lateral buckling strength, these 8.3.4.2 In the case of a series of latticed beams, girders
restraints should have sufficient strength and stiffness orroof trusses which are connected together by the same
to prevent lateral movement of the compression flange system of restraint members, the sum of the restraining

Table 15 Effective Length for Simply Supported Beams, L ,

(Clause 8.3.1)
-

SI
NO. /-
Conditions of Restraint a t Supports

Torsional Restraint
-.
Warping Restraint
&
Normal
Loading Condition

Desmbiiiring

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

i) Fully restrained Both flanges fully restmined 0.70 L 0.85 L
li) Fully restrained Compression flange fully restrained 0.75 L 0.90 L
iii) Fully restrained Both flanges fully restrained 0.80 L 0.95 L
iv) Fully restrained Compression flange partially restrained 0.85 L 1.00 L
V) Fully restrained Warping not restrained in both flanges 1.OOL 1.20 L
vi) Panially restrained by bottom flange Warping not restrained in both flanges I.OL+ZD I.ZL+ZD
support connection
vii) Partially restrained by bottom flange Warping not restrained in both flanges 1.2L+2D 1.4L+2D
bearing support
NOTES
1 Torsional r c s l r i n l prr.~:nts ro~lliotl300LI iI12 unf lddinal mi(.
2 W3rp:ng rc*trsfnt pretcnts roution of the tldngc in i i i plmc
3 D 1s the oscrdl Jcptn uf the besln.
forces required shall be taken as 2.5 percent of the Minor Axis Bending:
maximum force in the compression flange plus 1.25 - 26 t,
Hot-Rolled or Welded
percent of this force fbrevery member of the series other
than the first, up to a maximum total of 7.5 percent. Rectangular hollow sectiorls of uniform thickness:
8.3.5 Purlins adequately restrained by sheeting need Loaded parallel to depth (h) - A h 1 (b t h)
not be normally checked for the restraining forces Loaded parallel to width (b) - A b 1 (b + h)
required by rafters, roof trusses or portal frames that
carry predominately roof loads provided there is
Circular hollow tubes of uniform thickness 2 A I i~ -
bracing of adequate stiffness in the plane of rafters or Plates and solid bars -A
roof sheeting which is capable of acting as a stressed where
skin diaphragm.
A = cross-section area,
8.3.6 In case of beams with double curvature bending,
b = overall breadth of tubular section, breadth
adequate direct lateral support to the compression
of I-section flanges,
flange in the hogging moment region may be provided
as given above for simply supported beam. The effect d = clear depth of the web between flanges,
of support to the tension (top) flange in the hogging h = overall depth of the section,
moment region on lateral restraint to the compression = thickness of the flange, and
t,
flange may be considered as per specialist literature.
t, = thickness of the web.
8.4 Shear NOTE - Fastener holes need not be accounted for in plastic
design shear strength calculation provided thar:
The factored design shear force, V, in a beam due to
external actions shall satisfy A,. 2 lh)(Ym, k o ) AJ0.9
If Avadoesnot satisfy the above condition, the effective shear
v < v, area may be taken as that satisfying the above limit. Block
shear failure criteria may be verified at the end connections.
where Section 9 may be referred to far design strength under combined
Vd = design strength high shear and bending.

= V" I Y,, 8.4.2 Resistance to Shear Buckling

where 8.4.2.1 Resistance to shear buckling shall be verified
,,y = partial safety factor against shear failure as specified, when
(see 5.4.1).
The nominal shear strength of a cross-section, V,, may > 67E for a web without stiffeners, and
be governed by plastic shear resistance (see 8.4.1) or
strength of the web as governed by shear buckling
(see 8.4.2). > 6 7 E F for a web with stiffeners
5.35
8.4.1 The nominal plastic shear resistance under pure where
shear is given by:
K, = shear buckling coefficient (see 8.4.2.2), and
V" = v,
where
8.4.2.2 Shear brrckling design methods
The nominal shear strength, V,, of webs with or without
intermediate stiffeners as governed by buckling may
be evaluated using one of the following methods:
A, = shear area, and
f,, = yield strength of the web.
a) Simple post-critical method - The simple
post critical method, based on the shear
8.4.1.1 The shear area may be calculated as given below: buckling strength can be used for webs of I-
section girders, with or without intermediate
I and channel sections: transverse stiffener,provided that the web has
Major Axis Bending: transverse stiffeners at the supports. The
nominal shear strength is given by:
Hot-Rolled - ht,
Welded - dt, V" = v m
 where where
V,, = shear force corresponding to web T = buckling strength, as obtained from
buckling 8.4.2.2(a)
= A,T~ f, = yield strength of the tension field
where obtained from

-c, = shear stress corresponding to web

buckling, determined as follows:
I) when h, < 0.8 yr = 1.5 T, sin 2@
.r, =&,I& 0 = inclination of the tension field
2) when 0.8 < h, < 1.2

w,,= the width of the tension field, given

by:
3) when h, 2 1.2 T, = fy,l (61:) = d cos@+ (c - s,- SJ sin 0
where f,, = yield stress of the web
AW = non-dimensional web slenderness d = depth of the web
ratio for shear buckling stress, c = spacing of stiffeners in the web
given by:
T~ = shear stress corresponding to
buckling of web 8.4.2.2(a)
s,, s, = anchorage lengths of tension field
along the compression and tension
t,,, = the elastic critical shear stress of the
flange respectively, obtained from:
K , z2E
web =
12(1-p2)[~,]1
where
p = Poisson's ratio, and where
K, = 5.35 when transverse stiffeners are M, = reduced plastic moment capacity of
provided only at supports t h e respective flange plate
= 4.0 + 5.35 I(c1d)' for cld < 1.0 (disregarding any edge stiffener)
= 5.35 + 4.0 /(cld)? for cld 2 1.0 after accounting for the axial force,
where c, d are the spacing of N, in the flange, due to overall
transverse stiffeners and depth of bending and any external axial
the web, respectively. force in the cross-section, and is
calculated as:
b) Tension field nzethod - The tension field
method, based on the post-shear buckling
strength, may be used for webs with
4,= 0.25 br f,'f,, [I - {N,/(b,I, f,,/y,,)}']
intermediate transverse stiffeners, in addition
where
to the transverse stiffeners at supports, provided
the panels adjacent to the panel under tension b,, t, = width and thickness of the relevant
field action, or the end posts provide anchorage flange respectively
for the tension fields and if cfd 2 1.0, where c, f,, = yield stress of the flange
d are the spacing of transverse stiffeners and
depth of the web, respectively. 8.5 Stiffened Web Panels
In the tension field method, the nominal shear
resistance, V,,, is given by: 8.5.1 End Panels Design (see Fig. 12)
vn = v ~ f The design of end panels in girders in which the interior
where panel (panel A) is designed using tension field action
shall be carried in accordance with the provisions given
V,, = [ ~ ~ ~ + 0 .t w9 f~v s, i n, $ ] _ < ~ , herein. In this case the end panel should be designed
60
Table 16 Effective Length, L, for Cantilever of Length, L
(Clause 8.3.3)

ii) Lateral restraint to top

iii) Torsional restraint

iv) Lateral and torsional

ii) Lateral restraint to top

using only simple post critical method, according 8.5.3 Anchor Forces
to 8.4.2.2(a).
The resultant longitudinal shear, R,, and amoment M,,
Additionally, the end panel along with the stiffeners from the anchor of tension field forces are evaluated
should be checked as a beam spanning between the as given below:
flanges to resist a shear force, R,, and a moment, M,,
due to tension field forces as given in 8.5.3. Further, H, Hq d
end stiffener should be capable of resisting the reaction R,, = - and M,, = -
2 10
plus a compressive force due to the moment, equal to where
M,, (see Fig. 12).
8.5.2 End Panels Designed Using Tension FieldAction
(see Fig. 13 and Fig. 14)
The design of end panels in girders, which are designed
using tension field action shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions mentioned herein. In
this case, the end panel (Panel B) shall be designed d = web depth
according to 8.4.2.2(b). If the actual factored shear force, V in the panel
Additionally it should be provided with an end post designed using tension field approach is less than the
consisting of a single or double stiffener (see Fig. 13 shear strength, V,,as given in 8.4.2.2(b), then the values
and Fig. 14). satisfying the following:
of H, may be reduced by the ratio
"-Y ,
-
a) Single stitfner (see Fig. 13) - The top of v;,- Y ,
the end post should be rigidly connected to where
the flange using full strength welds.
V,, = the basic shear strength for the panel
The end post should be capable of resisting
utilizing tension field action as given in
the reaction plus a moment from the anchor
8.4.2.2(b), and
forces equal to 213 M,,due to tension field
forces, where M,, is obtained from 8.5.3.The V,, = critical shear strength for the panel designed
width and thickness of the end post are not utilizing tension field action as given
to exceed the width and thickness of the in 8.4.2.2(a).
flange.
8.5.4 Panels with Openings -Panels with opening of
b) Double stfle"er(see Fig. 14) -The end Post dimension greater than 10 percent of the minimum
should becheckedasabeamspanning between panel dimension should be designed without using
theflanges ofthe girder andcapableofresisting tension field action as given in 8.4.2.2(b).
. . The adjacent
a force R,f and a Mrrdue lhe panels should be designed as an end panel as &en in
tension field forces as given in 8.5.3. 8.5.1 or 8.5.2, as appropriate.

BEARING
STIFFENER -

m
- PANEL B
1
1 11 PANELA <.

NOTES
1 Panel A is designed utilizing tension field action as given in 8.4.2.Z(b).
Z Panel B is designed without utilizing tension field action as given in 8.4.2.2(a).
3 Bearing stiffener is designed for the compressive force due lo bearing plus compressive force due to the moment M,, as
given in 8.5.3.
 BEARING
STIFFENER AND
ENDPOST PANEL A 1 1: PANELA

I
<-

NOTES
1 panel A is designed u t i ~ i z i htension
~ field action as given in 8.4.2.2(h).
2 Panel B is designed utilizing lension field action as given in 8.4.2.2(h).
3 Bearine- stiffener and post is designzd for combination of compressive loads due to bearing and a moment equal to 213 rM,, us
given in 8.5.3.
Re. 13 ENDPANEL
DESIGNED
USING
TENSION
FIELDACTION
(SINGLE
STIFFENER)

1 11
C
END POST
II
L -
BEARING
STIFFENER
1-
PANEL A PANELA

NOTES
1 Panel A is designed utilizing tension field action as given in 8.4.2.?(b).
2 Bearing stiffener is designed far compressive force due to bearing us given in 8.4.2.2(a).
3 End post is designed for horizontal shear R,,and moment M,, as given i n 8.5.3.

FIG.14 ENDPANEL
DESIGNED
USING
TENSION
FIELD
ACTION
(DOUBLE
STIFFENER)

8.6 Design of Beams and Plate Girders with Solid longitudinal edges),
Webs 1) w h e n 3 d 2 c S d
8.6.1 Minimrrm Web Thickness d
-<200 E
The thickness of the web in a section shall satisfy the 1,

following requirements: 2) when 0.74 d s c < d

C
8.6.1.1 Serviceability reqrriremenl - < 200E,
f,
a) When transverse stiffeners are not provided, 3) w h e n c < d
d
- < 2 0 0 ~(web connected to flanges along d
- 52 7 0 ~ ~
f, f,

both longitudinal edges) 4) when c > 3d, the web shall he considered
d as unstiffened,
-<90E (web connected to flanges along C) When transverse stiffeners and longitudinal
f,
stiffeners at one level only are provided
one longitudinal edge only), (0.2 d from colnpression flange) according
b) When only transverse stiffeners are provided to 8.7.13 (a)
(in webs connected to flanges along both
 1) when 2.4d 2 c 2 d f,,, = yield stress of compression
flange.

8.6.2 Secrionnl Properties

2) when 0.74 d s c s d
8.6.2.1 The effective sectional area of compression
flanges shall be the gross area with deductions for
excessive width of plates as specified for compression
members (see Section 7) and for open holes occurring
3) when c < 0.74 d
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of stress at
the section being considered (see 8.2.1.4).
The effective sectional area of tension flanges shall be
d) When a second longitudinal stiffener (located the gross sectional area with deductions for holes as
at neutral axis is provided) specified in 8.2.1.4.
The effective sectional area for parts in shear shall be
taken as specified in 8.4.1.1.

rl = depth of the web, 8.6.3.1 In riveted or bolted construction, flange angles

shall form as large a part of the area of the flange as
t, = lhickness or the web,
practici~hle(preferably not less than one-third) and the
c = spacing of transverse stiffener number of flange plates shall he kept to a minimum.
(see Fig. 12 and Fig. 13),
In exposed situations, where flange angles are used, at
E,

and
=
Ei".
yield stress ratio of web = - least one plate of the top flange shall extend over the
full length of the girder, unless the top edge of the web
is machined flush with the flange angles. Where two
f;, = yield stress of the web or more flange plates are used, tacking rivets shall be
provided, if necessary to comply with the requirements
8.6.1.2 Compressionflange brickling requiremenf of Section 10.

In order to avoid buckling of the compression flange into Each flange plate shall extend beyond its theoretical
the web, the web thickness shall satisfy the following: cut-off point, and the extension shall contain sufficient
rivets, bolts or welds to develop in the plate, the load
a) When transverse stiffeners are not provided calculated for the bending moment on the girder section
(taken to include the curtailed plate) at the theoretical
cut-off point.

b) When transverse stiffeners are provided and The outstand of flange plates, that is the projection
beyond the outer line of connections to flange angles,
1) when c 2 1.5 d channel or joist flanges o r in the case of welded
constructions their projection beyond the face of the
web or tongue plate, shall not exceed the values given
in 3.7.2 (see Table 2).
2) when c < l.5d
In the case of box girders, the thickness of any plate,
or the aggregate thickness of two or more plates, when
these plates are tacked together to form the flange, shall
where satisfy the requirements given in 3.7.2 (see Table 2).

d = depth of the web, 8.6.3.2 Fiange splices

r, = thickness of the web, Flange splices should preferably, not be located at

c = spacing of transverse stiffener points of maximum stress. Where splice plates are
(see Fig. 12 and Fig. 13), used, their area shall be not less than 5 percent in excess
of the area of the flange element spliced; their centre
E~ = yieldstress ratio of web= of gravity shall coincide, as nearly as possible, with
that of the element spliced. There shall be enough bolts,
and rivets or welds on each side of the splice to develop

64
the load in the element spliced plus 5 percent but in no augment the strength of the web, they shall be placed
case should the strength developed be less than 50 oneach side of the web and shall beequal in thickness.
percent of the effective strength of the material spliced. The pnportion of shear force assumed to be resisted
In welded construction, flange plates shall be joined by these plates shall he limited by the amount of
by complete penetration butt welds, wherever possible. horizontal shear which they can transmit to the flanges
These butt welds shall develop the full strength of the through their fastenings, and such reinforcing plates
plates. and their fastenings shall be carried up to the points
at which the flange without the additional plates is
8.6.3.3 Connection offlanges to web
adequate.
The flanges of plate girders shall be connected to the
web by sufficient rivets, bolts or welds to transmit the 8.7 Stiffener Design
maximum horizontal shear force resulting from the 8.7.1 General
bending moment gradient in the girder, combined with
any vertical loads which are directly applied to the 8.7.1.1 When the web of a member acting alone (that
flange. If the web is designed using tension field is without stiffeners) proves inadequate, stiffeners for
method as given in 8.4.2.2 (b), the weld should be able meeting the following requirements should be
to transfer the tension field stress, f,, acting on the provided:
web. a) Intermediate trafuver.se web stiffener- To
"a

8.6.3.4 Bolted/Riveted construcfion improve the buckling strength of a slender

web due to shear (see 8.7.2).
For girders in exposed situations and which do not have
b) Load carrying strffener - To prevent local
flange plates for their entire length, the top edge of the buckling of t h e web d u e to
web plate shall he flush with or above the angles, and concentrated loading (see 8.7.3 and 8.7.5).
the bottom edge of the web plate shall be flush with or
set back from the angles. c) Bearing stiffener-To prevent local crushing
of the web d u e to concentrated loading -
8.6.3.5 Welded construction (see 8.7.4 and 8.7.6).
The gap between the web plates and flange plates shall d) Torsion stiffener - To provide torsional
be kept to a minimum and for fillet welds shall not restraint to beams and girders at supports
exceed 1 m m at any point before welding. (see 8.7.9).
e) Diagonal stiffener - To provide local
8.6.4 Webs reinforcement to a web under shear and
8.6.4.1 Effective sectional area of web ofplate girder bearing (see 8.7.7).
The effective cross-sectional area shall be taken as the f) Tension stiffener - To transmit tensile forces
applied to a web through aflange (see 8.7.8).
full depth of the web plate milltiplied by the thickness.
NOTE - Where webs are varied in thickness in the depth of The same stiffeners may perform more than one
the section by the use of tonguc plates or the like, or where the function and their design should comply with the
proponion of the web included in the flange area i s 25 percerrt requirements of all the functions for which designed.
or more of the overall deprh, the above approximation is not
permissible and the maximum shear stress shall be computed 8.7.1.2 Ontstand of web stiffeners
on theory.
Unless the outer edge is continuously stiffened, the
8.6.4.2 Splices in webs outstand from the face of the web should not exceed
Splices and cutouts for service ducts in the webs should 20t,&.
preferably not he located at points of maximum shear When the outstand of web is between 14tq&and20t,~,
force and heavy concentrated loads. then the stiffener design should be on the basis of a
Splices i n the webs of the plate girders and rolled core section with an outstand of 14tq&,where I,is the
sections shall be designed to resist the shears and thickness of the stiffener.
moments at the spliced section (see Annex F). 8.7.1.3 Strxbearing length
In riveted or bolted construction, splice plates shall be The stiff bearing length of any element b,,is that length
provided o n each side of the web. I n welded which cannot deform appreciably in bending. To
construction, web splices shall preferably be made with determine b,,the dispersion of load through a steel bearing
complete penetration butt welds. element should be taken as 4 5 O through solid material,
8.6.4.3 Where additional plates are required to such as bearing plates, flangeplates, etc (see Fig. 15).
IS 800 :2007

8.7.1.4 Eccentricity where

Where a load or reaction is applied eccentric to the L= length of the stiffener.
centreline of the web or where the centroid of the
stiffener does not lie on the centreline of the web, the If the load or reaction is applied to the flange by a
resulting eccentricity of loading should be accounted compression member, then unless effective lateral
for in the design of the stiffener. restraint is provided at that point, the stiffener should
be designed as part of the compression member
8.7.1.5 Buckling resistance of stiffeners
applying the load, and the connection between the
The buckling resistance Fqd should he based on the columnand beamflangeshall becheckedfortbeeffects
design compressive stress f,,(see 7.1.2.1) of a strut of the strut action.
(curve c ) , the radius of gyration being taken about the
8.7.2 Design of Intermediate Transverse Web Stiffeners
axis parallel to the web. The effective section is the
full area or core area of the stiffener (see 8.7.1.2) 8.7.2.1 General
together with an effective length of web on each side
Intermediate transverse stiffeners may be provided on
of the centreline of the stiffeners, limited to 20 times
one or both sides of the web.
the web thickness. The design strength used should be
the minimum value obtained for buckling about the 8.7.2.2 Spacing
web or the stiffener.
Spacing of intermediate stiffeners, where provided,
The effective length for intermediate transverse shall comply with 8.6.1 depending on the thickness of
stiffeners used in calculating the buckling resistance, the web.
Fqd,should be taken as 0.7 times the length, L of the
8,7.2.3 Outstandofstiffeners
stiffener.
The outstand of the stiffeners should comply
The effective length for load carrying web stiffeners
with 8.7.1.2.
used in calculating the buckling resistance, F,,,
assumes that the flange through which the load or 8.7.2.4 Minimumstiffeners
reaction is applied is effectively restrained against
Transverse web stiffeners not subject to external loads
lateral movement relative to the other flange, and
or moments should have a second moment of area, I,
should be taken as:
about the centreline of the web, if stiffeners are on both
a) KL = 0.7Lwhen flange is re
rotation in the plane of the sti
structural elements).
b) KL = L, when flange is not so restrained:
if%>&, 1, 2 0.75dti , and

FIG.15 STIFF LENGTH.

BEARING b,

66
 8.7.2.6 Connection of intermediate stiffeners to web
Intermediate transverse stiffeners not subject to
external loading should be connected to the web so as
where to withstand a shear between each component of the
stiffener and the web (in kN/mm) of not less than:
d = depth of the web;
tw = minimum required web thickness for
spacing using tension field action, as given
in 8.4.2.1; and where
c = actual stiffener spacing. t, = web thickness, in mm; and
8.7.2.5 Buckling check on intermediate transverse web b, = outstand width of the stiffener, in mm.
stiffeners For stiffeners subject to external loading, the shear
Stiffeners not subjected to external loads or moments between the web and the stiffener due to such loading
should be checked for a stiffener force: has to be added to the above value.
Stiffeners not subject to external loads or moments may
terminate clear of the tension flange and in such a
where situation the distancecut short from the line of the weld
should not be more than 4t,.
Fqd = design resistance of the intermediate
stiffeners, 8.7.3 Load Carrying Stiffeners
V = factored shear force adjacent to the stiffener, 8.7.3.1 Web check
and
Load canying web stiffeners should be provided where
Vc, = shear buckling resistance of the web panel compressive forces applied through a flange by loads
designed without using tension field action
as given in 8.4.2.2(a).
.
or reactions exceed the buckling strength, F,,, of the
unstiffened web, calculated using the following:
Stiffeners subject toextemal loads andmoments should '
The effective length of the web for evaluating the
meet the conditions for load carrying web stiffeners
slenderness ratio is calculated as in 8.7.1.5. The area
in 8.7.3. In addition they should satisfy the following
of cross-section is taken as ( b , + n,) t,:
interaction expression:
where
b , = width of stiff bearing on the flange
(see 8.7.1.3), and

If F, < F, ,then (F,- F,) should be taken as zero; n, = dispersion of the load through the web at
45", to thelevel of half the depth of the cross-
where section.
F, = stiffener force given above; The buckling strength of this web about axis parallel
to the web is calculated as given in 7.1.2.1, using
Fqd = design resistance of an intermediate web
curve 'c'.
stiffener corresponding to buckling about an
axis parallel to the web (see 8.7.1.5); 8.7.4 Bearing Stiffeners
F, = external load or reaction at the stiffener; Bearing stiffeners should be provided for webs where
F,, = design resistance of a load carrying forces applied through a flange by loads or reactions
stiffener corresponding to buckling about exceeding the local capacity of the web at its connection
axis parallel to the web (see 8.7.1.5); to the flange, F,, given by:
M, = moment on the stiffener due to
eccentrically applied load and transverse
load, if any; and
where
M, = yield moment capacity of the stiffener
based on its elastic modulus about its b, = stiff bearing length (see 8.7.1.3),
centroidal axis parallel to the web. n, = length obtained by dispersion through the
 IS 800 : 2007

flange to the web junction at a slope of 1 : 2.5 8.7.9 Torsional StifSeners

to the plane ofthe flange,
Where bearing stiffeners are required to provide
t, = thickness of the web, and torsional restraint at the supports of the beam, they
f,, = yield stress of the web. should meet the following criteria:
8.7.5 D e s i p of Load Carrying Stiffeners a) Conditions of 8.7.4. and
b) Second moment of area of the stiffener section
8.7.5.1 B~lcklingcheck
about the centreline of the web, Is should be
The external load or reaction, F, on a stiffener should such that:
not exceed the buckling resistance, F,, of the stiffener
I, 2 0.34a, D'q,
as given in 8.7.1.5.
Where the stiffener also acts as anintermediate stiffener where
it should be checked for the effect of combined loads = 0.006 for L, lry 50,
in accordance with 8.7.2.5.
= 0 . 3 / ( k Tlr,,) for 50 < k Tlr, = 100,
8.7.5.2 Bearing check = 30/( L, lry )2 for L, Iry z 100,
Load canying web stiffeners should also be of sufficient D = overall depth of beam at support.
size that the bearing strength of the stiffener, F,,,,given T,, = maximum thickness of
below is not less than the load transferred, F, compression flange in the span
under consideration,
Fpsd = Ayfyq/( 0 . 8 ~ ~2 06) KL = laterally unsupported effective
where length of the compression flange
F, = external load or reaction, of the beam, and
= area of the stiffener in contact with the ry = radius of gyration of the beam
A,
flange, and about the minor axis.
8.7.10 Connection to Web of Load Carrying and
fy, = yield stress of the stiffener. Bearing Stiffeners
8.7.6 Design ofsearing Stiffeners
Stiffeners, which resist loads or reactions applied
Bearing stiffeners should be designed for the applied through a flange, should be connected to the web by
load or reaction less the local capacity of the web as sufficient welds or fasteners to transmit a design force
given in 8.7.4. Where the web and the stiffener material equal to the lesser of:
are of different strengths the lesser value should be
a) tension capacity of the stiffener; and
assumed to calculate the capacity of the web and the
stiffener. Bearing stiffeners should project nearly as b) sum of the forces applied at the two ends of
much as the overhang of the flange through which load the stiffener when they act in the same
is transferred. direction or the larger of the forces when they
act in opposite directions.
8.7.7 Design of Diagonal Stipeners
Stiffeners, which do not extend right across the web,
Diagonal stiffeners should be designed to carry the
should be of such length that the shear stress in the
portion of the applied shear and bearing that exceeds
web due to the design force transmitted by the stiffener
the capacity of the web.
-
does not exceed the shear strength of the web. In
Where the web and the stiffener are of different addition, the capacity of the web beyond the end of
strengths, thevalue for design should be taken as given the stiffener should be sufficient to resist the applied
in 8.7.6. force.
8.7.8 Design ofTension Stiffeners 8.7.11 Connection to Flanges
-
Tension stiffeners should be desiened to carrv the
portion of the applied load or reaction less the capacity
8.7.11.1 In tension
stiffeners required to resist tension should be connected
of the web as given in 8.7.4 for bearing stiffeners.
to the flange transmitting the load by continuous welds
Where the web and the stiffener are of different or non-slipfasteners.
strengths, the value for design should be taken as given
8.7.11.2 in
in 8.7.6.
Stiffeners required to resist compression should
either be fitted against the loaded flange or 8.8.2 Where the concentrated or moving load does not
connected by continuous welds or non-slip fasteners. act directly on top of the web, the local effect shall be
considered in thedesign of flanges and the diaphragms.
The stiffener should be fitted against or connected to
both flanges when: 8.9 Purlins and Sheeting Rails (Girts)
a) a load is applied directly over a support, or All purlins shall be designed in accordance with the
b) it forms the end stiffener of a stiffened web, requirements for uncased beams as specified in 8.2.1
or and 8.2.2, and the limitations of bending stress based
C) it acts as a torsion stiffener. on lateral instability of the compression flange and the
limiting deflection specified under 5.6.1 for the design
8:7.12 Hollow Sections of purlins. The maximum bending moment shall not
Where concentrated loads are applied to hollow exceed the values specified in 8.2.1. The calculated
sections consideration should be given to local stresses deflections should not exceed those permitted for the
and deformations and the section reinforced as type of roof cladding used as specified in 5.6.1. In
necessary. calculating the bending moment, advantage may be
taken of the continuity of the purlin over supports. The
8.7.13 Horizontal St~peners bending about the two axes should he determined
Where horizontal stiffeners are used in addition to separately and checked according to the biaxial
vertical stiffeners, they shall be as follows: bending requirements specified in Section 9.
a) One horizontal stiffener shall be placed on the 8.10 Bending in a Non-principal Plane
web at a distance from the compression flange
equal to 115 of the distance from the 8.10.1 When the flexural deflection of a member is
compression flange angle, plate or tongue constrained to a non-principal plane by lateral restraints
plate to the neutral axis when the thickness preventing lateral deflection, then the force exerted by
of the web is less than the limits specified the restraints shall be determined, and the principal
in 8.6.1. The stiffener shall be designed so axes bending moments acting on the member shall be
where I, and t, are
that I, is not less than 4ctW3 calculated from these forces and applied forces, by a
as defined in 8.7.2.4 and c is the actual rational analysis. The combined effect of bending
distance between the vertical stiffeners about the principal axes shall satisfy the requirements
of Section 9.
b) A second horizontal stiffener (single or
double) shall be placed at the neutral axis of 8.10.2 When the deflections of a member loaded in a
the girder when the thickness of the web is non-principal plane are unconstrained; the principal
less than the limit specified in 8.6.1. This axes bending moments shall he calculated by arational
stiffener shall be designed so that I, is not less analysis. The combined effect of bending about the
than d,t,%here I, and t, are as defined principal axes shall satisfy the requirements of
in 8.7.2.4 and d, is twice the clear distance Section 9.
from the compression flange angles, plates or
tongue plates to the neutral axis; SECTION 9
c) Horizontal web stiffeners shall extend MEMBER SUBJECTEDTO COMBINED
between vertical stiffeners, but need not be FORCES
continuous over them; and
d) Horizontal stiffeners may be in pairs arranged
9.1 General
on each side of the web, or single located on This section governs the design of members subjected
one side of the web. to combined forces, such as shear force and bending,
8.8 Box Girders axial force and bending, or shear force, axial force and
bending.
The design and detailing of box girders shall be such
as to give full advantage of its higher load carrying 9.2 Combined Shear and Bending
capacity. Box girder shall be designed in accordance
9.2.1 No reduction in moment capacity of the section is
with specialist literature. The diaphragms and
necessary as long as the cross-section is not subjected
horizontal stiffeners should conform to 8.7.12
to high shear force (factored value of applied shear force
and 8.7.13.
is less than or equal to 60 percent of the shear strength
8.8.1 All diaphragms shall be connected such as to of the section as given in 8.4). The moment capacity
transfer the resultant shears to the web and flanges. may be taken as, M,(see 8.2) without any reduction.
 9.2.2 When the factored value of the applied shear force where
is high (exceeds the limit specified in 9.2.1), the
My,M, = factored applied moments about the
factored moment of the section should be less than the
minor and major axis of thecross-section,
moment capacity of the section under higher shear
respectively;
force, M,,, calculated as given below:
Mod?,M,,, = design reduced flexural strength under
a) Plastic or Compact Section combined axial force and the respective
uniaxial moment acting alone (see
9.3.1.2);
where N = factored applied axial force (Tension, T
or Compression, P);
N, = design strength in tension, Tdasobtained
Md = plastic design moment of the from 6 or in compression due to yielding
whole section disregarding high given by N, =A, f, lymo;
shear force effect (see 8.2.1.2)
M,,, M,, = design strength under corresponding
considering web buckling effects
(see 8.2.1.1), moment acting alone (see 8.2);
V = factored applied shear force as A, = gross area of the cross-section;
governed by web yielding or web a,, a, = constants as given in Table 17; and
buckling, y, = partial factor of safety in yielding.
Vd = design shear strength as govemed 9.3.1.2 For plastic and compact sections without bolts
by web yielding or web buckling holes, the following approximations may be used for
(see 8.4.1 or 8.4.2), evaluating M,,, and M,,,:
M, = plastic design strength of the area a) Plates
of the cross-sectionexcluding the
Mnd= Md(I - n2)
shear area, considering partial
safety factor,,y, and h) Welded I or H sections
2, = elastic section modulus of the
whole section.
b) Semi-compact Section
M y=M y 1-[=I] 5 Mdywhere n? a

M,,, = M,, (I - n)/(l - 0 . 5 ~<) M,,

where
9.3 Combined Axial Force and Bending Moment
Under combined axial force and bending moment, section
strength as governed by material failure and member C) For standard I or H sections
strength as govemed by buckling failure shall be checked for n 5 0.2 M,,, = M,,
in accordance with 9.3.1 and 9.3.2 respectively. for n > 0.2 Mndy= 1.56 Mdy(1 - n) (n + 0.6)
9.3.1 Section S~rength M,,,= l.llMd,(l-n)<M,,
9.3.1.1 Plastic and compact sections d) For rectangular hollow sections and welded
box sections
In the design of members subjected to combined axial
force (tension or compression) and bending moment, When the section is symmetric about both
the following should be satisfied: axes and without bolt holes
M,,, = M,, (1 - n ) / ( l -0.5a,)S M,,
Mn,,=Md,(l-n)/(l-0.5a,)<Mdz
where
a, = ( A - 2 b t f ) / A 5 0 . 5
Conservatively, the following equation may also be
used under combined axial force and bending moment:
-
a, = (A 2 h t,) /A 5 0.5
e) Circular hollow tiibes withorit bolt holes
Mnd= 1.04 Md (1- nl-') S Md
 .3.1.3 Semi-compact section with respect to extreme compression
fibre; and
n the absence of high shear force (see 9.2.1), semi-
section design is satisfactory under combined +I! = 0.8, if T and M can vary independently,
axial force and bending, if the maximum longitudinal or otherwise
stress under combined axial force and bending, f, = 1.0.
satisfies the following criteria: 9.3.2.2 Bending and axial compression
f,~f,rv,o Members subjected to combined axial compression and
For cross-section without holes, the above criteria biaxial bending shall satisfy the following interaction
relationships:

where
N,,M,,, Md, are as defined in 9.3.1.1.
where
Table 17 Constants a,and a,
C,, C,, = equivalent uniform moment factor as per
(Clause 9.3.1.1) Table 18;
P = applied axial compression under factored
No. load;
(1) (2) My,Mz= maximum factored applied bending
l and channel
i) Sn2 1 2 moments about y and z-axis of the
ii)
Circular tubes 2 2 member, respectively;
iii)
Rectangular 1.661 1.661
tubes (l-l.13n1)< 6 (l-l.l3n')s6 ' Pdy,Pd,= design strength under axial compression
iv) Solid rectangles 1.73+1.8d 1.73+1.8 n' as governed by buckling about minor (y)
NOTE - n = N/&. and major (2) axis respectively;
M,,, M,, = design bending strength about y (minor)
9.3.2 Overall Member Strength or z (major) axis considering laterally
Members subjected to combined axial force and unsupported length of the cross-section
(see Section 8);
bending moment shall be checked for overall buckling
failure as given in this section. K, = 1+ (4- 0.2)nys 1 + 0.8 n,;
9.3.2.1 Bending and axial tension
K, = 1 + (Az- 0.2)nZ( I+ 0.8 n,; and

The reduced effective moment, M e , under tension and

bending calculated as given below, should not exceed
the bending strength due to lateral torsional buckling,
Md (see 8.2.2). where
n , n, = ratio of actual applied axial force to the
design axial strength for buckling about
they and z axis, respectively, and
where
C,, = equivalent uniform moment factor for
M, T = factored applied moment and tension, lateral torsional buckling as perTable 18
respectively; corresponding to the actual moment
A = area of cross-section; gradient between lateral supports against
Z, = elastic section modulus of the section torsional deformation in the critical
region under consideration.
P'O F w 8'W (A-I)z.o P Oz"~~w(~-I)I.o OT~TI-
05't',1-
VO < 'U 8'0 - bO?'D8'0-1'0 I?~,o 1
-
P'O ? s~ KO+ z o P'O ? *U 8'0 + 2.0 I>~,I- 1 3 ~ 0
 SECTION 10 tightened to develop necessary pretension after
CONNECTIONS welding.
10.1.6 The partial safety factor in the evaluation of
design strength of connections shall be taken as given
10.1.1 This section deals with the design and detailing in Table 5.
requirementsforjoints between members. Connection
elements consist of components such as cleats, gusset 10.2 Location Details of Fasteners
plates, brackets, connecting plates and connectors such 10.2.1 Clearances for Holes for Fasteners
as rivets, bolts, pins, and welds. The connections in a
structure shall be designed so as to be consistent with Bolts may be located in standard size, over size, short
the assumptions made in the analysis of the structure slotted or long slotted hole.
and comply. . with the requirements specified in this a) Standard clearance hole - Except where
section. Connections shall be capable of transmitting fitted bolts, bolts in low-clearance or oversize
the calculated design actions. holes are specified, the diameter of standard
10.1.2 Where members are connected to the surface clearance holes for fasteners shall be as given
of a web or the flange of a section, the ability of the in Table 19.
web or the flange to transfer the applied forces locally h) Over size hole-Holes of size larger than the
should be checked and where necessary, local stiffening standard clearance holes, as given in Table
provided. 19 may be used in slip resistant connections
and hold down bolted connections, only
10.1.3 Ease of fabrication and erection should be where specified, provided the over size holes
considered in the design of connections. Attention in the outer ply is covered by a cover plate of
should he paid to clearances necessary for field sufficiently large size and thickness and
erection, tolerances, tightening of fasteners, welding having a hole not larger than the standard
procedures, subsequent inspection, surface treatment clearance hole (and hardened washer in slip
and maintenance. resistant connections).
10.1.4 The. ductility of steel assists the distribution of '
C) Short and long slots - Slotted holes of size
forces generated within a joint. Effects of residual larger than the standard clearance hole, as
stresses and stresses due to tightening of fasteners and given inTahle 19 may be used in slip resistant
normal tolerances of fit-up need not therefore be connections and hold down bolted
considered in connection design, provided ductile connections, only where specified, provided
hehaviour is ensured. the over size holes in the outer ply is covered
10.1.5 In general, use of different forms of fasteners by a cover plate of sufficiently large size and
thickness and having a hole of size not larger
to transfer the same force shall be avoided. However,
than the standard clearance hole (and
when different forms of fasteners are used to cany a
hardened washer in slip resistant connection).
-
shear load or when welding and fasteners are
combined, then one form of fastener shall be normally 10.2.2 Minimum Spacing
designed to carry the total load. Nevertheless, fully
The distance between centre of fasteners shall not be
tensioned friction grip bolts may he designed to share
the load with welding, provided the bolts are fully less than 2.5 times the nominal diameter of the fastener.

Table 19 Clearances for Fastener Holes

(Clarrse 10.2.1)
SI Nominal Size of Size of the Hole =Nominal Diameter of the Fastener + Clearances
No. Fastener, d mm
mm
,--
Standard Clearance in
A

Over Size
---.
Clearance in the Length of the Slat
Diameterand Width h
Clearance in Diameter
of Slot /short Slot Long Slot -,
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) 12- 14 1.0 3.0 4.0 2.5 d
ii) 16-22 2.0 4.0 6.0 2.5 d
iii) 24 2.0 6.0 8.0 2.5 d
iv) Larger than 24 3.0 8.0 10.0 2.5 d
10.2.3 Maximum Spacing not apply to fasteners interconnecting the components
of back to back tension members. Where the members
10.2.3.1 The distance between the centres of any two are exposed to corrosive influences, themaximumedge
adjacent fasteners shall not exceed 321 or 300 mm, distance shall not exceed 40 mm plus 4t, where t is the
whichever is less, where t is the thickness of the thinner thickness of thinner connected plate.
plate.
10.2.5 Tacking Fasreners
10.2.3.2 The distance between the centres of two
adjacent fasteners (pitch) in a line lying in the direction 10.2.5.1 In case of members covered under 10.2.4.3,
of stress, shall not exceed 161 or 200 mm, whichever when the maximum distance between centres of two
is less, in tension members and 12t or 200 mm, adjacent fasteners as specified in 10.2.4.3 is exceeded,
whichever is less, in compression members; where r is tacking fasteners not subjected to calculated stress shall
the thickness o f the thinner plate. In the case of be used.
compression members wherein forces are transferred 10.2.5.2Tacking fasteners shall have spacing in a line
through butting faces, this distance shall not exceed not exceeding 32 times the thickness of the thinner
4.5 times the diameter of the fasteners for a distance outside plate or 300 mm, whichever is less. Where the
equal to 1.5 times the width of the member from the plates are exposed to the weather, the spacing in line
butting faces. shall not exceed 16 times the thickness of the thinner
10.2.3.3 The distance between the centres of any two outside plate or 200 mm, whichever is less. In both
consecutive fasteners in a line adjacent and parallel to cases, the distance between the lines of fasteners shall
an edge of an outside plate shall not exceed 100 mm not be greater than the respective pitches.
plus 4t or 200 mm, whichever is less, in compression 10.2.5.3All the requirements specified in 10.2.5.2shall
and tension members; where t is the thickness of the generally apply to compression members, subject to
thinner outside plate. the stipulations in Section 7 affecting the design and
10.2.3.4When fasteners are staggered at equal intervals construction of compression members.
and the gauge does not exceed 75 mm, the spacing 10.2.5.4 in tension members (see Section 6) composed
specified in 10.2.3.2 and 10.2.3.3 between centres of of two flats, angles, channels or tees in contact back to
fasteners may be increased by 5 0 percent, subject to back or separated back to back by a distance not
the maximum spacing specified in 10.2.3.1. exceeding the aggregate thickness of the connected parts,
10.2.4 Edge and End distance^ tacking fasteners with solid distance pieces shall be
provided at a spacing in line not exceeding 1000 mm.
10.2.4.1 The edge distance is the distance at right angles
to the direction of stress from the centre of a hole to 10.2.5.5 For compression members covered in
the adjacent edge. The end distance is the distance in Section 7, tacking fasteners in a line shall be spaced at
the direction of stress from the centre of a hole to the a distance not exceeding 600 mm.
end of the element. 10.2.6 Countersunk Heads
In slotted holes, the edge and end distances should be For countersunk heads, one-half of the depth of the
measured from the edge or end of the material to the countersinking shall be neglected in calculating the
centre of its end radius or the centre line of the slot, length of the fastener in bearing in accordance
whichever is smaller. In oversize holes, the edge and with 10.3.3. For fasteners in tension having
end distances should be taken as the distance from the countersunk heads, the tensile strength shall be reduced
relevant edgelend plus half the diameter of the standard by 33.3 percent. No reduction is required to be made
clearance hole corresponding to the fastener, less the in shear strength calculations.
nominal diameter of the oversize hole.
10.2.4.2 The minimum edge and end distances from Bearing 5 p e
the centre of any hole to the nearest edge of a plate 10.3.1 ~,, f f of~o[,s
~ ~ ~ i ~ ~
shall not be less than 1.7 times the hole diameter in
case ofsheared or hand-flame cut edges; and 1.5 times 10.3.1.1 Since threads can occur in the shear plane,
the hole diameter in case ofrolled, machine-flame cut, the area.4, for resisting shear should normally be taken
sawn and planed edges. as the net tensile stress area, A, of the bolts. For bolts
where the net tensile stress area is not defined, A. shall
10.2.4.3 The maximum edge distance to the nearest be taken as the area at the root of the threads
line of fasteners from an edge of any un-stiffened part
should not exceed 12 re, where = (250/fy)112and is 10.3.1.2Where it can be shown that the threads do not
the thickness of the thinner outer plate. This would Occur in the shear plane, A, be taken as the cross
section area, A, at the shank.
10.3.1.3 In the calculation of thread length, allowance the connected plates) exceeds 5 times the diameter, d
should be made for tolerance and thread run off. of the bolts, the design shear capacity shall be reduced
by a factor PI,, given by:
10.3.2 A boli subjected to a factored shear force (V,,)
shall satisfy the condition PI, = 8 d l(3 d+ 1,) = 8 /(3+1, /d)
VSb = Vdb PI, shall not be more than PI; given in 10.3.3.1. The
grip length, 1, shall in no case be greater than 8d.
where Vdbis the design strength of the bolt taken as the
smaller of the value as governed by shear, V,,, 10.3.3.3 Packing plates
(see 10.3.3) and bearing, V,, (see 10.3.4). The design shear capacity of bolts carrying shear
10.3.3 Shear Capacity of Bolt through a packing plate in excess of 6 mm shall be
decreased by a factor, P,, given by:
The design strength of the bolt, Vdhbas governed shear
strength is given by:
where
where t,, = thickness of the thickerpacking, in mm.
VDsb=nominal shear capacity of a bolt, 10.3.4 Bearing Capacity of the Bolt
calculated as follows: The design bearing strength of a bolt on any plate, V,,
as governed by bearing is given by:

Vd,b = V",, ' Ym,

where
where
V,,, = nominal bearing strength of a bolt
f, = ultimate tensile strength of a bolt;
n, = number of shear planes with threads
= 2.5 k, d t f,
intercepting the shear plane; where
n, = number of shear planes without threads e X,h
intercepting the shear plane; k, is smaller of 3d,'3d,-0.25, --,
f"
1.0;
A,, = nominal plain shank area of the bolt; and
A,, =net shear area of the bolt at threads, may e, p = end and pitch distances of the fastener
be taken as the area corresponding to along bearing direction;
root diameter at the thread. do = diameter of the hole;
10.3.3.1 Long joints f,, f, = ultimate tensile stress of the bolt and the
When the length of the joint, I, of a splice or end ultimate tensile stress of the plate,
connection in a compression or tension element respectively;
containing more than two bolts (that is the distance d = nominal diameter of the bolt; and
between the first and last rows of bolts in the joint, t = summation of the thicknesses of the
measured in the direction of the load transfer) exceeds connected plates experiencing bearing
15din the direction of load, the nominal shear capacity stress in the same direction, or if the bolts
(see 10.3.2), Vdbshallbe reduced by the factor PI;. given are countersunk, the thickness of the
by: plate minus one half of the depth of
p, = 1.075 - 1,/(200 4 but 0.75 < Plj < 1.0 countersinking.
The hearing resistance (in the direction normal to the
slots in slotted holes) of bolts in holes other than
where standard clearance holes may be reduced by
multiplying the bearing resistance obtained as above,
d = Nominal diameter of the fastener.
V",,, by the factors given below:
NOTE - This provision does not apply when the distribution
ofshear over the length ofjoint is uniform, as in the connection a) Over size and short slotted holes - 0.7, and
of web of a section t o the flanges.
b) Long slotted holes - 0.5.
10.3.3.2 Large grip lengths NOTE - The block shcar of the edge distance due to
When the grip length, I, (equal to the total thickness of bearing farce may be checked as given in 6.4.
10.3.5 Tension Capacity to be limited, a bolt subjected only to a factored design
shear force, V,,in the interface of connections at which
A bolt subjected to a factored tensile force, Tb shall slip cannot be tolerated, shall satisfy the following:
satisfv:

where
where
vd5f = vnsf/ymf
Tdb = Tnb/ymb
V,,, = nominal shear capacity of a bolt as
Tab = nominal tensile capacity of the bolt, governed by slip for friction type
calculated as: connection, calculated as follows:
~ ~A,, ~(Y,,/Y,,)
0 . 9 0 <fyb ~ = Pf ne K h Fo
where where
fob = ultimate tensile stress of the bolt;
p, =coefficient of friction (slip factor) as
f,, = yield stress of the bolt, specified in Table 20 (pi= 0.551,
A, = net tensile stress area as specified in the n, = number of effective interfaces offering
appropriate Indian Standard (for bolts frictional resistance to slip,
where the tensile stress area is not
K, = 1.0 for fasteners in clearance holes,
defined, A, shall be taken as the area at
the bottom of the threads), and = 0.85 for fasteners in oversized and short
slotted holes and for fasteners in long
A,, = shank area of the bolt. slotted holes loaded pelpendicular to the
10.3.6 Bolt Subjected to CombinedShenr and Tension slot,
A bolt required to resist both design shear force (V,,) = 0.7 for fasteners in long slotted holes
and design tensile force (T,) at the same time shall loaded parallel to the slot,
satisfy: ymf = 1:10 (if slip resistance is designed at
service load),
= 1.25 (if slip resistance is designed at
ultimate load),
F, = minimum bolt tension (proof load) at
where installation and may be taken as
VSb = factored shear force acting on the bolt, Anbf~s

Vdb = design shear capacity (see 10.3.2), A,, = net area of the bolt at threads, and
Tb = factored tensile force acting on the bolt, and f, = proof stress (= 0.70fub).
T = design tension capacity (see 10.3.5). NOTE - Vnrmay be evaluated nr a service load or ultimate
load using appropriate partial safety facrars, depending upon
10.4 Friction Grip Type Bolting whether slip resis~aneeis required at service load or ultimate
load.
10.4.1 In friction grip type bolting, initial pretension
in bolt (usually high strength) develops clamping force 10.4.3.1 Long joints
at the interfaces of elements being joined. The frictional The provision for the long joints in 10.3.3.1 shall apply
resistance to slip between the plate surfaces subjected to friction grip connections also.
to clamping force opposes slip due to externally applied
shear. Friction grip type bolts and nuts shall conform 10.4.4 Cnpacity after slipping
to IS 3757. Their installation procedures shall conform When friction type bolts are designed not to slip only
to IS 4000. under service loads, the design capacity at ultimate load
10.4.2 Where slip between bolted plates cannot be may be calculated as per bearing type connection
tolerated at working loads (slip critical connections), (see 10.3.2 and 10.3.3).
the requirements of 10.4.3 shall be satisfied. However, NOTE -The block shear resistance of the edge distance due
at ultimate loads, the requirements of 10.4.4 shall be to bearing force may be checked as given in 6.4.
satisfied by all connections. 10.4.5 Tension Resistance
10.4.3 Slip Resistance A friction bolt subjected to a factored tension force (Tf )
Design for friction type bolting in which slip is required shall satisfy:
 where
V,, = applied factored shear at dksign load,
Vd, = design shear strength,
= T,,/Y,r
= nominal tensile strength of the friction bolt, T, = externally applied factored tension at
calculated as: design load, and
0.9f"b A" sf,, A,,(Ym,/ Ym) Td, = design tension strength.

10.4.7 Where prying force, Q as illustrated in Fig. 16

f,,= ultimate tensile stress of the bolt; is significant, it shall be calculated as given below and
added to the tension in the bolt.
A, =net tensile stress area as specified in
various parts of IS 1367 (for bolts where
the tensile stress area is not defined, A.
shall be taken as the area at the root of
the threads);
A, = shank area of the bolt; and where
y, = partial factor of safety. I, = distanck from the bolt centreline to the toe
of the fillet weld or to half the root radius
Table 20 Typical Average Values for Coefficient for a rolled section,
of Friction (pd
I, = distance between prying force and bolt
(Clause 10.4.3) centreline and is the minimum
of either the end distance or the value given
SI Treatment of Surface Coefiicient
of Friction,
by:
No.

i) Surfaces not treated 0.20

ii) Surfaces blasted with shod orgrit with 0.50
any loose rust removed, no pitting where
iii) Surfaces blasted with shot or grit and 0.10
hot-dip galvanized
iv) Surfaces blasted with shot or grit and 0.25 p = 2 for non pre-tensioned bolt and 1 for pre-
spraymetallized with zinc (thickness tensioned bolt,
50-70 m) q = 1.5,
V) S U ~ ~ Bblasted
C ~ Ewith jhot or grit and 0.30
painted with ethylzinc silicalc coal b, = effective width of flange per pair of bolts,
(thickness 3 0 6 0 j m )
vi) Sand blasted surface, after light rusting 0.52 f, = proof stress in consistent units, and
vii) Surfaces blasted with shot or grit and 0.30 I = thickness of the end plate.
painted with ethylzinc silicate coat
(thickness 60-80 jm)
viii) Surfaces blasted with shot or grit and 0.30
painted with alcalizinc silicate coat
(thickness 60-80 jm)
ix) Surface blasted with shot or grit and 0.50
spray metallized with aluminium
(thickness > 50 @n)
X) elcan mill scale 0.33
xij Sand blasted surface 0.48
xii) Red lead painted surface 0.1

10.4.6 Combined Shear and Tension

Bolts in a connection for which slidin the serviceability
limit state shall be limited, which are subjected to a
tension force, I: and shear force. V, shall satisfy:
IS 800 :2007

10.5 Welds a n d Welding shall not be less than 3 mm and shall generally not exceed
0.71, or 1.Or under special circumstances, where t is the
10.5.1 General
thickness of the thinner plateof elements being welded.
Requirements of welds and welding shall conform to
IS 816 and IS 9595, as appropriate. Table 21 Minimum Size of First Run o r of a
Single R u n Fillet Weid
10.5.1.1 End returns
(Clause 10.5.2.3)
Fillet welds terminating at the ends or sides of parts
should be returned continuously around the comers SI Thickness of Thicker Part Minimum Size
for a distance of not less than twice the size of the
weld, unless i t is impractical to d o so. This is
No.
c
Over
mrn
A

Up to and
. mrn

particularly important on the tension end of parts Including

carrying bending loads. (1) (2) (3) (4)
- 10 3
10.5.1.2Lap joint i)
ii) I0 20 5
In the case of lap joints, the minimum lap should not iii) 2o 32 6
i) 32 50 8 of tirrt run
be less than four times the thickness of the thinner part 10 for minimum size of
joined or 40 mm, whichever is more. Single end fillet weld
should be used only when lapped parts are restrained NOTES
1 When the minimum size of the fillet weld given in the table
from 'penings' When end Of an is connected is greater than the thickness of the thinner part, the minimum
only by parallel longitudinal fillet welds, the length of size ofthe weld should be equal to the thickness ofthe thinner
the weld along either edge should not be less than the part. The thicker part shall be adequately reheated to prevent
transverse spacing between longitudinal welds. cracking of the weld.
2 Where the thicker part is more than 50 mrn thick, special
10.5.1.3 A single fillet weld should not be subjected to precautians like pre-heating shouid be taken.
moment about the longitudinal axis of the weld.
10.5.3.2 For the purpose of stress calculation in fillet
10.5.2 Size of Weld
welds joining faces inclined to each other, the effective
10.5.2.1The size of normal fillets shall be taken as the throat thickness shall be taken as Ktimes the fillet size,
minimum weld leg size. For deep penetration welds, where K is a constant, dependingupon the angle
where the depth of penetration beyond the root run is between fusion faces, as given in Table 22.
a of 2.4 mm3the size of the 'let should he 10.5.3.3 The effective throat thickness of a complete
taken as the minimum leg size plus 2.4 mm. penetration butt weld shall be taken as the thickness of
10.5.2.2 or fillet welds made by semi-automatic or the thinner Part joined, and that of an incomplete
automaticprocesses, where the depth of penetration is penetration butt weld shall be taken as the minimum
considerably in excess of 2.4 mm, the size shall be thickness of the weld metal common to the parts joined,
taken considering actual depth of penetration subject reinforcements.
to agreement between the purchaser and the contractor. 10.5.4 Effective Lengthor Area ,$weld
10.5.2.3 The size of fillet welds shall not be less than 10.5.4.1 ~h~ effective length of fillet weld shall be
3 mm. The minimum size of the first run or of a single taken as only that length which is of the specified size
run fillet weld shall be as given in Table 21, to avoid and required throat thickness. In practice the actual
the risk of cracking in the absence of preheating. length of weld is made of the effective length shown
10.5.2.4Thesize of butt weld shall be specified by the in drawing plus two times the weld size, but not less
effective throat thickness. than four times the size of the weld.
10.5.4.2The effective length of butt weld shall be taken
10.5.3 Effective Throat Thickness
as the length of the continuous full size weld, but not
10.5.3.1 The effective throat thickness of a fillet weld less than four times the size of the weld.

Table 22 Values of K for Different Angles Between Fusion Faces

(Clarue 10.5.3.2)

Angle Between Fusion Faces 60"-90" 91"-100' 101"-106" 107"113' 1 14°-i200

Constant, K 0.70 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.50

10.5.4.3 The effective area of a plug weld shall be 10.5.7.1.3 Slot orplug welds
considered as the nominal area of the hole in the plane The design shear stress on slot or plug welds shall be
of the faying surface. These welds shall not be designed as per 10.5.7.1.1.
to carry stresses.
10.5.7.2 Site welds
10.5.4.4 If the maximum length lj of the side welds
transferring shear along its length exceeds 150 times The design strength in shear and tension for site welds
the throat size of the weld, I,, the reduction in weld made during erection of structural members shall be
strength as per the long joint (see 10.5.7.3) should be calculated according to 10.5.7.1 but using a partial
considered. For flange to web connection, where the safety factor yo,, of 1.5.
welds are loaded for the full length, the above limitation 10.5.7.3 Long joints
would not apply.
When the length of the welded joint, 1, of a splice or
10.5.5 Intermittent Welds end connection in a compression or tension element is
10.5.5.1 Unless otherwise specified, the intermittent greater than 150 t,, the design capacity of weld
fillet welding shall have an effective length of not (see 10.5.7.1.1),f,, shall be reduced by the factor
less than four times the weld size, with a minimum
of 40 mm.
10.5.5.2The clear spacing between the effectivelengths
of intermittent fillet weld shall not exceed 12 and 16
where
times the thickness of thinner plate joined, for
compression and tension joint respectively, and in no lj = length of the joint in the direction of the
case be more than 200 mm. force transfer, and
10.5.5.3 Unless otherwise specified, the intermittent t, = throat size of the weld.
butt weld shall have aneffective length of not less than
four times the weld size and the longitudinal space 10.5.8 Fillet Weld Applied ro the Edge of a Plate or
between the effective length of welds shall not be more Section
than 16 times the thickness of the thinner part joined. 10.5.8.1 Where a fillet weld is applied to the square
The intermittent welds shall not be used in positions edge of a part, the specified size of the weld should
subject to dynamic, repetitive and alternating stresses. generally be at least 1.5mm less than the edge thickness
10.5.6 Weld Types and Quality in order to avoid washing down of the exposed arris
(see Fig. 17A).
For the purpose of this code, weld shall be fillet, butt,
10.5.8.2 Where the fillet weld is applied to the rounded
slot or plug or compound welds. Welding electrodes
toe of a rolled section, the specified size of the weld
shall coofonn to IS 814.
should generally not exceed 314 of the thickness of the
10.5.7 Design Stresses in Welds section at the toe (see Fig. 17B).
10.5.7.1 Shop welds 10.5.8.3 Where the size specified for a fillet weld is
such that the parent metal will not project beyond the
10.5.7.1.1 Fillet welds weld, no melting of the outer cover or covers shall be
Design strength of a fillet weld, f,, shall be based on allowed to occur to such an extent as to reduce the
its throat area and shall be given by: throat thickness (see Fig. 18).

where
fwd =fwn ' Ymw
10.5.8.4 When fillet welds are applied to the edges of
a plate.01 section in members subject to dynamic
loading, the fillet weld shall be of full size with its leg
f,"" = f"/ 43 . length equal to the thickness of the plate or section,
with the limitations specified in 10.5.8.3.
f, = smaller of the ultimate stress of the weld
or of the parent metal, and 10.5.8.5End fillet weld, normal to the direction of force
shall be of unequal size with a throat thickness not
ym, = partial safety factor (see Table 5). less
~ - - than
- ~~ 0.5t. where 1 is the thickness of the .Dart,. as
~~

i0.5.7.1.2 B Lwelds
~ shown in Fig. 19. The difference in thickness of the
welds shall be negotiated at a uniform slope.
Butt welds shall he treated as parent metal with a
thickness equal to the thoat thickness, and the stresses 10.5.9 Stresses Due IndividLralForces
shall not exceed those permitted in the parent metal. when subjected to &her compressive or tensile or

79
 18A Desirable 180 Acceptable because of 18C Not Acceptable because of
Full Throat Thickness Reduced Throat Thickness

FIG.18 FULLSIZEFILLET
WELDAPPLIED
TO THE EDGEOF A PLATE
OR SECTION

shear force alone, the stress in the weld is given by: not be done for:

P a) side fillet welds joining co\ier plates and

f. o r q =- flange plates, and
t, 1,
b) fillet welds where sum of normal and shear
where stresses does not exceedjl, (see 10.5.7.1.1).
10.5.10.2 Butt welds
f. = calculated normal stress due to axial force,
in N/mm2; 10.5.10.2.1 Check for the combination of stresses in
q = shear stress, in N/mm2; butt welds need not be carried out provided that:
P = force transmitted (axial force N or the shear a) butt welds are axially loaded, and
force Q);
b) in single and double bevel welds the sum of
t, = effective throat thickness of weld, in mm; normal and shear stresses does not exceed the
and design normal stress, and the shear stress does
I, = effective length of weld, in mm. not exceed 50 percent of the design shear
stress.
10.5.10 Combination of Stresses 10.5.10.2.2 Combined bearing, bending and shear
10.5.10.1 Fillet welds Where bearing stress, f,,is combined with bending
10.5.10.1.1 When subjected to a combination of normal (tensile or compressive),& and shear stresses, q under
and shear stress, the equivalent stress f, shall satisfy the most unfavorable conditions of loading in butt
the following: welds, the equivalent stress, f, as obtained from the
following formula, shall not exceed the values allowed
for the parent metal:

where
where
f, = normal stresses, compression or tension, due
to axial force or bending moment f, = equivalent stress;
(see 10.5.9), and fb = calculated stress due to bending, in N/mm2;
q = shear stress due to shear force or tension (see fb, = calculated stress due to bearing, in N/mm2;
10.5.9). and
10.5.10.1.2 Check for the combination of stresses need q = shear stress, in N/mm2.
 h:b = 1:2 or Flatter

-
FORCE
- FORCE

10.5.11 Where a packing is welded between' two' d) Connection elements shall remain stable
members and is less than 6 mm thick, or is too thin to under the design action effects and
al~dwprovision of adequate welds or to prevent deformations.
buckling, the packing shall be trimmed flush kith the 10.6.1 Connectionscan be classified as rigid, semi-rigid
edges of the element subject to the design action and and flexible for the purpose of analysis and design as
thesizeof the welds along the edges shall be increased per the recommendation in Annex F. Connections witb
over the required size by an amount equal to the sufficientrotational stiffness may be considered as rigid.
thickness of the packing. Otherwise, the packing shall Examples of rigid connections include flush end-plate
extend beyond the edges and shall be fillet welded to connection and extended end-plate connections.
the pieces between which it is fitted.
--
Connections with negligible rotational stiffness may be
10.6 Design of Connections considered as flexible (pinned). Examples of flexible
connections include single and double web angle
Each element in aconnection shall be designed so that connections and header plate connections. Where a
the structure is capable of resisting the design actions. connection cannot be classified as eitherrigid orflexible.
Connections and adjacent regions of the members shall it shall be assumed to be semi-rigid. ~ ~ k ~of semi-
l e s
be designed by distributing the design action effects rigid connections include top and seat angle connection
such that the following requirements are satisfied: and top and seat angle with singleldoubleweb angles.
a) Design action effects distributed to various 10.6.2 Design shall be on the basis of any rational
elements shall be in equilibrium with the method supported by experimental evidence. Residual
design action effects on the connection. stresses due to installation of bolts or welding normally
b) Required deformations in the elements of the need not be considered in statically loaded structures.
connections are within their deformations Connections in cyclically loaded structures shall be
capacities, designed considering fatigue as given in Section 13.
C) All elements in the connections and the For earthquake load combinations, the connections
adjacent areas of members shall be capable shall be designed to withstand the calculated design
of resisting the design action effects acting action effects and exhibit required ductility as specified
on them, and in Section 12.
10.6.3 Beam and column splice shall be designed in 6) Splices inflexural members- a bending
accordance with the recommendation given in F-2 moment of 0.3 times the member design
and F-3. capacity in bending. This provision shall
not apply to splices designed to transmit
10.7 Minimum Design Action on Connection shear force only.
Connections canying design action effects, except for A splice subjected to a shear force only
lacing connections, connections of sag rods, purlins shall he designed to transmit the design
and girts, shall be designed to transmit the greater of: shear force together with any bending
moment resulting from the eccentricity
a) the design action in the member; and of the force with respect to the centroid
b) the minimum design action effects expressed of the group.
either as the value or the factor times the
7) Splices in members subject to combined
member design capacity for the minimum size actions - a splice in a member subject
of member required by the strength limit state; to a combination of design axial tension
specified as follows: or design axial compression and design
1) Con~zectionsin rigid construction - a bending moment shall satisfy
bending moment of at least 0.5 times the requirements in (4). (5) and (6) above,
member design moment capacity simultaneously.
=Connections to beam in simple For earthquake load combinations, the
construction - a shear force of at least design action effects specified in this
0.15 times the member design shear section may need to be increased to meet
capacity or 40 kN, whichever is lesser the required behaviour of the steel frame
3) Connections at the ends of tensile or and shall comply with Section 12.
compression member- aforceof at least
10.8 Inteisections
0.3 times the member design capacity
4 ) Splices in members subjected to axial Members or components meeting at a joint shall be
tension - a force of at least 0.3 times arranged to transfer the design actions between the
themember design capacity in tension parts, wherever practicable, with their centroidal axes
meeting at a point. Where there is eccentricity at joints,
5 ) Splices in members subjected to axial
compression -for ends prepared for full the members and components shall be designed for
contact in accordance with 17.7.1, it shall the design bending moments which result due to
be permissible to carry compressive eccentricity.
actions by bearing on contact surfaces. The disposition of fillet welds to balance the design
When members are prepared for full actions about the centroidal axis or axes for end
contact to bear at splices, there shall be connections of single angle, double angle and similar
sufficient fasteners to hold all parts type members is not required for statically loaded
securely in place. The fasteners shall be members but is required for members, connection
sufficient to transmit a force of at least components subject to fatigue loading.
0.15 times the member design capacity
in axial compression. Eccentricity between the centroidal axes of angle
members and the gauge lines for their bolted end
When members are not prepared for full
connections may be neglected in statically loaded
contact, the splice material and its
members, but shall be considered in members and
fasteners shall be arranged to hold all
connection components subject to fatigue loading.
-
oarts in line and shall be desianed to
transmit a force of at least 0.3 times the 10.9 choice of~asteners
member design capacity in axial
compression. Where slip in the serviceability limit state is to be
avoided in a connection, high-strength bolts in a
In addition, splices located between
friction-type joint, fitted bolts or welds shall be used.
points of effective lateral support shall
be designed for the design axial force, Where ajoint is subjected to impact or vibration, either
P, plus L Jesign bending moment, not high strength bolts in a friction type joint or ordinary
less than the design bending moment bolts with locking devices or welds shall be used.
M, = (P, 1,)11 000
where, 1, is the distance between points 10.10 Connection Components
of effective lateral support. Connection components (cleats, gussetplates, brackets
 and the like) other than connectors, shall have their and only bolts in the tension side of the
capacities assessed using the provisions of Sections 5, neutral axis may be considered for
6,7,8and 9, as applicable. calculating the neutral axis and second
moment of area.
10.11 Analysis of a BoltlWeld Group 2) In the friction grip bolt group only the
10.11.1 BoltNeld Group Subject to In-plane Loading bolts shall be considered in the
calculation of neutral axis and second
10.11.1.1 General method of analysis moment of area.
The design force in a bolUweld or design force per 3) The fillet weldgroup shall be considered
unit length in a bolUweld group subject to in-plane in isolation from the connected element;
loading shall be determined in accordance with the for the calculation of centroid and second
following: moment of the weld length.
10.11.2.2Alternative analysis
a) The connection plates shall be considered to
be rigid and to rotate relative to each other The design force per unit length in a fillet weldlbolt
about a point known as the instantaneous group may alternatively be determined by considering
centre of rotation of the group. the fillet weld group as an extension of the connected
b) In the case of a group subject to a purecouple member and distributing the design forces among the
only, the instantaneous centre of rotation welds of the fillet weld group so as to satisfy
coincides with the group centroid. In the case equilibrium between the fillet weld group and the
of in-plane shear force applied at the group elements of the connected member.
centroid, the instantaneous centre of the
rotation is at infinity and the design force is 10.11.3 Bolt/Weld Group Subject to In-plane and
uniformly distributed throughout the group. Out-of-Plane Loading
In all other cases, either the results of 10.11.3.1 General method of analysi~
independent analyses for a pure couple alone
and for an in-plane shear force applied at the The design force in a bolt or per unit length of the
group centroid shall be superposed, or a weld sball be determined by the superposition of
recognized method of analysis shall be used. analysis for in-planeand out-of-plane cases discussed
in 10.11.1 and 10.11.2.
c) The design force in a bolt or design force per
unit length at any point in the group shall be 10.11.3.2 Alternative analvsis
assumed to act atright angles to the radius
from that point to the instantaneous centre, The design force in a bolt or per unit length in the
and shall be taken as proportional to that fillet weld group may alternatively be determined by
radius. considering the fillet weld group as an extension of
the connected member and proportioning the design
10.11.2 BoltNeld Group Subject to Out-of-Plane force per bolt or unit length in the weld group to satisfy
Loading equilibrium between the boltlweld group and the
10.11.2.1 General method of analysis elements of the connected member.

The design force of a bolt in bolt group or design force Force calculated in the most stressed bolt or highest
per unit length in the fillet weId group subject to out- force per unit length of the weld shall satisfy the
of-plane loading shall be determined in accordance strength requirements of 10.3, 10.4 or 10.5, as
with the following: appropriate.

a) Design force in the bolts or per unit length in 10.12Lug Angles

the fillet weld group resultingfrom any shear
10.12.1 Lug angles connecting outstanding leg of a
force or axial force shall he considered to be
channel-shaped member shall, as far as possible, be
equally shared by all bolts in the group or
disposed symmetrically with respect to the section of
uniformly distributed over the length of the
the member.
fillet weld group.
b) Design force resulting from a design bending 10.12.2 In the case of angle members, the lug angles
moment shall be considered to vary linearly and their connections to the gusset or other supporting
i with the distance from the relevant centroidal member shall be capable of developing a strength not

i
axes: less than 20 percent in excess of the force in the
1) In bearing type of bolt group plates in outstanding leg of the member, and the attachment of
the compression side of the neutral axis the lug angle to the main angle shall be capable of
 developing a strength not less than 40 percent in excess Actual tensile stress,& = TJA,
of the force in the outstanding leg of the angle.
The permissible stress, fa, is smallest of the values as
10.12.3 In the case of channel members and the like, obtained below:
the lug angles and their connection to the gusset or
other supporting member shall be capable of a) As governed by yielding of gross section
developing a strength of not less than 10 percent in f,, = 0.64
excess of the force not accounted for by the direct b) As governed by rupture of net section
connection of the member, and the attachment of the 1) Plates under tension
lug angles to themember shall be capable of developing
20 percent in excess of that force.
f,,= 0.69 T,,1A,
2) Angles under tension
10.12.4 In no case shall fewer than two bolts, rivets or f,, = 0.69 T,, 1.4,
equivalent welds be used for attaching the lug angle to
c) As governed by block shear
the gusset or other supporting member.
f,,= 0.69 T,, /A,
10.12.5 The effective connection of the lug angle shall, where
as far as possible terminate at the end of the member
connected, and the fastening of the lug angle to the T, = actual tension under working
main member shall preferably start in advance of the (service) load,
direct connection of the member to the gusset or other A, = gross area,
suppcrting member. T,, = design strength in- tension of
10.12.6 Where lug angles are used to connect an angle respective platelangle calculated in
member, the whole area of the member shall be taken accordance with 6.3, and
as effective not withstanding the requirements of T, = design block shear strength in
Section 6 of this standard. tension of respective platelangle
calculated in accordance with 6.4.
SECTION 11 11.3Compression Members
WORKING STRESS DESIGN
11.3.1Actual Compressive Stress
11.1General The actual compressive stress,f, at working (service) load,
11.1.1General design requirements of Section 3 shall P, of a compression member shall be less than or equal to
apply in this section. the permissible compressive stress,f,, as given below:
11.1.2Methods of structural analysis of Section4 shall Actual compressive stress,f, = PSIA,
also apply to this section. The elastic analysis method The permissible compressive stress,f,, = 0.60&,
shall be used in the working stress design.
where
11.1.3 The working stress shall be calculated applying
respective partial load factor for service loadlworking A, = effective sectional area as defined in 7.3.2,
load. and

11.1.4 In load combinations involving wind or seismic

f,, = design compressive stress as defined in
7.1.2.1 (for angles see 7.5.1.2).
loads, the permissible stresses in steel structural
members may be increased by 33 percent. For anchor 11.3.2 Design Details
bolts and construction loads this increase shall be Design of the compression members shall conform
limited to 25 percent. Such an increase in allowable to 7.3.
stresses should not be considered if the wind or seismic
11.3.3 Column Bases
load is the major load in the load combination (such as
acting along with dead load alone). The provisions of 7.4 shall be followed for the design
of column bases, except that the thickness of a simple
11.2 Tension Members column base, t, shall be calculated as:
11.2.1 Actual Tensile Stress
The actual tensile stress, & on the gross area of cross- t, = 4 3 w (a"0.3b2)/f,,
section, A,of plates, angles and other tension members where
shall be less than or equal to the smaller value of w = uniform pressure from below on the slab
permissible tensile stresses,f,,, as given below: base due to axial compression;
 b = larger and smaller projection of the slab base 11.4.2 Shear Stress in Bending Members
beyond the rectangle circumscribing the The actual shear stress, f b at working load, V8 of a
column, respectively; and bending member shall be less than or equal to the
permissible shear stress, z,, given below:
Actual shear stress, z, = V, / A ,
The permissible shear stress is given by:
e limiting actual stresses shall be a) When subjected pure shear:
-
z, = 0.406
11.3.5 Laced and Battened Columns b) When subject to shear buckling (see 8.4.2.1):
z,, = 0.70 V,/A,
The laced and battened columns shall be designed in
where
accordance with 7.6 and 7.7, except that the actual
stresses shall be less than the permissible stresses given V, = design shear strength as given in 8.422 (a), and
A, = shear area of the cross-section as given
in 8.4.1.
11.4 Members Subjected to Bending
11.4.3 Plate Girder
11.4.1 Bending Stresses
Provisions of 8.3,8.4,8.5,8.6 and 8.7 shall apply, for
The actual bending tensile and compressive stresses, the design of plate girder, except that the allowable
f,,, f,, at working (service) load moment, M, of a stresses shall conform to 11.4.1 and 11.4.2.
bending member shall be less than or equal to the
permissible bending stresses, f,,,, f,,,respectively, as 11.4.4 Box Girder
given herein. The actual bending stresses shall be In design of box girder theprovisions of 8.8shall apply,
calculated as: except that the allowable bending stresses shall
conform to 11.4.1.
The permissible bending stresses,f,,, orf,,, shall be 11.5 Combined Stresses
the smaller of the values obtained from the following:
11.5.1 Combined Bending and Shear
a) Laterally supported beams and beams
bending about the minor axis: Reduction in allowable moment need not be considered
under combined bending and shear.
1 ) Plastic and compact sections
.Lkorf,, = 0.66f, 11.5.2 Combined Bending andAxia1 Force
2) Semi-compact sections Members subjected to combined axial compression and
f,bcorf.br= 0'60f, bending shall be so proportioned to satisfy the
b) Laterally unsupported beams subjected to following requirements:
major axis bending: a) Member Stability requirement:
kk=0.60 M,I Ze,
f,,,= 0.60 M,IZ,,
C) Plates and solid rectangles bending about
minor axis:
fibe =kbr=0.75fy
where
Z, Z
=, elastic section modulus for the where
cross section with respect to C, C,, = equivalent uniform moment
extreme compression and tension factor as perTable 18,
fibres, respectively;
f, = applied axial compressive stress
fy
= yield stress of the sect: and under service load,
M, = design bending strength of a f,,, f,, = applied compressive stresses
laterally unsupported beam bent due to bending about the major
about major axis, calculated in (y) and minor ( z ) axis of the
accordance with 8.2.2. member, respectively,
 f,,,f,,, = allowable axial compressive formula, shall not exceed 0.94
stress as governed by buckling
about minor 0.)and major (z)
axis, respectively.
fa,,, f,,, = allowable bending compressive where
stresses due to bending about T = actual shear stress,
minor and major (z) axes of
the cross-section (see 11.41, f, = actual tensile stress,
= yield stress, and
Ky = 1 + (hy- 0.2)ny_<1 + 0.8 ny, fy

K,= l+(h,-0.2)nz_<1+0.8n,, f, = actual bearing stress.

The value of permissible bending stresses f,, and fk,
to be used in the above formuIa shall each be lesser of
the values of the maximum allowable stresses f,,,and
f,,,in bending about appropriate axis.
0. In,
11.6 Connections
K~~ = - (Cmm- 0.25) '
11.6.1 All design provisions of Section 10, except for
where the actual and permissible stress calculations, shall
n , n, = ratio of actual applied axial apply.
stress to the allowable axial 11.6.2 Actual Stresses in Fasteners
stress for buckling about the y
and z axis, respectively; 11.6.2.1 Actual stress in bolt in shear, f,,should be
less than or equal to permissible stress of the bolt,f,,,
C, = equivalent uniform moment
as given below:
factor; and
h, = non-dimensional slenderness The actual stress in bolt in shear,f,,= VSb/A,,
ratio (see 8.2.2). The permissible stress in bolt in shear, fa,, = 0.60
b) Member strength requirement V"5bA
' Sb
At a support he valuesf,, andf,,,shall be where
calculated using laterally supported member V,, = actual shear force under work'ig (service)
and shall satisfy: load,
V, = nominal shear capacity of the bolt as given
in 10.3.3, and
A,, = nominal plain shank area of the bolt.
11.5.3 Combined Bending and Axial Tension
11.6.2.2 Actual stress of bolt in bearing on any plate,
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending f,, should be less than or equal to the permissible
shall be proportioned so that the following condition bearing stress of the boltlplate. fa,, as given below:
is satisfied:
Actual stress of bolt in bearing on any plate,

fpb = VsblApb
The permissible bearing stress of the boltlplate,
where
fepb = 0.60 Vnpb/Ap,
fably.fablZ=permissible tensile stresses under where
bending about minor 0.)and major (z)
axis when bending alone is acting, as V,,, = nominal bearing capacity of a bolt on any
given in 11.4.1. plate as given in 10.3.4, and
11.5.4 CombinedBearing, Bending and Shear Stresses A,, = nominal bearing areaof the bolt on any plate.

Where a bearing stress is combined with tensile or 11.6.2.3 Actual tensile stress of the bolt,f;, should be
less than or equal to permissible tensile stress of the
compressive stress, bending and shear stresses under
the most unfavourable conditions of loading, the bolt,f,,, as given below:
equivalent stress, f, obtained from the following Actual tensile stress of the bolt,f,,= T,/Asb
 he permissible tensile stress of the bolt, without premature failure.
fal, = 0.60 Tnb/Arb 12.2 Load and Load Combinations
12.2.1 Earthquake loads shall be calculated as per
IS 1893 (Part 11, except that the reduction factors
T, = tension in bolt under working (service) load, recommen-ded in 12.3 may be used.
Tnb= design tensile capacity of a bolt as given in
10,3.5, and 12.2.2 In the limit state design of frames resisting
A, = nominal plain shank area of the bolt. earthquake loads, the load combinations shall conform
to Table 4.
11.6.2.4 Actual compressive or tensile or shear stress
of a weld,f, should be less than or equal to permissible 12.2.3 In addition the following load combination shall
stress of the weld, f, as given below: be considered as required in 12.5.1.1, 12.7.3.1,
12.11.2.2 and 12.11.3.4:
The permissible stress of the weld,f,, = 0.6f,,
a) 1.2Dead Load (DL) + 0.5 Live Load (LL) +
where 2.5 Earthquake Load (EL); and
f,, = nominal sbear capacity of the weld as b) 0.9Dead Load (DL)+ 2.5 Earthquake Load
calculated in 10.5.7.1.1. (EL).
11.6.2.5 If the bolt is subjected to combined shear and
tension, the actual shear and axial stresses calculated 12.3 Response Reduction Factor
in accordance with 11.6.2.1 and 11.6.2.3donot exceed For structures designed and detailed as per the
the respective permissible stressesf,,, and&,, then the provision of this section, the response reduction factors
expression given below should satisfy: specified in Table 23 may be used in conjunction with
the provision in IS 1893 for calculating the design
earthquake forces.

where Table 23 Response Reduction Factor (R) for

Building System
A,,& = actual sbear and tensile stresses
respectively, and SI Lateral Load Resisting System R
No.
f,,.f, = permissible shear and tensile stresses (1) (2) (3)
respectively.
i) BrocedFromeSystems:
11.6.3 Stresses in Welds a) Ordinam Cancentricaliv Braced Frames 4
' (OCBF~
11.6.3.1Actual stresses in the throat areaof fillet welds b) Special Concentrically Braced Frame 4.5
shall be less than or equal to permissible stresses,f, (SCBF)
C) Eccentricaliy Braced Frame (EBF) 5
as given below: ii) Moment Frame System.
a) Ordinary Moment Frame (OMF). 4
f,= 0.4fy b) Spec~alMoment Frame (SMF) 5
11.6.3.2Actual stresses in the butt welds shall be less
than the permissible stress as governed by the parent 12.4 Connections, Joints and Fasteners
metal welded together.
12.4.1 All bolts used in frames designed to resist
SECTION 12 earthquake loads shall be fully tensioned high strength
DESIGN AND DETAILING FOR friction grip (HSFG) bolts or turned and fitted bolts.
EARTHQUAKE LOADS 12.4.2 All welds used in frames designed to resist
earthquakeloads shall becomplete penemtion butt welds,
12.1 General exceptin column splices, which shall conform to 12.5.2.
Steel frames shall be so designed and detailed as to 12.4.3Bolted joints shall be designed not to share load
give them adequate strength, stability and ductility to in combination with welds on the same faying surface.
resist severe earthquakes in all zones classified in
IS 1893 (Part I) without collapse. Frames, which form 12.5 Columns
a part of the gravity load resisting system but are not 12.5.1 Column Strength
intended to resist the lateral earthquake loads, need
not satisfy the requirements of this section, provided When PJP,is greater than 0.4, the requirements
they can accommodate the resulting deformation in 12.5.1.1 and 12.5.1;2 shall be met.
 Where with importance factor greater than unity (I> 1.0) in
seismic zone 111.
P, = required compressive strength of the
member, and 12.7.1.2 The provision in this section apply for
P, = design stress in axial compression as diagonal and X-bracing only. Specialist literature
obtained from 7.1.2. may be consulted forV and inverted V-type bracing.
12.5.1.1 The required axial compressive and axial K-bracing shall not be permitted in systems to resist
tensile strength in the absence of applied moment, shall earthquake.
be determined from the load combination in 12.2.3. 12.7.2 Bracing Members
12.5.1.2 The required strengthdetermined in 12.5.1.1 12.7.2.1 The slenderness of bracing members shall not
need not exceed either of the maximum load transferred
-
to the column considerine 1.2 times
~~
~~~-the nominal
...~.......-.
~~

strength of the connecting beam or brace element, or

exceed 120,
12.7.2.2 The required compressive strength of bracing
the resistance of the foundation to uplift. member shall not exceed 0.8 times P,, whereP, is the
design strength in axial compression (see 7.1.2).
12.5.2 Column Splice
12.7.2.3 Along any line of bracing, braces shall be
12.531 A partial-joint penetration groove weld may
provided such that for lateral loading in eitherdirection,
be provided in column splice, such that the design
the tension braces will have to resist between 30 to 70
strength of thejoints shall be at least equal to 200perceut
of the required strength. percent of the total lateral load.
-

12.5.2.2 The minimum required strength for each 12.7.2.4 Bracing cross-section can be plastic, compact
flange splice shall be times f - l as showing Fig, or semi-compact, but not slender, as defined in 3.7.2.
20, where A, is the area of each flange in the smaller 12.7.2.5 For all built-up braces, the spacing of tack
connected column. fasteners shall be such that the unfavourable
slenderness ratio of individual element, between such
12.6 Storey Drift
fasteners, shall not exceed 0.4 times the governing
The storey drift limits shall conform to IS 1893. The sknderness ratioof the brace itself. Boltedc'onnections
deformation compatibility of members not designed shall be avoided within the middle one-fourth of the
to resist seismic lateral load shall also conform to clear bracelength (0.25 times thelength in the middle).
IS 1893 (Part 1).
12.7.2.6The bracing members shall be designed so that
gross area yielding (see 6.2) and not the net area rupture
P, =1.2fy~, P m = 1.2fyA, (see 6.3) would govern the design tensile strength.

B
12.7.3 Bracing Connections
12.7.3.1 End connections in bracings shall be designed
to withstand the minimum of the following:
a) A tensile force in the bracing equal to 1.2f@,;
b) Force in the brace due to load combinations
in 12.2.3; and
c) Maximum force that can be transferred to the
FIG.20 PARTIAL
PENETRATIONGROOVE WELDIN brace by the system.
COLUMN SPLICE 12.7.3.2The connection should be checked for tension
12.7 Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames rupture and block shear under the load determined
(OCBF) in 12.7.3.1.
12.7.1 Ordinary concentrically braced frames (OCBF) 12.7.3.3 The connection shall be designed to withstand
should be shown to withstand inelastic deformation a moment of 1.2 times the full plastic moment of the
corresponding to ajoint rotation of at least 0.02 radians braced the axis.
without degradation in strength and stiffness below the 12.7.3.4 Gusset plates shall be checked for buckling
full yield value. Ordinary concentrically braced frames out of their plane.
meeting the requirements of this section shall be
deemed to satisfy the required inelastic deformation. 12.8 Special Concentrically Braced Frames (SCBF)
12.7.1.1 Ordinary concentrically braced frames shall 12.8.1 Special concentrically braced frames (SCBF)
not be used in seismic zones IV andV and for buildings should be shown to withstand inelastic deformation
88
 orresponding to ajoint rotation of at least 0.04 radians 12.8.3.4 Gusset plates shall be checked for buckling
without degradation in strength and stiffness below the out of their plane.
full yield value. Special concentrically braced frames 12.8.4 Column
meeting the requirements of this section shall be
deemed to satisfy the required inelastic deformation. 12.8.4.1 The column sections used in special
concentrically braced frames (SCBF) shall be plastic
12.8.1.1 Special concentrically braced frames (SCBF) as defined in 3.7.2.
may be used in any seismic zone [see IS 1893 (Part I)]
and for any building (importance-factor value). 12.8.4.2 Splices shall he located within themiddle one-
third of the column clear height. Splices shall be
12.8.1.2The provision in this section apply for diagonal
designed for the forces that can be transferred to it. In
and X-bracing only. Specialist literature may be addition, splices in columns shall be designed to
consultedfor V and invertedv-type bracing. K-bracing
develop at least the nominal shear strength of the
shall not be permitted in system to resist earthquake. smaller connected member and 50 percent of the
e. .
12.8.2 Bracing Members
12.8.2.1 Bracing members shall be made of E250B
nominal flexural strength of the smaller connected
section.
steel of IS 2062 only. 12.9 Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)
12.8.2.2The slenderness of bracing members shall not Eccentrically braced frames (EBF) shall be designed
exceed 160 (only hangers). in accordance with specialist literature.
12.8.2.3 The required compressive strength of bracing
12.10 Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF)
member shall not exceed the design strength in axial
compression P, (see 7.1.2) 12.10.1 Ordinary moment frames (OMF) should be
shown to withstand inelastic deformation
12.8.2.4 Along any line of bracing, braces shall be
corresponding to ajoint rotation of 0.02 radians without
provided such that for lateral loading in either direction, degradation in strength and stiffness below the full yield
the tension braces will resist between 30 to 70 percent
value (M,). Ordinary moment frames meeting the
of the load.
requirements of this section shall be deemed to satisfy
12.8.2.5 Braced cross-section shall be plastic as defined the required inelastic deformation.
in 3.7.2.
12.10.1.1 Ordinary moment frames (OMF) shall not
12.8.2.6 In built-up braces, the spacing of tack be used in seismic zones IV and V and for buildings
connections shall be such that the slenderness ratio of with importance factor greater than unity (I >1.0) in
individual element between such connections shall not seismic zone 111.
exceed 0.4 times the governing slenderness ratio of
12.10.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections
the brace itself. Bolted connection shall be avoided
within the middle one-fourth of the clear brace length Connections are permitted to be rigid or semi-rigid
(0.25 times the length, in the middle). moment connections and should satisfy the criteria
in 12.10.2.1 to 12.10.2.5.
12.8.2.7 The bracing members shall be designed so that
gross area yielding (see 6.2) and not the net area rupture 12.10.2.1 Rigid moment connections should be
(see 6.3) would govern the design tensile strength. designed to withstand a moment of at least 1.2 times
of either the full plastic moment of the connected beam
12.8.3 Bracing Connections
or the maximum moment that can be delivered by the
12.8.3.1 Bracing end connections shall be designed to beam to the joint due to the induced weakness at the
withstand the minimum of the following: ends of the beam, whichever is less.
a) A tensile force in the bracing equal to 1.1f@,; 12.10.2.2 Semi-rigid connections should be designed
and to withstand either a moment of at least 0.5 times the
b) Maximum force that can be transferred to the full plastic moment of the connected beam or the
brace by the system. maximum moment that can be delivered by the system,
12.8.3.2 The connection should be checked for tension whichever is less. The design moment shall be achieved
rupture and block shear under the load determined within arotation of 0.01 radians. The information given
in 12.8.3.1. in Annex F may be used for checking.

12.8.3.3Theconnection shall be designed to withstand 12.10.2.3 The stiffness and strength of semi-rigid
a moment of.1.2 times the full plastic moment of the connections shall be accounted for in the design and
braced section about the critical buckling axis. the overall stability of the frame shall be ensured.
 12.10.2.4 The rigid and semi-rigid connections should
be designed to withstand a shear resulting from the
load combination 1.2DL + 0.5LL plus the shear
corresponding to the design moment defined
in 12.10.2.1 and 12.10.2.2, respectively.
12.10.2.5 In rigid fully welded connections, continuity
plates (tension stiffener, see 8.7) of thickness equal to
or greater than the thickness of the beam flange shall
be provided and welded to the column flanges and web.

12.11 Special Moment Frames (SMF)

12.11.1 Special moment frames (SMF) shall be made
of E250B steel of IS 2062 and should be shown to
withstand inelastic deformation corresponding to a
joint rotation of 0.04 radians without degradation in
strength and stiffness below the full yield value (M,).
Special moment frames meeting the requirements of
this section shall be deemed to satisfy the required 12.11.2.5 Continuity plates (tension stiffner) (see 8.7)
inelastic deformation, shall be provided in all strong axis weldedconnections
12.11.1.1 Special moment frames (SMF) may be used except in end plate connection.
in any seismic zone [see IS 1893 (Part l)] and for any 12.11.3 Beam and Column Limitation
buildings (importance-factor values).
12.11.3.1 Beam and column sections shall be either
12.11.2 Beam-to-Column Joints and Connections plastic or compact as defined in 3.7.2. At potential
12.11.2.1 All beam-to-column connections shall be plastic hinge locations, they shall necessarily be plastic.
rigid (see Annex F) and designed to withstand a 12.11.3.2The section selected for beams and columns
moment of at least 1.2times the full plastic moment of shall satisfy the following relation:
the connected beam. When a reduced beam section is
used, its minimum flexural strength shall be at least
equal to 0.8 times the full plastic moment of the
unreduced section.
12.11.2.2 The connection shall be designed to where
withstand a shear resulting from the load combination
1.2DL + 0.5LL plus the shear resulting from the C M =~sum of the moment capacity in the
application of 1.2MPin the same direction, at each end column above and below the beam
of the beam (causing double curvature bending). The centreline; and
shear strength need not exceed the required value EM,, = sum of the moment capacity in the
corresponding to the load combination in 12.2.3. beams at the intersection of the beam and
12.11.2.3 In column strong axis connections (beam and column centrelines.
column web in the same plane), the panel zone shall In tall buildings, higher mode effects shall be accounted
be checked for shear buckling in accordance with 8.4.2 for in accordance with specialist literature.
at the design shear defined in 12.11.2.2. Column web
doubler plates or diagonal stiffeners may be used to 12.11.3.3 Lateral support to the column at both top
strengthen the web against shear buckling. and bottom beam flange levels shall be provided so as
to resist at least 2 percent of the beam flange strength,
12.11.2.4The individual thickness of the column webs except for the case described in 12.11.3.4.
and doubler plates, shall satisfy the following:
12.11.3.4 A plane frame designed as non-sway in the
t 2 (d,+b,)/90 direction perpendicular to its plane, shall be checked
for buckling, under the load combination specified
where in 12.2.3.
t = thickness of column web or doubler plate,
12.12 Column Bases
d, = panel-zone depth between continuity plate,
and 12.12.1 Fixed column bases and their anchor bolts
should be designed to withstand a moment of 1.2 times
b, = panel-zone width between column flanges.
90
 full plastic moment capacity of the column section. environment as in normal atmospheric
anchor bolts shall be designed to withstand the condition and suitably protected against
ombined action of shear and tension as well as prying corrosion (pit depth < 1 mm).
f) Structure is not subjected to temperature
exceeding 150 "C.
2.12.2 Both fixed and hinged column bases shall be
esigned to withstand the full shear under any load g) Transverse fillet or butt weld connects plates
case or 1.2 times the shear capacity of the column of thickness not greater than 25 mm.
whichever is higher. h) Holes shall not be made in members and
connections subjected to fatigue.
SECTION 13 Fatigue need not be investigated, if condition
FATIGUE in 13.2.2.3, 13.5.1 or 13.6 is satisfied.
13.1 General The values obtained from the standard S-Ncuwe shall
be modified by a capacity reduction factor p,, when
Structure and structural elements subject to loading plates greater than 25 mrn in thickness are joined
that could lead to fatigue failure shall be designed together by transverse fillet or butt welding, given by:
against fatigue as given in this section. This shall
however not cover the following:
a) Corrosion fatigue, where
b) . Low cycle (high stress) fatigue,
t, = actual thickness in mm of the thicker plate
c) Thermal fatigue, being joined.
d) Stress corrosion cracking, No thickness correction is necessary when full
e) Effects of high temperature (> 150" C), and penetration butt weld reinforcements are machined
flush and proved free of defect through non-destructive
f) Effects of low temperature (< brittle transition
temperature). testing.
13.2.2 Design Spectrum
13.1.1 For the purpose of design against fatigue, ,

different details (of members and connections) are 13.2.2.1 Stress evaluation
classified under different fatigue class. The design
Design stress shall be determined by elastic analysis
stress range corresponding to various number of cycles,
are given for each fatigue class. The requirements of of the structure to obtain stress resultants and the local
stresses may be obtained by a conventional stress
this section shall be satisfied with, at each critical
analysis method. The normal and shear stresses shall
location of the structure subjected to cyclic loading,
considering relevant number of cycles and magnitudes be determined considering all design actions on the
members, but excluding stress con'centration due to the
of stress range expected to be experienced during the
life of the structure. geometry of the detail. The stress concentration effect
is accounted for in detail category classification
13.2 Design (see Table 26). The stress concentration, however, not
characteristic of the detail shall be accounted for
13.2.1 Reference Design Condition separately in the stress calculation.
The standard S-N curves for each detail category are In the fatigue design of trusses made of members with
given for the following conditions: open sections, in which the end connections are not
a) Detail is located in a redundant load path, pinned, the stresses due to secondary bending moments
wherein local failure at that detail alone will shall be taken into account, unless the slendernessratio
not lead to overall collapse of the structure. (KUr), of the member is greater than 40.
b) Nominal stress history at the local point in In the determination of stress range at the end
the detail is estimated/evaluated by a connections between hollow sections, the effect of
conventional method without taking into connection stiffness and eccentricities may be
account the local stress concentration effects disregarded, provided
due to the detail.
C) Load cycles are not highly irregular. a) the calculated stress range is multiplied by
appropriate factor given in Table 24(a) in the
d) Details are accessible for and subject to case of circular hollow section connections
regular inspection. and Table 24(b) in the case of rectangular
e) Structure is exposed to only mildly corrosive hollow section connections.
 b) the design throat thickness of fillet welds in value, the partial safety factor for loads in theevaluation
the joints is greater than the wall thickness of of stress range in fatigue design shall be taken as 1.0.
the connected member. 13.2.3.2 Partial safety factorforfatigue strength (y,,)
13.2.2.2 Design stress spectrum Partiat safety factor for strength is influenced by
In the case of loading events producing non-uniform consequences of fatigue damage and level of inspection
stress range cycle, the stress spectrum may he obtained capabilities.
by a rational method, such as 'rain flow counting' or 13.2.3.3 Based on consequences of fatigue failure,
an equivalent method. component details have been classified as given in
13.2.2.3 Low fatigue Table 25 and the corresponding partial safety factor
for fatigue strength shall be used:
Fatigue assessment is not required for a member,
connection or detail, if normal and shear design stress a) Fail-safe structural componentldetail is the
ranges, f satisfy the following conditions: one where local failure of one component due
to fatigue crack does not result in the failure
f 27/Ym, of the structure due to availability of alternate
or if the actual number of stress cycles, N,,, satisfies load path (redundant system).
b) Non-fail-safe structural component/detail is
the one where local failure of one component
leads rapidly to failure of the structure due to
its non-redundant nature.
where
y,,, y , = partial safety factors for strength and Table 25 Partial Safety Factors for Fatigue
load, respectively (see 13.2.3). and Strength (y,,)
f = actual fatigue stress range for the detail. (Clause 13.2.3.3)
SI No. Inspection and Access Consequence of Failure
Table 24 (a) Multiplying Factors for Calculated
Stress Range (Circular Hollow Sections) Fail-Safe Non-fail-safe
(Clause 13.2.2.1)

Type of Connection Chords Verticals Diagonals i) Periodic inspection, mainte-

NO.
nance and accessibility to 1.00 1.25
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) detail is good
i) Gap K type 1.5 1.0 1.3 ii) Periodic inspection, mainte-
connections ( N type 1.5 1.8 1.4 nance and accessibility to 1.15 1.35
ii) Overlap 1.5 1.0 1.2 detail is poor
1.65 1.25

13.3 Detail Category

Table 24 (b) Multiplying Factors for Calculated Tables 26 (a) to (d) indicate the classification of
Stress Range (Rectangular Hollow Sections) different details into various categories for the purpose
(Clause 13.2.2.1) of assessing fatigue strength. Details not classified in
SI TypeoofJoint Chords Verticals Diagonals the table may be treated as the lowest detail category
NO. of a similar detail, unless superior fatigue strength is
proved by testing andlor analysis.
Holes in members and connectionssubjected to fatigue
p~~~

I) Gap Ktype 1.5 1.0 1.5

connections ( N type 1.5 2.2 1.6 loading shall not be made:
ii) Overlap Ktype 1.5 1O
. 1.3
connections (
-
1.5 2.0 1.4
a) using punching in plates having thickness
greater than 12 mm unless the holes are sub-
punched and subsequently reamed to remove
13.2.3 Partial Safety Factors the affected material around the punched hole,
and
13.2.3.1 Partial safety factor for actions and their
b) using gas cutting unless the holes are reamed
effects (Yfh)
to remove the material in the heat affected
Unless and otherwise the uncertainty in the estimation zone.
of the applied actions and their effects demand a higher

92
13.4 Fatigue Strength
The fatigue strength of the standard detail for the
normal or shear fatigue stress range, not corrected for h) Shear stress
effects discussed in 132.1, is given below (see also
ig. 22 and Fig. 23):
a) Normal stress range where
when N,, 4 5 x 106 ff, 7, = design normal and shear fatigue stress
range of the detail, respectively, for
fr = f," {- life cycle of N,, , and
f,, T,= normal and shear fatigue strength
of the detail for 5 x 106cycles, for
the detail category (see Table 26).

Table 26 (a) Detail Category Classification, Group 1 Non-welded Details

(Clauses 13.2.2.1 and 13.3)

S1 Detail Constructional Details

No. Category Description
Lllustration (see Note)

(3) (4)
(1) (2)
Rolled and extruded products
i) Plates and flats (I)
ii) Rolled sections (2)
iii) Seamless tubes (3)
(1)
i) 118 Sharp edges. surface and rolling flaws to he
(2) removed by grinding in the direction of applied
stress.

(3)
Bolted connections
(4) and (5): Stress range calculated on the
gross section and on the net section.
Unsupported one-sided cover plate
connections shall be avoided or the effect of
the eccentricity taken into account in
calculating stresses
Material with gas-cut or sheared edgcs with no
103 draglines
ii) (6): All hardened material and visible signs
of edge discantinuitics to be removed hy
machining or grinding in the direction of
applied stress.

\
(6)

Material with machine gas-cut edges with

draglines or manual gas-cut material
iii) 92 (7) : Comers and visible signs of edge
discontinuities to be re~novrdby grinding in the
direction ofthe applied stress.

NOTE - The anow indicates the location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress range is to be
calculated on a plane normal to the arrow.
 Table 26 (b) Detail Category Classification, Group 2 Welded, Details -Not in Hollow Sections
(Clauses 13.2.2.1and 13.3)

SI Detail Constructional Details

No. Category
Illustration (see Note) Description
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Welded plate 1-section and box girders with
contisuous longitudinal welds
(8) & (9) : Zones of continuous automatic
longitudinal fillef or butt welds carried out from both
sides and all welds not having un-repaired stop-start
92 IW positions.
i)

191

Welded plate I-section and box girders with

continuous langitudinnl welds

ii) 83 QQ 110) 1111

(10) & ( I I) : Zones of continuous automatic butt
welds made fmm one side only with a continuous
backing bar and all welds not having un-repaired
stop-start positions.
(12) : Zones of continuous longitudinal fillet or butt
welds carried out from both sides but containing

B ($2)
stop-Lart positions. For continuous manual
longitudinal fillet or butt welds carried out from both
sides, use Detail Categaly 92.

Q
Welded plate 1-section and box girders with
continuous longitudinal welds
iii) 66 (13) :Zones of continuous longitudinal welds carried
out from one side only, with or without stop-stalt
ill1 positions.

Intermittent longitudinal welds

iv) 59
.Q (141
(14) :Zone3 of intermittent longitudinal welds

.Q
Intermittent longitudinal welds
9 (15) : Zones containing cope holes in longitudinally
52 welded T-joints. Cope hole not to be filled with
weld.
,IS,

Transverse butt welds (complete penetration)

a
Weld run-off tabs to be used, subsequently removed
and ends of welds ground flush in the direction of

--225
-
stress. Welds to be made from two sides.
(16) : Transverse splices in plates, flats and rolled
sections having the weld reinforcement ground flush
vi) to plate surface. I00 percent NDT inspection, and
83 (1 71
(18) weld surface to be free of exposed porosity in the
weld metal.

-\ (16.1
(17) : Plate girders welded as in (16) before
assembly.
(IS) : Transverse splices as in (16) with reduced or
tapered transition with taper 51:4
 Table 26 (b) (Continued)

SI Detail Constructional Details

No. Category
Illustration (see Note) Description
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Transverse butt welds (complete penetration)
Welds run-off tabs lo be used, subsequently removed

1%
(19)
00)
and ends o f welds ground flush in the direclion of
stress Welds to be made from two sides.
(19) : Transverse splices o f plates, rolled sections or
plate girders.
vii) 66
T*PERII:I (20) : Transverse splice of rolled sections or welded
\%--. plate girders, without cope hole. With cope hole use

-&E= IN)
Detail Category 52, as in (15).
(21) : Transverse splices in plates a flae being lapered
in width or in thickness where the taper i s 5 1:4.

viii) 59
--3ii \b.\
PI
~
?:+<.(*PER
sq*.5
Transverse butt welds (complete penetration)
Weld run-off tabs to be used, subsequently removed
and ends of welds ground flush in the direction of
stress. Welds to be made from two sides.
(22) : Transverse splices as i n (21) with taper in
width or thickness > I :4 but S1:Z.S.

Transverse butt welds (complete penetration)

(23) : Transverse butt-welded splices made on a
backing bar. Theend ofthe fillet weld ofthe backing

(25) : Transverse butt welds as in (23) where fillet

welds end closer than 10 m m to plate edge.

< 0.15 timer the thickness o f intermediate plate.

IS 800 :2007

Table 26 (b) (Concluded)

greater than the weld.

(32) : Longitudinal fillet welds. Class ofdetail varies

according to the length of the attachment weld as

(33) : Gusset welded to the edge of a plate or beam

flange. Smooth transition radius (r), farmed by
machining or flame cutting plus grinding. Class of
detail varies according to r/b ratio as noted.

(36) : Vertical stiffeners welded to a beam or plate

girder flange or web by continuous or intermittent
welds. In the case of webs canying combined
bending and shear design actions, the fatigue
strength shall be determined using the stress range of
the principal stresses.
(37) : Diaphragms of box girders welded to the
flange or web by continuous or intermittent welds.

be calculated on weld throat area.

NOTE -The arrow indicates the location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress range is lo be
calculated an a plane normal to the arrow.
 Table 26 (c) Detail Category Classification, Group 3 Bolts
(Clauses 13.2.2.1and 13.3)

Constructional Details
Detail Category

-u-
No. Illustration (see Note) Description
(0 R) . ' 0) (4)
Bolts in shear (8.81TB bolting category only)
(41) : Shear stress range calculated on the
minor diameter area ofthe bolt (A,).

i) 83
- NOTE - If the shear on the joint is
insufticient to cause slip of the joint the
shear in the bolt need not be considered in
fatigue.

(41)
Bolts and threaded rods in tension (tensile
stiess to be calculsted on the tensile stress
t t srea,A,)

IT 0
(42) : Additional forces due to prying effccts
shall be taken into account. Far tensional bolts,
the stress range depends on the connection
peornctty.
ii) 27 NOTE - Ln connections with tensioncd
bolts, the change in the force in the bolts is
often less than the applied force, but this
effect is dependent an the geometry of the
t connection. It is not normally required that
any allowance for fatigue be made in
calculating the required number of bolts in
(42) such connections.

NOTE -The arrow indicates the location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress rangc is to be
calculated on a plane normal to the anow.

NUMBEROF STRESS CYCLES (Nscl

FIG.22 S-NCURVE
FOR NORMAL
STRESS
 Table 26 (d) Detail Category Classification, Group 4
Welded Details in Hollow Sections
(Clause 13.2.2.1 and 13.3)

SI Detailcategory I Constructional Details I

I INo.
(1) (2)
Illustration (see Note) I Description
1
(3) (4) j
103 Continuous automatic longitudinal welds I
1)
%% (43)
(43) :No stop-atarfs, or as manufactured, proven free to
detachable discontinuities.
?
i
66 Transverse butt welds
(t z 8 mm) r
(44) : Bun-welded end-to-end connection of circular
ii)
52
(I < 8 mm) dq l -------
- @
hollow sections.
NOTE - Height of the weld reinforcement less
than 10 percent of weld with smooth transition to
i

(44) i
the plate surface. Welds made in flat position and i
proven free to detachable discontinuities. .a

iii)
52
(f r 8 mm) -
------- ---
-------- --
(45) :Bull-welded end-to-end connection 6f rectangular
hollow sections .?
41 j
(f < 8 mm) (45)
ij
41 Butt welds to intermediate plate
(1 2 8 mm)
(46) : Circular hollow sections, end-to-end bun-welded
iv) 37 with an intermediate plate.
(I < 8 mm)
.
i
(46)
37
!
(f r 8 mm)
(47) Rectangular hollow sections, end-to-end bun
welded with an intermediate plate i
1
v)
~!
- I
30
(47)
(I < 8 mm)
52 ------- ----

T F
Welded attachments (non-loadsnrrying)
--------- -- (48) : Circular or rectangular hollow section, fillet
welded to another section. Section width parallel to
vi) sbess direction 5100 mm.
J ~ECTIONWIDTH
s100mm
(48)
33

vii)
(I < 8 mm)
29
(I < 8 mm)
1-
------- I

(49)
0 Fillet welds t o intermediate plate
(49) : Circular hollow sections, end-bend fillet welded
with an intermediate plate.

29 (50) : Rectangular hollow sections, end-to-end fillet

(f28mm) welded with an intermediate plate.
viii) 27
(I < 8 mm)
(50)

NOTE -The arrow indicates the location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress range is to be
calculated on a plane normal ID the arrow.
 13.5 Fatigue Assessment 13.5.2.3 Constant stress range
The design fatigue strength for Nsc life cycles (f,, T,) The actual normal and shear stress range f and z at a
may be obtained from the standard fatigue strength point of the structure subjected to N,, cycles in life
for Nsc cycles by multiplying with correction factor, shall satisfy.
&,for thickness, as mentioned in 13.2.1 and dividing
by paaiai safety factor given in Table 25.
Tfd = & TF1ymfi
13.5.1 Exemptions
where
~t any point in a structure if the actual normal and
shear stress rangef andzare less than the design fatigue p, = correction factor (see 13.2.1),
strength range corresponding to 5 x lo6 cycles with ,,y = partial safety factor against fatigue failure,
appropriate partial safety factor, no further assessment given in Table 25, and
for fatigue is necessary at that point. f,, 7 , = normal and shear fatigue strength ranges for
&.::~
,.. ~.
.. .~~ 13.5.2 Stress Limitations the actual life cycle, N,, obtained from 13.4.
13.5.2.1 The maximum (absolute) value of the normal 13.5.2.4 Variable stress range
and shear stresses shall never exceed the elaslic limit Fatigue assessment at any point in a structure, wherein
(fy. z ~ for
) the material under cyclic loading. variable stress ranges f, or T~ for ni number of cycles
f 13.5.2.2 The maximum stress range shall not exceed (i =I to r ) are encountered, shall satisfy the following:
1- 1.5 f. for normal stresses and 1.5 f,/& for the shear a) For normal stress (n

NUMBER OF STRESS CYCLES (Nsc)

FIG.23 S-N CURVE

FOR SHEAR
STRESS

99
 b) For shear stresses (7) where

where y, is the summation upper limit of all the f,,fn= stress ranges falling above and
normal stress ranges (f;) having magnitude lesser below the f,, the stress range
than (p,&nlymr,)for that detail and the lower limit of corresponding to the detail at
all the normal stress ranges (t;) having magnitude 5 x lo6 number of life cycles.
greater than (p, fhlyn,,j for the detail. In the above
summation all normal stress ranges,f,, and T~having SECTION 14
magnitude less than 0 . 5 5 fin,
~ ~ and 0 . 5 5 ~T, ~ may DESIGN ASSISTED BY TESTING
be disregarded.
14.1 Need for Testing
13.6 Necessity for Fatigue Assessment
Testing of structures, members or components of
a) Fatigue assessment is not normally required structures is not required when designed in accordance
for building structures except as follows: with this standard. Testing may be accepted as an
1) Members supporting lifting or rolling alternative to calculations or may become necessary
loads, in special circumstances.
2) Member subjected to repeated stress Testing of a structural system, member or component
cycles from vibrating machinery, may be required to assist the design in the following
cases:
3) Members subjected to wind induced
oscillations of a large number of cycles a) When the calculation methods available are not
in life, and adequate for the design of a particular structure,
4) Members subjected to crowd induced member or component, testing shall be
oscillations of a large number of cycles undertaken in place of design by calculation
in life. or to supplement the design by calculation;
b) No fatigue assessment is necessary if any of b) Where rules o r methods for design b y
the following conditions is satisfied. calculation would lead to uneconomical
design, experimental verification may be
1) The highest normal stress range f , ,,, undertaken to avoid conservative design;
satisfies
c) When the design or construction is not entirely
in accordance with sections of this standard,
experimental verification is recommended;
2) The highest shear stress range T , d) When confirmation i s required on the
satisfies consistency of production of material,
components, members or structures originally
designed by calculations or testing; and
3) The total number of actual stress cycles e) When the actual performance of an existing
N,,, satisfies structure capacity is in question, testing shall
be used to confirm it.
14.1.1 Testing of structural system, member or
component shall be of the following categories:
a) Proof testing -The application of test loads
where
to a structure, sub-structure, member o r
heq= equivalent constant amplitude connection to ascertain the structural
stress range in MPa given by characteristics of only that specific unit.
 b) Prototype testing -Testing of structures, sub- IS 1608) tests . The mean value of the yield strength,
structures, members or connections is done fy, taken from such tests shall be determined with due
to ascertain the structural characteristics of a regard to the importance of each element in the
class of such structures, sub-structures assembly. The strength test load F,,,,,, (including self
members or connection, which are nominally weight) shall be determined from:
identical to the units tested.

14.2 Types of Test where

14.2.1Acceptance Test fy = characteristic yield stress of the material as
This is intended as anon-destructive test for confirming assumed in the design,
structural performance. It should be recognized that F, = factored design load for the ultimate limit
the loading applied to certain structures might cause state, and
permanent distortions. Such effects do not necessarily y, = partial safety factor for the type of failure,
indicate structural failure in acceptance test. However, as prescribed in this standard.
the possibility of their occurrence should be agreed to At this load there shall be no failure by buckling or
before testing. rupture of any part of thestructure or component tested.
The load for acceptance test, F,,,,,,shall be determined On removal of the test load, the deflection should
from:
.
F,*,,, = (1.0 x self weight) + (1.15 x remainder
.
decrease by at least 20 percent of the maximum
deflection at F,.,,,
of the permanent ioad) + (1.25 x variable 14.2.3 Test to Failure (Ultimate Strength Test)
load).
The objective of a test to failure is to determine the
The assembly shall satisfy the following criteria: design resistance from the ultimate resistance. In this
a) It shall demonstrate substantially linear situation it is still desirable to carry out the acceptance
behaviour under test loading, and and strength tests, before test to failure.
b) On removal of the test load, the residual Not less than three tests shall be carried out on
deflection shall not exceed 20 percent of the nominally identical specimens. An estimate should be
maximum-recorded deflection. ma& of the anticipated ultimate resistance as a basis
If the above criteria are not satisfied the test may be for such tests. During a test to failure, the loading shall
repeated one more time only, when the assembly shall first be applied in increments up to the strength test
satisfy the following criteria: load. Subsequent load increments shall then be
determined from consideration of the principal load
a) It shall demonstrate substantially linear deflection plot. The test load resistance, F,,,R shall be
hehaviour on the second application of test determined as that load at which the specimen is unable
loading, and to sustain any further increase in load. At this load,
b) Corresponding recorded residual deflection gross permanent distortion is likely to have occurred
in the second test shall not exceed 10 percent and in some cases such large gross deformation may
of the maximum deflection during the test. define the test limit. If the deviation of any individual
test result exceeds 10 percent of the mean value
14.2.2 Strength Test obtained for all the three tests, at least three more tests
Strength test is used toconfirm the calculated resistance shall be carried out. When the deviation from the mean
of a structure or component. Where a number of items does not exceed 10 percent of the mean. the design
are to be constructed to a common design, and one or resistance may be evaluated as given below:
more prototypes are tested to confirm their strength, a) When the failure is ductile, the design
the others may be accepted without any additional test, resistance, Fdmay be determined from:
provided they are similar in all relevant respects to the
prototype.
Before carrying out the strength test, the specimen where
should first be subjected to and satisfy the acceptance Fce,,,Mi,
= minimum test result from the tests
test. Since the resistance of the assembly under test to failure,
depends on the material properties, the actual yield
fy, = average yield strength as obtained
strength of all the steel materials in the assembly shall
from the material tests, and
be determined from coupon (test piece as defined in
 f, =
characteristic yield stress of the recorded during the acceptance test on the prototype
grade of steel. and the residual deflection should not be more than
b) In the case of a sudden (brittle) ruphlre type 105 percent of that recorded for the prototype.
failure, the design resistance may be
14.3 Test Conditions
determined from:
a) Loading and measuring devices shall be
Fd = '3.9F,e,t,.i"(f"'f"tJ 1 rm, calibrated in advance.
where b) The design of the test rig shall be such that:
f, = chmacteristic ultimate stress of the 1) Loading system adequately simulates the
grade of steel used, and magnitude and distribution of the
f,, = average ultimate tensile strength of loading;
the material obtained from tests. 2) It allows the specimen to perform in a
In the case of a sudden (brittle) buckling type manner representative of service
C)
failure, the design resistance shall be conditions;
determined from: 3) Lateral and torsional restraint, if any,
should be representative of those in service;
4) Specimen should be free to deflect under
load according to service condition;
d) In ductile buckling type failure in which the
relevant slenderness h can be reliably assessed, 5) Loading system shall be able to follow
the movements of the specimen without
the design resistance may be determined from:
interruption or abnormal restraints; and
6) Inadvertent eccentricities at the point of
application of the test loads and at the
supports are avoided;
where
C) Test load shall bc applied to the unit at a rate
x = reduction factor for the relevant as uniform as practicable.
buckling curve, and d) Deflections should be measured at sufficient
xm = value of x when the yield strength points of high movements to ensure that the
'sf,,. maximum value is determined.
e) If the magnitude of stresses in a specimen is
to be determined, the strain at the desired
Where a component or assembly is designed on the location may be measured and the
basis of strength tests or tests to failure and aproduction corresponding stress calculated.
run is carried out of such items, an appropriate number f) Prior to any test, preliminary loading (not
of samples (not less than two) shall be selected from exceeding the characteristic values of the
each production batch at random for check tests. relevant loads) may be applied and then
14.2.4.1 The samples shall be carefully examined to removed, in order to set the test specimen on
ensure that they are similar in all respects to the to the test rig.
prototype tested, particular attention being given to the
14.4 Test Loading
following:
14.4.1 Where the self-weight.of the specimen is not
a) Dimensions of components and connections; representative of the actual permanent load in service,
b) Tolerance and workmanship; and allowance for the difference shall be made in the
c) Quality of steel used, checked with reference calculation of test loads to be applied.
to mill test certificates.
14.4.2 On the attainment of maximum load for either
14.2.4.2 Where it is not possible to determine either acceptance or strength tests, this load shall be
the variations or the effect of variations from the maintained for at least 1 h. Reading of load and
prototype, an acceptance test shall be carried out as a deflection shall be taken at intervals of 15 min and the
check test. loading shall be maintained constant until there is no
significant increase indeflection during a 15 min period
14.2.4.3 In this check test, the deflections shall be
or until at least 1 h has elapsed.
measured at the same positions as in the acceptance
test of the prototype. The maximum measured 14.4.3 The test load shall be equal to the design load
deflectionshall notexceed 120percent of the deflection for the relevant limit state in proof testing.
 14.4.4 The test load in prototype testing shall be equal structures should be such that good drainage of water
to the design load for the relevant limit state as is ensured. Standing pool of water, moisture
multiplied by the appropriate factor given in Table 27. accumulation and rundown of water for extended
duration shall be avoided.
g*;?~, Table 27 Factors to Allow for Variability of
I
;
:;
**.~ The details of connections should ensure that:
P,~.~.,
~-S7
Structural Units
g~?:.
9.- a) All exposed surfaces are easily accessible for
SI No. of Similar For Strength For inspection and maintenance; and
No. Units to be Tested L i m i t State Servieeability b) All surfaces,' not so easily accessible are
L i m i t State
completely sealed against ingress of moisture.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) I 1.5 1.2 15.2.2 Exposure Condition
ii) 2 1.4 1.2
iii) 3 1.3 1.2 15.2.2.1 General environment
iv) 4 1.3 1.1
V) 5 1.3 1.1 The general environment, to which a steel structure is
vi) 10 1.2 1.1 exposed during its working life is classified into five
levels of severity, as given in Table 28.
14.5 Criteria for Acceptance
14.5.1 Acceptance for Strength Table 28 Environmental Exposure Conditions

The test structure, sub-structure, member or connection SI Environmental

Exposure Conditions
No. Classificelions
shall he deemed to comply with the requirements for
strength if it is able to sustain the strength test load for (1) (2) (3)
at least 15 min. i) Mild Surfacer normally . .protected against
exposure to weather or aggressive
It shall then be inspected to determine the nature and condition as i n interior o f buildings,
extent of any damage incurred during the test The except when located i n coastal areas
effects of the damage shall be considered and if ii) Moderate Structural steel surfaces:
necessary appropriate repairs to the damaged parts a) exposed to condensation and rain
carried out. b) continuously under water
c) exposed to non-aggressivesoiU
14.5.2 Acceptance for Serviceability groundwater
d) sheltered from sahlrated salt air in
The maximum deformation of the structure or member coastal areas
iii) Severe Structural steel surfaces:
under the serviceability limit state test load shall be
within the serviceability limit values appropriate to the a) exposed to severe frequent rain
b) exposed to alternate wetting and
structure. drying
c) severe condensation
d) completely immersed i n sea water
SECTION 15 e) exposed to saturated salt air i n
DURABILITY coastal area
iv) Very severe Structural steel surface exposed to:
15.1 General a) sea water spray
b) corrosive fumes
A durable steel structure is one that performs c) aggressive sub soil or ground water
satisfactorily the desired function in the working v) Extreme Structural steel surfaces exposed to:
environment under the anticipated exposure condition a) tidal zones and splash zones i n the
during its service life. without deterioration of the cross- sea
sectional areaand loss of strength due to corrosion. The b) aggressive liquid or solid chemicals
material used, the detailing, fabrication, erection and
surface protection measures should all address the
15.2.2.2 Abrasion
corrosion protection and durability requirements.
Specialist literature may be referred for durability of
15.2 Requirements for Durability surfaces exposed to abrasive action as in machinery,
conveyor belt support system, storage bins for grains
15.2.1 Shape, Size. Orientation of Members.
or aggregates.
Connections and Details
The design, fabrication and erection details of exposed
15.2.2.3 Exposure to sulphate attack and IS 9172. The main corrosion protection methods
are given below:
Appropriate coatings may be used when surfaces of
structural steel are exposed to concentration of a) Controlling the electrode potential,
sulphates (SO,) in soil, ground water, etc. b) Inhibitors, and
When exposed to very high sulphate concentrations C) Inorganic/metal coatings or organiclpaint
of more than 2 percent in soil and 5 percent in water, systems.
some form of lining such as polyethylene, 15.2.4 Surface Protection
polychloroprene sheet or surface coating based on
asphalt, chlorinated rubber, epoxy or polymethane 15.2.4.1In the case of mild exposure, a coat of primer
material should be used to completely avoid access of after removal of any loose mill scale may be adequate.
the solution to the steel surface. As the exposure condition becomes more critical, more
elaborate surface preparations and coatings become
15.2.3 Corrosion Protection Methods necessary. In case of extreme environmental
The methods of corrosion protection are governed by classification, protection shall be as per specialist
literature. Table 29 gives guidance to protection of
actual environmental conditions as specified in IS 9077
steelwork for different desired lives.

Table 29 (a) Protection Guide for Steel Work Application -Desired Life of Coating
System in Different Environments

SI
No.
Atmospheric Condition1
Environmental Classification
- 1 2
Coating System

3
A
4 5
-
6

i) Normal inland (rural and urban 12 years 18 years 20 years About About Above
areas), mild 20 years 20 years 20 years
li) Polluted inland (high airborne 10 years 15 years 12 years About 15-20 years Above
sulphur dioxide), moderate 18 yeam 20 years
iii) Normal coastal (as normal inland 10 years I2 years 20 years About About Above
plus high airborne salt levels), severe 20 years 20 years 20 years
iv) Polluted coastal (as polluted inland 8 years 10 years 10 years About 15-20 years Above
plus high airborne salt levels), very 15 yean 20 years
severe or extreme

Table 29 (b) (i) Protection Guide for Steel Work Application -Specification for Different Coating
System (Shop Applied Reatments)

-
(Clause 15.2.4.1)
~

SI Protection Coating System

.h
NO. -,

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (61 (71 (8)

i) Surface preparation Blast clean Blast clean Blast clean Blast clean Girl blast Blast clean
ii) Pre-fabrication Zinc phosphate 2 pack zinc-rich - 2 pack zinc-rich - Ethyl zinc
primer epoxy. 20 pm epoxy, 20 pm epoxy, 20 pn silicate, 20 pm
iii) Post-fabrication High-build zinc 2 pack zinc-rich Hot dip 2 pack zinc-rich Sprayed zinc or Ethyl zinc
primer phosphate epoxy, 20 pm galvanized, epoxy, 25 pm sprayed silicate, 60 ~m
modified alkyd, aluminium
85 w
60 pm
iv) Intermediate coat - High-build zinc - 2 pack epoxy Sealer Chlorinated
phosphate, 25 p micaceous iron rubber alkyd.
oxide 35 W
v) TOP ant - - - 2 pack epoxy Sealer -
rnicaceous iron
oxide, 85 pm
 Table 29 (b) (ii) Protection Guide for Steel Work Application -Specification for Different Coating
System (Site Applied Treatments)
(Clause 15.2.4.1)
--

SI Protection Coating System

NO.
,--
A
---.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i Surface As necessary As necessary No site As necessaty No site As necessary
preparation treatment treatment
ii) Primer Touch in Touch in - - - Touch in

iii) Intermediate - Modified - Touch In - High-build

coat Alkyd micaceous iron
Micaceaus oxide
imn oxide, Chlorinated
50 pm tubber
Micaceous,
75 pm
iv) Top coat High-build Modified - High-build - High-build iron
Alkyd finish, Alkyd chlorinated oxide Chlorinated
60~m Micaceous rubber rubber, 75 pin
iron oxide,
50 pm

15.2.4.2 Steel surfaces shall be provided with at least SECTION 16

one coat of primer immediately after its surface FIRE RESISTANCE
preparation such as by sand blasting to remove all mill
scale and rust and to expose the steel. 16.1 Requirements
15.2.4.3 Steel without protective coating shall not be The requirements shall apply to steel building elements
stored for long duration in out door environment. designed to exhibit a required fire-resistance level
(FRL) as per the relevant specifications.
15.2.4.9 Surfaces to transfer forces by friction as in
HSFG connections shall not be painted. However it 16.1.1 For protected steel members and connections,
shall be ensured that moisture is not trapped on such the thickness of protection material (hi) shall be greater
surfaces after pretensioning of bolts by proper than or equal to that required to give a period of
protective measures. structural adequacy (PSA) greater than or equal to the
required FRL.
15.2.4.5 Members to be assembled by welding shall
not be pre-painted at regions adjacent to the location 16.1.2 For unprotected steel members and connections,
of such welds. However, after welding, appropriate the exposed surface area to mass ratio (ks,) shall be
protective coatings shall be applied in the region, as less than or equal to that required to give a PSA equal
required by the exposure conditions. If the contact to the required FRL.
surfaces cannot he properly protected against ingress
of moisture by surfacecoating, they may be completely 16.2 Fire Resistance Level
sealed by appropriate welds. The required FRL shall he as prescribed in IS 1641,
15.2.4.6 Pre-painted members shall be protected IS 1642 and IS 1643, as appropriate or in building
against abrasion of the coating during transportation, specifications or as required by the user or the city
handling and erection. ordinance. The FRL specified in terms of the duration
(in minutes) of standard fire load without collapse
15.2.5 Special Steels depends upon:
Steels with special alloying elements and production a) the purpose for which structure is used, and
process to obtain better corrosion resistance may be
b) the time taken to evacuate in case of fire.
used as per specialist literature.
 16.3 Period of Structural Adequacy (PSA) Q 1.2
a 'i
16.3.1 The calculation of PSA involves: 0 1.0 URVE 2 : MODULUS OF
Q c ELASTICITY RATIO
a) Calculation of the strength of the element as 0.8
a function of temperature of the element and
the determination of limiting temperature; 0.6
E8
b) Calculation of the thermal response of the
element, that is calculation of the variation of
" 0.4

the temperature of the element or the parts of

22
0.2
the element with time, when exposed to fire; 0
I
and 0
0 200 400 600 BOO 1000 1200
C) Determination of PSA at which the
temperature of the element or parts of the
element reaches the limiting temperature.
16.3.2Determination of Period of Structural Adequacy
The period of structural adequacy (PSA) shall be
determined using one of the following methods: For temperature less than 215'C no reduction in the
yield stress need to be considered.
a) By calculation:
16.4.2 Variation of Modulus of Elasticity with
1) determining the limiting temperature of Temperature
the steel (T,) in accordance with 16.5 ;
and The influence of temperature on the modulus of
elasticity shall be taken as follows for structuresof mild
2) determining the PSA as the time (in min)
from the start of the test to the time at steels and high strength low alloy steels:
which the limiting steel temperature (t)
is attained, in accordance with 16.6 for
protected members and 16.7 for
unprotected members.
b) By direct application of a single test in
accordance with 16.8; or
C) By calculation of the temperature of the steel
member by using a rational method of when 0°C c T 5 600°C
analysis confirmed by test data or by methods
available in specialist literature.
16.4 Variation of Mechanical Properties of Steel
with Temperature
when 600°C < T 5 1 000°C
16.4.1 Variation of Yield Stress with Temperature
E (T) = modulus of elasticity of steel at T OC,
The influence of temperature on the yield stress of steel and
shall be taken as follows for structures of mild steels E(20) = modulus of elasticity of steel at 20°C
and high strength low alloy steels: (room temperature).
This relationship is shown by curve 2 in Fig. 24.
16.4.3 For special steel with higher temperature
resistance, such as TMCP steels, the manufacturer's
where recommendation shall be used to obtain the variation
fy(7) = yield stress of steel at T°C, of yield strengthandmodulus of elasticity of steel with
temperature.
4 2 0 ) =yield stress of steel at 20°C (room
temperature), and 16.5 Limiting Steel Temperature
T = temperature of the steel in OC. The limiting steel temperature (T,) in degree Celsius
This relationship is shown by Curve 1 in Fig. 24. in the case of ordinary steels, shall be calculated as
follows:
 hi
t=ko+kihi+k,--+k,T+k,hiT+k,I-,k,- h.T T
where k5m k,, ksm
r, = ratio of the design action on the member where
under fire to the design capacity of the I = time from the start of the test, in min;
member (R, = R,ly,) at room k, to k, = regression coeff'icients from test data
temperature. (see 16.6.2.2.);
R ,R, = design strength and ultimate strength of hi = thickness of fire protection material,
the member at room temperature In mm;
respectively, and T = steel temperature, in degrees celsius
y, = partial safety factor for strength. obtained from test as given
The design action under fire shall consider the in 16.6.1, T > 250°C; and
following: k,, = exposed surface area to mass ratio, in
a ) Reduced bond likely under fire, and lo3mm21kg.
b) Effects of restraint to expansion of the 16.6.2.2 In lieu of test results, the values for coefficients
elements during fire. in Table 30 may be used in the equation 16.6.2.1 when
the test satisfies the conditions specified in 16.6.2.3.
Limiting steel temperature for special steels may be
appropriately calculated using the thermal Table 30 Regression Coefficients, k
characteristics of the material obtained from the
supplier of the steel. ko kt k, k, k~ ks ka

16.6 Temperature Increase with Time in Protected

Members
16.6.1 The time (I) at which the limiting temperature 16.6.2.3 Lin~itarionsand conditions on use of
(T,) is attained shall be determined by calculation on regression analysis
the basis of a suitable series of fire tests in accordance
with 16.6.2 or from the results of a single test in Test data to be utilized in accordance with 16.6.2.1,
accordance with 16.6.3. shall satisfy the following:

16.6.1.1 For beams and for all members with a four- -a) Steel members shall be protected with board,
sided fire exposure condition, the limiting temperature sprayed blanket or similar insulation materials
(T,) shall be taken as the average of all of the having a dry density less than 1 000 kglml;
temperatures measured at the thermocouple locations b) All tests shall incorporate the same fire
on all sides. protection system;
16.6.1.2 For columns with a three-sided fire exposure c) All members shall have the same fire exposure
condition;
condition, the limiting temperature (T,) shall be taken
as the average of the temperatures measured at the d) Test series shall include at least nine tests;
thermocouple locations on the face farthest from the e) Test series may include prototypes which have
wall. Alternatively, the temperatures from members not been loaded provided that stickability has
with a four-sided fire exposure condition and having been demonstrated; and
the same surface area to mass ratio may be used. f) All members subject to a three-sided fire
exposure condition shall be within a group in
16.6.2 Ternperat~ireBased on Test Series
accordance with 16.9.
Calculation of the variation of steel temperature with
The regression equation obtained for one fire protection
time shall be by interpolation of the results of a series
system may be applied to another system using the
of fire tests using the regression analysis equation
same fire protection material and the same fireexposure
specified in 16.6.2.1, subject to the limitations and
condition provided that stickability has been
conditions of 16.6.2.3.
demonstrated for the second system.
16.6.2.1 Regression analysis
A regression equation obtained using prototypes with
The relationship between temperature (T)and time (t) a four-sided fire exposure condition may be applied to
for a series of tests on a group shall be calculated by a member with a three-sided fire exposure condition
least-square regression as follows: provided that stickability has been demonstrated for
the three-sided case.
 1s 800 :2007
16.6.3 Temperature Based on Single Test a) Conditions, specified in 16.6.3 are satisfied,
The variation of steel temperature with time measured b) Conditions of support are the same as the
in a standard fire test may be used without modification prototype and the restraints are not less
provided: favourable than those of the prototype, and
c) Ratio of the design load for fire to the design
a) Fire protection system is the same as the capacity of the member is less than or equal
prototype;
to that of the prototype.
b) Fire exposure condition is the same as the
prototype; 16.9 Three-Sided Fire Exposure Condition
c) Fire protection material thickness is equal to Members subject to a three-sided fire exposure
or greater than that of the prototype;
condition shall be considered in separate groups unless
d) Surface area to mass ratio is equal to or less the following conditions are satisfied:
than that of the prototype;
. . and
e) Where the prototype has been submitted to a a) The characteristics of the members of a group
standard fire test in an unloaded condition, as given below, shall not vary from one
stickability has been separately demonstrated. another by more than

16.6.4 Parameters of Importance in the Standard Fire highest in group

I) Concrete density:
Test lowest in group
a) Specimen type, loading, configuration; 51.25, and
b) Exposed surface area to mass ratio; largest in group
C) Insulation type, thermal properties and 2) Effective thickness (h,):
smallest in group
thickness; and
51.25.
d) Moisture content of the insulation material. where the effective thickness (h,) is equal to
16.7 T e m p e r a t u r e I n c r e a s e with T i m e in the cross-sectional area excluding voids per
Unprotected Members unit width, as shown in Fig. 25A.

The time (1) at which the limiting temperature (T,) is b) Rib voids shall either he:
attained shall be calculated using the following 1) all open; or
equations: 2) all blocked as shown in Fig. 258.
a) Three-sided fire exposure condition c) Concrete slabs may incorporate permanent
steel deck formwork.
0.4331; ~,
t=5.2+0.0221T+ - 16.10 Special Considerations ,
k,, /j
b) Four-sided fire exposure condition 16.10.1 Connections
Connections shall be protected with the maximum
0.2131;
t = 4.7 + 0.026 3 T + - thickness of fireprotection material required for any
ksm of the members framing into the connection to
where achieve their respective fire-resistance levels. This
thickness shall be maintained over all connection
t = time from the start of the test, in min,
components, including bolt heads, welds and splice
T = steel temperature, in 'C, 500 OC plates,
5 T < 750°C. and
k,, = exposed surface area to mass 16.10.2 Web Penetrations
ratio, 2x10' mm2/kg 5 k,, < 35 The thickness of fire protection material at and adjacent
x lo3 mm2/kg. to web penetrations shall be the greatest of that
For temperatures below 500°C, linear interpolation when:
shall be used, based on the time at 500°C and an initial a) area above the penetration is considered as a
temperature of 20°C at t equals 0. three-sided fire exposure condition (k.-,)
. n,,,..

16.8 Determination of PSA from a Single Test (see Fig. 26).

b) area below the penetration is considered as a
The period of structural adequacy (PSA) determined four-sided fire exposure condition (k,,,)
from a single test may be applied without modification (see Fig. 26), and
provided:
 C) section as a whole is considered as a three- 16.11 Fire Resistance Rating
sided fire condition ( k s m )
The fire resistance rating of various building
(see Fig. 26). components such as walls, columns, beams. and floors
This thickness shall be applied overthe full beamdepth are given in Table 31 and Table 32. Fire damage
and shall extend on each side of the penetration for a assessment of various structural elements of the
distance at least equal to the beam depth and not less building and adequacy of the structural repairs can be
than 300 mm. done by the fire resistance rating for encased steel
column and beam (Table 31 and Table 32).

25A Effective Thickness

VOID BLOCKED WlTH

-
CONCRETE SLAB
FIRE PROTECTION
MATERIAL
7

SIDE VIEW CROSS SECTION

258 Blocking of Rib Voids

~4 8 - 4
Side View of Beam with Web Penetration

SECTION A-A SECTION 8-8

FIG.26 WEB PENETRATION

 Table 31 Encased Steel Columns, 203 rnm x 203 mm
(Protection Applied on Four Sides)
(Clause 16.1 1)
SI Nature of Construction and Materials Minimum Dimensions Exeluding Any Finish, for a Fire
No. Resistance of
mm

(1) (2)
i) Hollow protection (without an air cavity over the flanges):
a) Metal lathing with trowelled lightweight aggregate gypsum
plaster "
b) Plasterboard with 1.6 mm wire binding at 100 mm pitch,
finished with lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster less
than the thickness specified:
1) 9.5 mm plaster board
2) 19 mm plaster board
c) Asbestos insulating boards, thickness of board:
1) Single thickness of board, with 6 mm cover fillets at
transversejoints
2) Two layers, of total thickness
d) Solid bricks of clay, composition or sand lime, reinforced
in every horizontal joint, unpiastered
e) Aerated concrete blocks
0 Solid blocks of lightweight concrete hollow protection
(with an air cavity over the flanges)
ii) Asbestos insulating board screwed to 25 mm asbestos battens
iii) Solid protections
a) Concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered):
1) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced "
2) Concrete assumed to be load bearing
b) Lightweight concrete, not leaner than 1 :2 : 4 mix (unplast-
ered) concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced "
"So fixed or designed. - . as to allow full uenetration for mechanical bond.
~ ~ ~ -
', Kr nfdr;cment shall runs~stof n;;I b~ndingir,ir:ndl leis tndn 2 3 mnl d!omctcr. ur 3, steel incrh weighing not lecr lhan U 5 !.dn12. In
I C .C I I U ~the
~ J ~ C KP ~~J L , spi.tng df Inc rcirlf~rcementshall n.ll r.xcr.rJ201) (nrn is m y dlrc;lino.

SECTION 17 connecting steel to steel should preferably be not

FABRICATION AND ERECTION greater than 2.0 mm at each end. The erection clearance
at ends of beams without web cleats should be not more
17.1 General than 3 mm at each end. Where for practical reasons,
Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures shall greater clearance is necessary, suitably designedseating
should be provided.
conform to IS 7215. Tolerances for erection of steel
structures shall conform to IS 12843. For general 17.2.2.1 In bearing type of connections, the holes may
guidance on fabrication by welding, reference may be be made not more than 1.5 mm greater than the
made to IS 9595. diameter of the bolts in case of bolts of diameter less
than 25 mm and not more than 2 mrn in case of bolts
17.2 Fabrication Procedures of diameter more than 25 mm, unless otherwise
17.2.1 Straightening specified by the engineer. The hole diameter in base
plates shall not exceed the anchor bolt diameter by
Material shall be straightened or formed to the specified more than 6 mm.
configuration by methods that will not reduce the
properties of the material below the values used in 17.2.2.2 In friction type of connection clearance may
design. Local application of pressure at room or at be maintained, unless specified otherwise in the design
elevated temperature or other thermal means may be document.
used for straightening, provided the above is satisfied. 17.2.3 Cutting
17.2.2 Clearances Cutting shall beeffected by sawing, shearing, cropping,
The erection clearance for cleated ends of members, machining or thermal cutting process. Shearing,
 Table 32 Encased Steel Beams, 406 mm x 176 mm
(Protection Applied on Three Sides)
(Clause 16.11 )

SI Nature nfConstructinn and Materials Minimum Thickness of Protection for a Fire

NO. Resistance of
mm

r
Kh lh 1Kh 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Hollow protection (without an air cavity beneath the lower flanges):
a) Metal lathing with trowelled lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 'I 13 13 15 20 25 -
b) Plasterboard with 1.6 inm wire binding at 100 mm pitch, finished with
lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster less than the thickness specified"
1) 9.5 mm plaster board 10 10 I5 - - -
-
2) 19 mm plaster board 10 10 13 20 -
e) Asbestos insulating boards, thickness ofboard:
1) Single thickness o f b o d , with 6 mm cover fillets a t m r v e n e joints
- - 19 25 - -
2) 'Two layers, oftotal thickness - - - - 38 50
ii) Hollow protection (with an air cavity below the lower flange)
a) Asbestos insulating hoard screwed to 25 mm asbestos battens 9 12 - - - -
iii) Solid protections
a) Concrete, not leaner than 1 2 4 mix (unplastered):
I) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced " 25 25 . 25 25 50 75
2) Concrete assumed to be load bearing 50 50 50 50 75 75
b) Lightweight concrete. not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered) ' 25 25 25 25 40 60
0 So fixed or designed, as to allow full penetration for mechanical bond
Where wire binding cannot be used, expert advice should be sought regarding alternative methods of support to enable the lower edges
of the plasterboard to be fixed together and to the lower flange, and for the top edge of the plasterboard to be held in position.
''Reinforcement shalt consist of steel binding wire not less than 2.3 mm in diameter, or a steel mesh weighing not less than 0.5 kdm2. In
concrete protection, the spacing of the reinforcement shall not exceed 200 mm in any direction.
Concrete not assumed to be Icad bearing, reinforced.

cropping and gas cutting shall be clean, reasonably by machining, so that all metal that has been hardened
square, and free from any distortion. Should the by flame is removed. Hand flame cutting may be
inspector find it necessary, the edges shall be ground permitted only subject to the approval of the inspecting
after cutting. Planning or finishing of sheared or gas- authority.
cut edges of plates or shapes shall not be required, Except where the material is subsequently joined by
unless specially noted on drawing or included in shall be transmitted through a gas
welding, no
stipulated edge preparation for welding or when
cut surface.
specifically required in the following section.
Thermally cut free edges, which shall be subject to
Re-entrant comers shall be free from notches and shall calculated static tensile stress shall be free from round
have largest practical radii with a minimum radius of
bottomgouges greater than mmdeep, Gouges greater
15 mm. than 5 mm deep and notches shall be removed bv
17.2.3.1 Shearing grinding.
Shearing of items over 16 mm thick to be galvanized 17.2.4 Holing
and subject to tensile force or bending moment shall
17.2.4.1 Holes through more than one thickness of
not be carried out, unless the item is stress relieved
material for members, such as compoundstanchion and
subsequently. girder flanges, shall be where possible, drilled after the
The use of sheared edges in the tension area shall be members are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted
avoided in location subject to plastic hinge rotation at together. Around hole for a bolt shalleither be machine
factored loading. flame cut, or drilled full size, or sub-punched 3 mm
undersize and reamed to Size or punched full size.
17.2.3.2 Thermal cut tin^-
Hand flame cutting of a bolt hole shall not be permitted
Gas cutting of high tensile steel by mechanically except as a site rectification measure for holes in
controlled torch may be permitted, provided special
column base plates.
care is taken to leave sufficient metal to be removed
 17.2.4.2Punching 17.3 Assembly
A punched hole shall be permitted only in material All parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted
whose yield stress V;) does not exceed 360 MPa and and rigidly held together during assembly.
where thickness does not exceed (5 6 0 0 6 ) mm. In
cyclically loaded details, punching shall be avoided in The component parts shall be assembled and aligned
plates with thickness greater than 12 mm. in such a manner that they are neither twisted nor
otherwise damaged, and shall be so prepared that the
For greater thickness and cyclically loaded details, specified camber, if any, is provided.
holes shall be either drilled from the solid or sub-
punched or sub-drilled and reamed. 17.3.1 Holes in Assembly

The die for all sub-punched holes or the drill for all When holes are drilled in one operation through two
sub-drilled holes shall be at least 3 mm smaller than or more separableparts, theseparts, when so specified
the required diameter of finished hole. by the engineer, shall be separated after drilling and
the burrs removed.
17.2.4.3 Oversize holes
Matching boles for rivets and black bolts shall register
A special plate washer of minimum thickness 4 mm with each other so that a gauge of 1.5 mm or 2.0 mm
shall be used under the nut, if the hole diameteris larger (as the case may he, depending on whether the diameter
than the bolt diameter by 3 mm or more. of the rivet or bolt is less than or more than 25 mm)
less in diameter than the diameter of the hole will pass
Oversize hole shall not exceed 1.25d or (d+8) mm in
diameter, were d is the nominal bolt diameter, in mm. freely through the assembled members in the direction
at right angle to such members.
A short slotted hole shall not exceed the appropriate
hole size in width and 1.33din length. A long slotted Drilling done during assembly to align holes shall not
hole shall not exceed the appropriate hole size in width distort the metal or enlarge the holes.
and 2.5d in length. If the slot length is larger than those Holes in adjacent part shall match sufficiently well to
specified, shear transfer in the direction of slot is not permit easy entry of bolts. If necessaly, holes except
admissible even in friction type of connection. oversize or slotted holes may heenlarged to admit bolts,
Slotted holes shall be punched either in one operation by moderate amount of reaming.
or else formed by punching or drilling two round holes 17.3.2 Thread Length
apart and completed by high quality mechanically
controlled flame cutting and dressing to ensure that When design is based on bolts with unthreaded shanks
bolt can freely travel the full length of the slot. in the shear plane, appropriate measures shall he
specified to ensure that, after allowing for tolerance,
17.2.4.4 Fitled bolt holes neither the threads nor the thread run-out be in the shear
Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a plane,
diameter equal to the nominal diameter of the shank The length of bolt shall he such that at least one clear
or barrel subject to tolerance specified in IS 919 (Parts thread shows above the nut and at least one thread plus
1 and 2). Preferably, parts to be connected with close the thread run out is clear beneath the nut after
tolerance or barrel bolts shall be firmly held together tightening. One washer shall be provided under the
by tacking bolts or clamps and the holes drilled through rotated part.
all the thicknesses at one operation and subsequently
reamed to size. All holes not drilled through all 17.3.3Assembly S~rbjectedto Vibration
thicknesses at one operation shall be drilled to a smaller When non-preloaded bolts are used in a structure
size and reamed out after assembly. Where this is not subject to vibration, thenuts shall be secured by locking
practicable, the parts shall be drilled and reamed devices or other mechanical means. The nuts of
separately through hard bushed steel jigs. preloaded bolts may be assumed to be sufficiently
17.2.4.5 Holes for rivets or bolts shall not be formed secured by the normal tightening procedure.
generally by gas cutting process. However, advanced 17.3.4 Washers
gas cutting processes such as plasma cutting may be
used to make holes in statically loaded members only. Washers are not normally required on non-pseloaded
In cyclically loaded members subjected to tensile bolts, unless specified otherwise. Tapered washers shall
stresses which are vulnerable under fatigue, gas cutting be used where the surface is inclined at more than 3'to
-
shall not be used unless subsequent reaming is done ro
remove the material in the heat affected zone around '
a plane perpendicular to the bolt axis.
Hardened washer shall be used for preloaded bolts or
the hole. the nut, whichever is to be rotated.

112
 I

11 material within the grip of the bolt shall be steel and tbat the final dimensions are within
nd no compressible material shall be permitted in the tolerances.
17.7 Machining of Butts, Caps and Bases
17.4 Riveting 17.7.1 Column splices and butt joints of struts and
17.4.1 Rivets shall be heated uniformly throughout compression members, depending on contact for stress
their length, without burning or excessive scaling, and transmission, shall be accurately machined and close-
shall he of sufficient length to provide a head of butted over the whole section with a clearance not
standard dimensions. These shall, when driven, exceeding 0.2 mm locally, at any place. Sum of all
completely fill the holes and, if countersunk, the such clearance shall not be more than 30 percent of
countersinking shall be fully filled by the rivet. If the contact area for stress transmission.In column caps
required, any protrusion of the countersunk head shall and bases, the ends of shafts together with the attached
be dressed off flush. gussets, angles, channels,etc; after connecting together
should be accurately machined so that clearance
17.4.2 Riveted member shall have all parts firmly between the contact surfaces shall not exceed 2 mm
drawn and held together before and during riveting, locally, subject further to the condition that sum total
and special care shall be taken in this respect for all of all such clearance shall not exceed 30 percent of the
single-riveted connections. For multiple riveted total contact area for stress transmission. Care should
connections, a service bolt shall be provided in every be taken that these gussets, connecting angles or
third or fourth hole. channels are fixed with such accuracy that they are
17.4.3Wherever practicable, machine riveting shall be not reduced in thickness by machining by more than
carried out by using machines of the steady pressure 2.0 mm.
tY PC. 17.7.2 Where sufficient gussets and rivets or welds are
17.4.4 All loose, burned or otherwise defective rivets provided to transmit the entire loading (xee Section 4),
shall be cut out and replaced before the structure is the column ends need not be machined.
loaded, and special care shall be taken to inspect all 17.7.3 Slab Bases and Caps
single riveted connections.
Slab bases and slabcaps, except when cut from material
17.4.5 Special care shall be taken in heating and driving with true surfaces, shall be accurately machined over
long rivets. the bearing surfaces and shall be in effective contact
17.5 Bolting with the end of the stanchion, the hearing face which
is to be grouted to fit tightly at both top and bottom,
17.5.1 In all cases where the full bearing area of the unless welds are provided to transmit the entire column
bolt is to be developed, the bolt shall be provided with face.
a washer of sufficient thickness under the nut to avoid
any threaded portion of the bolt being within the 17.7.4To facilitate grouting, sufficient gap shall be left
thickness or the parts bolted together, unless accounted between the base plates and top of pedestal and holes
for in design. shall be provided where necessary in stanchion bases
for the escape ofair.
17.5.2 Pre-tensioned bolts shall be subjected to initial
tension (the proof stress) by an appropriate pre- 17.8 Painting
calibrated method. 17.8.1 Painting shall be done in accordance with
IS 1477 (Parts 1 and 2).
-
17.6.1 Welding shall be in accordance with IS 816, 17.8.2 All surfaces, which are to be painted, oiled or
IS 819, IS 1024, IS 1261, IS 1323 and IS 9595, as otherwise treated, shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned
appropriate. to remove all loose scale and loose rust.

17.6.2 For welding of any particular type of joint, 17.8.3 Shop contact surfaces need not be painted unless
welders shall give evidence acceptable to the purchaser specified. If so specified, they shall be brought together
while the paint is still wet.
of having satisfactorily completed appropriate tests as
prescribed inIS 817, IS 1393, IS 7307 (Part I), IS 7310 17.8.4 Surfaces not in contact, but inaccessible after
(Part 1) and IS 73 18 (Part I), as relevant. shop assembly, shall receive the full specified
17.6.3 Assembly and welding shall be canied out in protective treatment before assembly. This does not
such a way to minimize distortion and residual stress apply to the interior of sealed hollow sectioas.
 17.8.5 Chequered plates shall be painted but the details fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with the
of painting shall be specified by the purchaser. provisions of this standard.
17.8.6 In case of surfaces to be welded, the steel shall 17.12.2 Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall
not he painted or metal coated within a suitable distance be made at the place of manufacture prior to dispatch
of any edge to be welded, if the paint specified or the and shall be conducted so as not to interfere
metal coating is likely to be harmful to welders or unnecessarily with the operation of the work.

I
impair the quality of the welds.
17.12.3 The manufacturer shall guarantee compliance
17.8.7 Welds and adjacent parent metal shall not be with the provisions of this standard, if required to do
painted prior to de-slagging, inspection and approval. so by the purchaser.
17.8.8 Parts to be encased in concrete shall not be 17.12.4 Should any sttucture or part of a stmcture be
painted or oiled. found not to comply with any of the provisions of this
standard, it shall beliable to rejection. No structureor
17.8.9 Contact surface in friction type connection shall part of the structure, once rejected shall be resubmitted
not be painted in advance. for test, except in cases where the purchaser or his
17.9 Marking author~zedrepresentative considers the defect as
rectifiable.
Each piece of steel work shall he distinctly marked
17.12.5 Defects, which may appear during fabrication,
before dispatch, in accordance with amarking diagram
shall be made good with the consent of and according
and shall hear such other marks as will facilitate
to the procedure laid down by the inspecting authority.
erection.
17.12.6 All gauges and templates necessary to satisfy
17.10 Shop Erection the inspection authority shall be supplied by the
17.10.1 The steel work shall be temporarily shop manufacturer. The inspecting authority may, at his
erected complete or as arranged with the inspection discretion, check the test ;esults obtained at the
agency so that accuracy of fit may he checked before manufacturer's works by independent testing at outside
dispatch. The parts shall he shop assembled with laboratory, and should the material so tested be found
sufficient numbers of parallel drifts to bring and keep to be unsatisfactory, the cost of such tests shall be borne
the parts in place. by the manufacturer. and if found satisfactory, the cost
shall be borne by the purchaser.
17.10.2In the case of parts drilled orpunched, through
steel jigs with hushes resulting in allsimilar parts being 17.13 Site Erection 1
interchangeable, the steelwork may be shop erected in
such position as arranged with the inspection agency.
17.13.1 Plant and Equipment 11
The suitability and capacity of all plant and equipment i
17.10.3 In case of shop fabrication using numerically used for erection shall be to the satisfaction of the i
controlled machine data generated by computer engineer. i
software (like CAD), the shop erection may be
dispensed with at the discretion of the inspector. 17.13.2 Storing and Handling
All structural steel should be so stored and handled at
I' t
17.11 Packing 4
the site that the members are not subjected to excessive
:
All projecting plates or bars and all ends of members stresses and damage by corrosion due to exposure to
at joints shall he stiffened, all straight bars and plates environment.
shall be bundled, all screwed ends and machined
surfaces shall he suitably packed and all rivets, bolts,
17.13.3 Setting Our
The positioning and levelling of all steelwork, the
li
nuts, washers and small and loose parts shall be packed
separately in cases, so as to prevent damage or plumbing of stanchions and the placing of every part
distortion during transit. of the structure with accuracy shall be in accordance
with the approved drawings and to the satisfaction of
17.12 Inspection and Testing the engineer in accordance with the deviation permitted
17.12.1 The inspecting authority shall have free access below.
at all reasonable times to those parts of the
manufacturer's works which are concerned with the
17.13.3.1 Erection tolerances
Unloaded steel structure, as erected, shall satisfy the
!
fabrication of the steelwork and shall he afforded all
criteria specified in Table 33 within the specified
reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the
tolerance limits.
Each criterion given in the table shall be considered as tested wire rope slings of correct size. The devices
a separate requirement, to be satisfied independent of should be well maintained and operated by experienced
any other tolerance criteria. The erection tolerances operators.
specified in Table 33 apply to the following reference
points: Table 34 Straightness Tolerances Incorporated in
Design Rules
a) For a column, the actual centre point of the (Clause 7.13.3.1)
column at each floor level a@ at the base,
excluding any base-plate or cap-plate. The SI Criterion Permitted Deviation
level of the base plate on pedestal shall be so No.
as to avoid contact with soil and corrosive --
(3)
environment; and I) Straightness of a column (or 0.001L generally, and
other compression member) O.OO2L for members with
b) For a beam, the actual centre point of the top between points which will be hollow cross-sections;
surface at each end of the beam, excluding laterally restrained on where, L is the length
any end-plate. completion of erection between points which will
be laterally restrained
Tahle 33 Normal Tolerances After Erection ii) Straightness o f a 0.001L generally, and
compression flange of a O.OO2L for members with
beam, relative to the weak hollow cross-sections;
SI Criterion Permitted Deviation axis, between points, which where, L is the length
NO. will be laterally restrained on between points which will
completion of erection. be laterally restrained
(1) (2) (3)
i) Deviation of distance 5 mm
between adjacent columns
17.13.4.2 Oxygen and acetylene cylinders and their
ii) Inclination o f a column in a O.OOZh,
multi-storey building where, h, is the storey height hoses shall have distinctive colours. Cylinders should
between adjacent floor be stored in upright position in well-ventilated rooms
levels or in open air, not exposed to flames, naked lights or
iii) Deviation of location of a 0.003 5 E hdno5 extreme heat and should also be in upright position
column in a multi-storey where, ha is the total height
building at any floor level from the base to the floor when they are being used. All gas cutting works shall
from a vertical line level concerned and n is the be done only by experienced skilled gas cutters,
through the intended number of storeys fmm the equipped with gloves, boots, aprons, goggles and good
location of the column base to the floor level
base concerned cutting sets of approved make.
iv) Inclination of a column in 0.003 5h. 17.13.4.3 While doing any welding work, it should be
a single storey building, where, h. is the height of the
(not supporting a crane column ensured that the welding machine is earthed and the
gantry) other than a ponal welding cables are free from damage. . The welder and
frame his assistant shall use a face shield or head shield with
v) Inclination of the column Mean: O.OO2h.
of a portal frame (not individual:O.OlOh, a welding lens and clear cover glass and their hands,
.. -
suoooninsacranegantry) . ~
where h. is the height of the
column
legs and bodies shall be well protected bv leather
shoes and aprons. Combustible materials should
be kept away from the sparks and globules of molten
metals generated in any arc welding. In case of welding
The straightness tolerances specified in Table 34 have in a confined place, it should be provided with an
been assumed in the derivation of the design stress for exhaust system to take care of the harmful gases, fumes
the relevant type of member. Where the curvature and dusts generated.
exceeds these values, the effect of additional curvature
on the design calculations shall be reviewed. 17.13.4.4 In addition to precautions against all the
hazards mentioned above, erection workers shall also
A tension member shall not deviate from its correct be protected in the following manner:
position relative to the members to which it is
connected by more than 3 mm along any setting axis. a) All workers shall wear helmets and shall also
be provided with gloves and shoes. In addition
17.13.4 Safefy During Fabrication and Erection those working at heights shall use safety belts.
17.13.4.1 All steel materials including fabricated b) All structures shall be so bracediguyed during
structures, either at fabrication shop or at erection site, erection that there is no possibility of collapse
shall be handled only by a worker skilled in such jobs; before erection work is completed.
where necessary with load tested lifting devices, having c) Warning signs such as 'Danger', 'Caution'.
 '440 volts', 'Do not smoke', 'Look ahead', 17.14.3 Where the steel has received a metal coating
etc; should be displayed at appropriate in the shop, this coating shall becompleted on site so
places. as to be continuous over any welds and site rivets or
bolts, subject to the approval of the engineer. Painting
17.13.4.5 For detailed safety precautions during
erection, reference shall be made to IS 7205. on site may complete protection. Bolts, which have
been galvanized or similarly treated. are exempted from
17.13.5 Field Connections this requirement.
17.13.5.1 Field riveting 17.14.4 Surface, which will be inaccessible after site
assembly, shall receive the full-specified protective
Rivets driven at the site shall be heated and driven with
treatment before assembly.
the same care as those driven in the shop.
17.14.5 Site painting should not be done in frosty or
17.13.5.2 Field bolting
foggy weather, or when humidity is such as to cause
Field bolting shall be carried out with the same care as condensation on the surfaces to be painted.
required for shop bolting.
17.15 Bedding Requirement
17.13.5.3 Fillet welding
17.15.1 Bedding shall be carried out with Portland
Field assembly and welding shall be executed in cement grout or mortar, as described under 17.15.4 or
accordance with the requirements for shop fabrications fine cement concrete in accordance with IS 456.
excepting such as manifestly apply to shop conditions
17.15.2 For multi-storeyed buildings, this operation
only. Where the steel has been delivered painted, the
shall not be carried out until a sufficient number of
paint shall be removed for a distance of at least SO mm
bottom lengths of stanchions have been properly lined,
on either side of the joint.
leveled and plumbed and sufficient floor beams are in
17.14 Painting After ~ r e c t i o n position.
17.14.1 Before painting of such steel which is delivered 17.15.3 Whatever method is employed. the operation
unpainted is commenced, all surfaces to be painted shall not be carried out until the steelwork has been
shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned from all loose scale finally levelled and plumbed, stanchion bases being
and rust, as required by the surface protection supported meanwhile by steel wedges or nuts; and
specification. immediately before grouting, the space under the steel
shall be thoroughly cleaned.
17.14.2 The specified protective treatment shall be
completed after erection. All rivet and bolt heads and 17.15.4 Bedding of structure shall be carried out with
the site welds after de-slagging shall be cleaned. grout or mortar, which shall be of adequate strength
Damaged or deteriorated paint surfaces shall first be and shall completely fill the space to be grouted and
made good with the same type of paint as the shop shall either he placed under pressure or by ramming
coat. Where specified, surfaces which will be in contact against fixed supports. The grouts or mortar used shall
after site assembly, shall receive a coat of paint be non~shrinkingvariety.
(in addition to any shop priming) and shall be brought
together while the paint is still wet. No painting shall 17.16 Steelwork Tenders and Contracts
be used on contact surfaces in the friction connection, A few recommendations are given in Annex G for
unless specified otherwise by the design document. general information.
 ANNEX A
(Clause 1.1)
LIST OF REFERRED INDIAN STANDARDS

IS No. Title IS No. TUle

456 : 2000 Plain and reinforced concrete - I030 : I998 Carbon steel castings for general
Code of practice (fourth revision) engineering purposes Vifth revision)
513 : 1994 Cold-rolled low carbon steel sheets 1079 : 1994 Hot rolled carbon steel sheets and
and strips (fourth revision) strips -Specification Vifth revrsron)
801 : 1975 Code of practice for use of cold- 1148 : 1982 Specification for hot-rollednvet bars
formed light gauge steel structural (up to 40 mm diameter) for structural
members in general building purposes (third revision)
construction (first revision) 1149 : 1982 High tensile steel rivet bars for
808 : 1989 Dimensions for hot-rolled steel structural purposes (third revision)
beam, column, channel and angle 1261 : 1959 Code of practice for seam welding
sections (third revision) in mild steel
813 : 1986 Scheme of symbols for welding 1278 : 1972 Specification for filler rods and wires
814 : 2004 Covered electrodes for manual metal for gas welding (second revision)
arc welding of carbon and carbon 1323 : 1982 Code of practice for oxy-acetylene
manganese steel - Specification welding for structural work in mild
(sixth revision) steels (second revision)
816 : 1969 Code of practice for use of metal arc 1363 Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts
welding for general construction in of product grade C:
mild steel (first revision) (Part 1) : 20021 Hexagon head bolts (size range M5
817 Training of welders - Code of I S 0 4016: 1999 to M64) (fourth revision)
practice: (Part 2) : 20021 Hexagon head screws (size range M5
(Part 1) : 1992 Manual metal arc welding (second I S 0 4018:1999 to M64) (fourth revisron)
revision) (Part 3) : 19921 Hexagonnuts (size rangeM5 to M64)
(Part 2) : 1996 Oxyfuel welding (second revision) I S 0 4034: 1986 (third revision)
819 : 1957 Code of practice for resistance spot 1364 Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts
welding for light assemblies in of product grades A and B:
mild steel (Part 1) : 20021 Hexagon head bolts (s1zemngeM1.6
875 Code of practice for design loads I S 0 4014:1999 to M64) (fourth revision)
(other than earthquake) for (Part 2) : 20021 Hexagon head screws (size range
buildings and structures: I S 0 4017:1999 M1.6 to M64) (fourth revision)
(Part 1) : 1987 Dead loads - unit weights of building (Part 3) : 20021 Hexagon nuts, style 1 (size range
materials and stored materials I S 0 4032:1999 M1.6 to M64) (fourth revision) .
(second revision) (Part 4) : 20031 Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) (size
(Part 2) : 1987 Imposed loads.(second revision) I S 0 4035:1999 range M1.6 to M64) (fourth revision)
(Part 3) : 1987 Wind loads (second revision) (Part 5) : 20021 Hexagon thin nuts-Product gradeB
(Part 4) : 1987 Snow loads (second revision) I S 0 4036:1999 (unchamfered) (size range M1.6 to
(Part 5) : 1987 Special loads andload combinations M10) (fourth revision)
(second revision) 1367 Technical supply conditions for
919 I S 0 systems of limits and fits: threaded steel fasteners:
(Part 1) : 19931 Bases of tolerance, deviations and fits (Part 1) : 20021 Generalrequirementsforbolts,screws
IS0 286-1:1988 (second revision) I S 0 8992:1986 and studs (third revision)
(Part 2) : 19931 Tables of standard tolerance grades (Part2) : 20021 Tolerances for fasteners -Bolts,
IS0 286-2 :1988and limit deviations for holes and IS04759-1:2000 screws, studs and nuts - Product
shafts (first revision) grades A, B and C (third revision)
962 : 1989 code of practice for architectural and (Part 3) : 20021 Mechanical properties of fasteners
building drawings (second revision) I S 0 898-1:1999 made of carbon steel and alloy steel
1024 : 1999 Code of practice for use of welding - bolts, screws and studs (fourth
in bridges and structures subject to - revision)
dynamic loading (second revision)
1
 IS No. Title IS No. Title
(Part 5) :20021 Mechanical properties of fasteners Code of practice for painting of
IS0 898-51998 made of carbon steel and alloy steel ferrous metals in buildings:
- set screws and similar threaded (Part 1) : 1971 Pre-treatment Wrst revision)
fasteners not under tensile stresses (Part 2) : 1971 Painting (first revision)
(third revision) 1608 : 20051 Metallic maerials-Tensile testing at
(Pat 6) : 19941 Mechanical properties andtestmethods IS0 6892:1998 ambient temperatures (third revision)
IS0 898-2:1992 for nuts with specified proof loads 1641 : 1988 Code of practice for fire safety of
(third revision) buildings (general): General
(Part7) : 1980 Mechanical properties and test principles of fire grading and
methods for nuts without specified classification (first revision)
proof loads (second revision) Code of practice for fire safety of
(Part 8) : 20021 Prevailing torque type steel hexagon buildings (general): Details of
IS0 2320: 1997 nuts -Mechanical and performance construction Wrst revision)
properties (third revision) Code of practice for fire safety of
(part 9) Surface d~scontinuities buildings (general): Exposure hazard
Sec 1: 19931 Bolts, screws and studs for general (tirst revision)
IS0 6157-1:1988 application (third revision) Rolling and cutting tolerance for hot
Sec 2:1993/ Bolts, screws and studs for special rolled steel products (fourth revision)
IS0 6157-3:1988 applications (fhird revision) Specification for carbon steel billets,
(Part 10):2002/ Surface discontinuities-Nuts (third blooms, slabs and bars for forgings
IS0 6157-21995 revision) (j?j?h revision)
(Part 11):2002/ Electroplated coatings (thtrdrevision) 1893 Criteriaforearthquakeresistantdesign
IS0 4042:1999 (Part 1) :2002. of structures: Part 1 General
(Part 12):1981 Phosphate coatings on threaded provisions and buildings
fasteners (second revision) Specification for hot forged steel
(Part 13):1983 Hot dip galvanized coatings on rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 m m
threaded fasteners (second revision) diameter) (first revision)
(Part 14) Mechanical properties of corrosion- Steel rivet and stay bars for boilers
resistant stainless-steel fasteners. (tirst revision)
Sec 1 : 20021 Bolts, screws and studs (third revision) Steel plates for pressure vessels for
IS0 3506-1:1997 intermediate and high temperature
Sec 2 : 20021 Nuts (third revision) service including boilers (second
IS0 3506-21997 revision)
Sec 3 : 20021 Set screws and similar fasteners not Hot rolled low, medium and high
IS0 3506-3:1997 under tensile stress (third revision) tensile structural steel (sixth rei~ision)
(Part 16) : 20021 Designation system for fastene~s Specification for cold forged solid
IS0 8991:I986 (third revision) steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm
(Part 17) : 19961 Inspection, sampling and acceptance diameter) (first revision)
IS0 3269: 1988 procedure (third revision) 1.5 percent manganese steel castings
(Part 18) : 1996 Packaging (third revision) for general engineering purpose
(Part 19) : 19971 Axial load fatigue testing of bolts, (third revision)
IS0 3800:1993 screws and studs Structural steel for construction of
(Part 20) : 19961 Torsional test and minimum torques hulls of ships (second revision)
IS0 898-7:1992 for bolts and screws with nominal Acceptance tests for wire flux
diameters 1 mm to 10 mm combination for submerged arc
1387 : 1993 General requirements for the supply welding Wrst revision)
of metallurgical materials (second Specification for hexagon fit bolts
revision) (tirst revision)
1393 : 1961 Code of practice for training and Specification for high strength
testing of oxy-acetylene welders structural bolts (second revision)
1395 : 1982 Low and medium alloy steel covered Code of practice for high strength
electrodes for manual metal arc bolts in steel structures (first revision)
welding (third revision) Code of practice for earthquake
resistance design and construction of
buildings (second revision)
 Title IS No. Title
General requirements for plain (Part 1) : 1974 Part 1 Fusion welding of steel
washers and lock washers (first 7318 (Part 1): Approval test for welders when weld-
revision) 1974 ing procedure approval is not
Specification for plain washers with required: Part 1 Fusion welding of
outside diameter =3 x inside diameter steel
Taper washers for channels (ISMC) Specification for steel wire (upto
(first revision) 20 mm) for the manufacture of cold
Taper washers for I-beams (ISMB) forged rivets (first revision)
(first revision) Geometrical tolerancing on technical
Foundation bolts - Specification drawings:
(first revision) (Part 1) : 19851 Tolerances of form, orientation,loca-
Hot rolled steel plate (upto 6 mm) IS0 1101 : 1983 tion and run-out, and appropriate
sheet and strip for the manufacture of geometrical definitions (first
low pressure liquefiable gas cylinders revision)
-Specification (third revision) (Part 2) : 1992 Maximum material principles e r s t
Welding rods and bare electrodes for IS0 2692 : 1988 revision)
gas shielded arc welding of structural (Part 3) : 19921 Dimensioning and tolerancing of
steel (first revision) IS0 1660 :1987 profiles (second revision)
Molybdenum and chromium- (Part 4) : 1976 Practical examples of indications on
molybdenumlow alloy steel welding drawings
rods and bare electrodes for gas Guide for preparation and
shielded arc welding (first revision) arrangement of sets of drawings and
Specification for heavy washers for parts lists
steel structures Code of practice for corrosion
High strength structural nuts - protection of steel reinforcement in
Specification (first revision) RB and RCC construction
Specification for hexagonal bolts for Recommended deslgn practice for
steel structures corrosion prevention of steel
Specification for hardened and structures
tempered washers for high strength Steel tubes for idlers for belt
structural bolts and nuts first revision) conveyors (firsfrevision)
Safety code for erection of structural Metal arc welding of carbon and
steelwork carbon manganese steels -
Specification for tolerances for Recommendations e r s t revision)
fabrication of steel structures Hot-rolled steel strip for welded
Specificationfor bare wire electrodes tubes and pipes - Specification
for submerged arc welding of (second revision)
structural steels Tolerances for erection of steel
7307 Approval tests for welding procedures: structures
(Part 1) : 1974 Part 1 Fusion welding of steel Handbook for StructuralEngineers -
7310 Approval tests for welders working Structural Steel Sections
to approved welding procedures
 ANNEX B
[Clause 4.1.l(c)]
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN METHODS

B-1 ADVANCED STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND

DESIGN
- -
B-2.2 Design Bending Moment
The design bending moment under factored load shall
B-1.1 Analysis be taken as the maximum bending moment in the length
of the member. It shall be determined either:
For a frame, comprising members of compact section
with full lateral restraint, an advanced structural a) directly from the second-order analysis; or
analysis may be carried out, provided the analysis can b) approximately, if the member is divided into
be shown to accurately model the actual behaviour of a sufficient number of elements, as thegreatest
that class of frames. The analysis shall take into of the element end bending moments; or
account the relevant material properties, residual
C) by amplifying the calculated design bending
stresses, geometrical imperfections, reduction in moment, taken as the maximum bending
stiffness due to axial compression, second-order moment along the length of a member as
effects, section strength and ductility, erection obtained by superpositionof the simple beam
procedures and interaction with the foundations. bending moments determined by the analysis.
Advanced structural analysis for earthquake loads shall For a member with zero axial force or a member subject
take into account, as appropriate the response history, to axial tension, the factored design bending moment
torsional response, pounding against adjacent shall be calculated as themoment obtainedfrom second
structures, and strain rate effects. order analysis without any amplification.
B-1.2 Design For a member with a design axial compressive force
For the strength limit state, it shall be sufficient to as determined from the analysis, the factored design
satisfy the section capacity requirements of Section 8 bending moment shall be calculated as follows:
for the members subjected to bending, of Section 7 for
axial members, of Section 9 for combined forces and
of Section 10 for connections. Effect of moment where
magnification given in Section 9, instability given in = moment amplification factor for a braced
Section 7 and lateral buckling given in Section 8 need 6,
member determined in accordance with
not be considered while designing the member, since Section 9.
advanced analysis methods directly consider these.
B-3 FRAME INSTABILITY ANALYSIS
An advanced sfructural analysis for earthquake loads
shall recognize that the design basis earthquake loads B-3.1 Analysis
calculated in accordance with IS 1893 is assumed to
correspond to. the load at which the first significant Frame instability, as treated here, is related to the design
plastic hinge forms in the structure. of multi-storey rigid-jointed frames subject to side
sway. The elastic critical load factor, h,, may be
B-2 SECOND ORDER ELASTIC ANALYSIS AND determined using the deflection method as given
DESIGN in B-3.2 or any other recognized method. This is used
to calculate the amplified sway moments for elastic
B-2.1 Analysis designs and to check frame stability in plastic designs.
In a second-order elastic analysis, the members shall The elastic critical load factor, h,, of a frame is the
he assumed to remain elastic, and changes in frame ratio by which each of the factored loads would have
geometry under the design load and changes in the to be increased to cause elastic instability.
effective stiffness of the members due to axial forces B-3.2 Deflection Method
shall be accounted for. In a frame where the elastic
buckling load factor (A,,) of the frame as determined An accurate method of analysis (ordinary linear elastic
in accordance with 4.6 is greater than 5, the changes analysis) should be used to determine the horizontal
in the effective stiffness of the members due to axial deflections of the frame due to horizontal forces applied
forces may be neglected. at each floor level, which is equal to the notional
horizontal load in 4.3.6. Allowance should be made
..
P..~
for the degree of rigidity of the base as given in B-3.2 that storey of area A, given by:
*;~*
% * in this deflection calculation.
The base stiffness should be determined by reference
to 4.3.4.
k

The elastic critical load factor, is calculated as: where

1 h = storey height;
acr = 200@5,,,, b = width of the braced bay;
where
@s. .,,
= largest value of the sway index, 4- given
by:
EX,= sum of the stiffness I/L, of the columns
in that storey;

where Bp= sum of spring stiffness horizontal force

h = storey height, per unit horizontal deflection of all the
= horizontal deflection of the top of the storey panels in that storey determined from:
6,
due to the combined gravity and notional
loads, and
& = honzontal
' deflection of the bottom of the
storey due to gravity and notional load.
where
B-3.3 Partial Sway Bracing
tp = thickness of the wall panel, and
In any storey the stiffening effect of infill wall panels
may be allowed for by introducing a diagonal strut in Ep = modulus of elasticity of the panel material.

ANNEX C
[Clauses 5.2.2.2(b) and 5.6.21
DESIGN AGAINST FLOOR VIBRATION

C-1 GENERAL corresponds approximately to 0.5 percent g, where g

is the acceleration due to gravity. Continuous
Floor with longer spans of lighter construction and less
vibration is generally more annoying then decaying
inherent damping are vulnerable to vibrations under
vibration due to damping. Floor systems with the
normal human activity. Natural frequency of the floor natural frequency less than 8 Hz in the case of floors
system corresponding to the lowest mode of vibration,
supporting rhythmic activity and 5 Hz in the case of
damping characteristics, are important characteristics
floors supporting normal human activity should be
in floor vibration. Open web steel joists (trusses) or
avoided.
steel beams on the concrete deck may experience
walking vibration problem. Fatigue, overloading of C-3 FLOOR FREQUENCY
floor systems and vibrations due to rhythmic activities
such as aerobic or dance classes are not within the scope The fundamental natural frequency can be estimated
of this Annex. by assuming full composite action, even in non-
composite construction.This frequency,f,for a simply
C-2 ANNOYANCE CRITERIA supported one way system is given by
In the frequency range of 2 to 8 Hz in which people
are most sensitive to vibration, the threshold level
 where
Sl System Critical Damping
E = modulus of elasticity of steel, MPa; No. Percent
I, = transformed moment of inertia of the one (1) (2) (3)
way system (in terms of equivalent steel) i) Fully composite construction 2
assuming the concrete flange of width equal ii) Bare steel beam and concrete deck 3-4
to the spacing of the beam to be effective, iii) Floor with finishes, false ceiling, 6
in mm4; fire proofing, ducts furniture
iv) Partitions not located along a Up to 12
L = span length, in mm; and support or not spaced farther apart
W = dead load of the one way joist. in Nlmm. than 6 m and partitions oriented in
orthogonal directions
If the one way joist system is supported by a flexible
beam running perpendicular with the natural C-S ACCELERATION
frequency f,, the floor frequency may be reduced to
f,, given by: The peak acceleration a,, from heel impact for floors
of spans greater than 7m and natural frequencyf,, less
than 10 Hz may be calculated as:
a,lg = 600f,/W
where
C-4 DAMPING
W = total weight offloors plus contentsoverthespa
The percentage of critical damping may be assumed length and equivalent floor width (b), in N;
approximately as given below: b = 40t, (20 t, when over hang is only on one
~.
side of the beam);
r, = equivalent thickness of the slab, averaging
t !
concrete in slab and ribs; and
~:
g = acceleration due to gravity.

ANNEX D
(Clause 7.2.2)
DETERMINATION O F EFFECTIVE LENGTH O F COLUMNS
D-1 METHOD FOR DETERMINING EFFECTIVE b) Sway Frames (Moment Resisting Frames)
LENGTH OF COLUMNS IN FRAMES [see 4.1.2(b)]
In the absenceof a more exact analysis, theeffectivelength The effective length factor K, of column in
of columns in framed structures may be obtained by sway frames is given by (see Fig. 28):
multiplying the actual length of the column between the
centres of laterally supporting members (beams) given
in Fig. 27 and Fig. 28 with the effective length factor K,
[
K = 1-0.2(P, +A)-0.12P,P2
1-O.8(PI.+Pz)+0.688
calculated by using the equations given below, provided
the connection between beam and column is rigid type: where
a) Non-sway Fmmes(BmcedFmme/ [(see4.1&a)]
A frame is designated as non-sway frame if p,, P2 are given, /3 = CK
the relative displacement between the two CKC+CK~
adjacent floorsis restrained by bracings or Kc, K,= effective flexural stiffness of the
shear walls (see 4.1.2). The effective length columns and beams meeting at the
factor, K, of column in non-sway frames is joint at the ends of the columns
given by (see Fig. 27): and rigidly connected at thejoints,
[1 +0.145(p1+p,)-0.265p,,O2] and these are calculated by:
K=
[2-o.364(P1 +PZ)-O.~~~PIPZ] K=C(IIL) '
 FIXED
B2 - HINGED

Fro. 27 COLUMN
EFFECTIVE
LENOTH - NON-SWAY
FACTOR FRAME
PINNED

FIXED

FIXED

Fro. 28 COLUMN
B,
EFFECTIVE
-
LENGTH
PINNED

- SWAYFRAME
FACTOR

123
 .<
. ~.
~5

I = moment of inertia of the member about Coefficient Kt for effective length of bottom part of
an axis perpendicular to the plan of the double stepped column shall be taken from the formula: .ij
frame.
~.
.~*
~

L = length of the member equal to centre- x

to-centre distance of the intersecting ~~< . .

~. 4 ~ . .
member. K, =
1+ t, + t,
5

.-
> *
C = correction factor as shown in Table 35. ~

where .!
,~~

Table 35 Correction Factors for Effective Kt, K,, and K, are taken from Table 41.
Flexural Stiffness

SI Par End Condition

NO.
Correction Factor, C

Graced Frame UnbracedFrame

. 16" = average value of moment of inertia for the
~:

(1) (2) (3) (4)

lower and middle parts
i) Pinned 1.5(1 - ii ) lS(1 - ii )
ii) Rigidly connected to column l.O(l-Ti) 1.0(1-O.2E)
iii) Fixed 2.0(1- 0 . 4 ~ 0.67(1-
) 0.4~) .~
:

NOTE- E=-
P I",, = average value of moment of inertia for the
p. middle and top parts ~.
where
P. = elastic buckling load, and
P = applied load.

Value of coefficient K, for middle part of column is

D-ZMETHODFORDETERMlNING EFFECTIVE given by formula:
LENGTH FOR STEPPED COLUMNS (see 7.2.2) .,
D-2.1 Single Stepped Columns
Effective length in the plane of stepping (bending about coefficient K3 for the top Part of the column is given
axis z-r) for bottom and top parts for single stepped by:
column shall be taken as given in Table 36. K8 - -
K = -55
NOTE-The provisions of D-2.1 are applicable to intermediate I c3
columns as well with stepping on either side, provided where
appropriale values of /,and lz are taken.

D-3 E F F E C T I V E L E N G T H F O R DOUBLE C2=

STEPPED COLUMNS
Effective lengths in the plane of steppings (bending NOTE -The provisions of D-3 are applicable lo intermediate
about axis z-z) for bottom, middle and top parts for a columns as well with steppings on either side, provided
double stepped column shall be taken as follows appropriate values of I,. I, and I, are taken.
(see also Fig. 29):
 Table 36 Effective Length of Single Stepped Columns
(Clause D-2.1)

SI Degree of End Restraint Sketch Erective Length Coefficients Column Parameters for
No. All Cases
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Effectivelyheld in position
and restrained against
rotation at both ends

where
Kb2and K I Iare to be taken
per Table 37
ii)
Effectively held in position
at both ends and restrained
K:, + K:, (a- I)
against rotation at bottom
end only

where
K I Sand K I Iare to be taken
per Table 38 !' L I= a LX ~
.iii) Effectively held in position Ktto be taken as per Table 39 i, & 1,
and restmined against
rotation at bottom end, and Effective length of bottom
top end held against K ~ 2= 5 3
part of column in plane of
rotation but not held in stepping = KILl
position

C
iv) Effectively held in position K , to be taken as per Table 40 Effective length of top pan ol
and restrained against column in plane of stepping =
rotation at bottom end, and K ~ 5= 5 3 K?L>
top end neither held against c,
rotation nor held in
position

- -

Table 37 Coefficients of Effective Lengths KZ2and K,, for Columns with Both Ends Effectively Held in
Position and Restrained Against Rotation
(Table 36)

Coeflicients K12and Kt, for LzILI Equal to

IJI, 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0 . 8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
Coefficient Knr(PI= 0)
0.05 0.74 0.94 1.38 1.60 1.87 2.07 2.23 2.39 2.52 2.67 3.03 3.44 3.85 4.34 4.77
0.1 0.67 0.76 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.61 1.78 1.92 2.04 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.86 3.18 3.41 P,
2.45 2.64
0.2
0.3
0.64
0.62
0.70
0.68
0.79
0.74
0.93
0.85
1.07
0.95
1.23
1.06
1.41
1.18
1.50 1.60
1.28 1.39
1.72
1.48
1.92 2.11
1.67 1.82
2.28
1.96 2.12 2.20 t
0.4 0.60 0.66 0.71 0.77 0.82 0.93 0.99 1.08 1.17 1.23 1.39 1.53 1.66 1.79 1.92
0.5 0.59 0.65 0.70 0.77 0.82 0.93 0.99 1.08 1.17 1.23 1.39 1.53 1.66 1.79 1.92 1,
1.0 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50
Coetlieient K t , (P2= 0)
0.05 0.65 0.67 0.71 0.85 1.01 1.17 1.31 1.41 1.50 1.57 1.67 1.74 1.78 1.82 1.86
0.1 0.64 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.78 0.92 1.05 1.15 1.25 1.33 1.45 1.55 1.62 1.68 1.71
0.2 0.62 0.64 0.65 0.65 0.66 0.73 0.83 0.92 1.01 1.09 1.23 1.33 1.41 1.48 1.54
0.3 0.60 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.66 0.67 0.73 0.81 0.89 0.94 1.09 1.20 1.28 1.35 1.41 1
0.4 0.58 0.63 0.63 0.64 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.75 0.82 0.88 1.01 1.10 1.19 1.26 1.32 Pi*p2
0.5 0.57 0.61 0.63 0.64 0.64 0.65 0.68 0.72 0.77 0.83 0.94 1.04 1.12 1.19 1.25
1.0 0.55 0.58 0.60 0.61 0.62 0.63 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.73 0.80 0.88 0.93 1.01 1.05
NOTE -Intermediate value may be obtained by interpolation.
 Table 38 Coefficients of Effective Lengths K,,and K,, for Columns with Both Ends Effecti~elyHeld in
Position and Restrained Against Rotation at Bottom End Only
(Table 36)

Coefficients K n and Kt, for L A , Equal to

I 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 p,
Coefficient Kit (PI = 0)

10 0.78 0.85 .0.92 0.99 1.06 1.13 1.20 1.27 1.34 1.41
Coefficient XI, (P2= 0)
0.05 0.67 0.67 0 . 8 2 1.16 1.35 1.48 1.58 1.65 1.69 1.74
O.! 0.67 0.67 i0.73 0.93 1.11 1.25 1.36 1.45 1.52 1.57
0.3 0.67 0 . 6 7 0.67 0.71 0.80 0.90 0.99 1.08 1.15 1.22
0.5 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.69 0.73 0.81 0.87 0.94 1.01 1.07
1.0 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.68 0.71 0.74 0.78 0.82 0.87 0.91
NOTE - Intermediate value may be obtained by interpolation.

Table 39 Coefficients of Effective Lengths K, for Columns Effectively Held in Position and Restrained
Against Rotation at Bottom End and Top End Held Against Rotation but not Held in Position
(Table 36)
- - - -

Coefficients K,for I x / hEqual to

Cz 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 Pz

3.0 3.0 3.7 4.1 - - - - - - - - - - - - PI

I+ P2
NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.

Table 40 Coefficients of Effective Lengths K, for Columns with Top Ends Free and Bottom End
Effectively Held in Position and Restrained Against Rotation
(Table 36)

Coefficients K, for ItlI, Eqttal to

P2
Q 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 5.0 10 20
0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
0.5 2.0 2.14 2.24 2.36 2.47 2.57 2.67 2.76 2.85 2.94 3.02 - - - -
1.0 2.0 2.73 3.13 3.44 3.74 4.00 - - - - - - - - -
1.5 3.0~ 3.77 4.35 4.86 - - - - - - - - - - -
2.0 4.0 4.90 5.67 - - - - - - - - - - - -
7.00 - - - - - - - - - - - -
2.5
3.0
5.0
6.0
6.08
7.25 - - - - - - - - - - -. - - 4
P,+P2
NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.
 IS 800 12007

ANNEX E
(Clause 8.2.2.1)
ELASTIC LATERAL TORSIONAL BUCKLING
E-1 ELASTIC CRITICAL MOMENT E-1.2 E l a s t i c C r i t i c a l M o m e n t o f a Section
Symmetrical About Minor Axis
E-1.1 General
In case of a beam which is symmetrical only about the
The elastic critical moment is affected by: minor axis, and bending about major axis, the elastic
a) Moment gradient in the unsupported length, critical moment for lateral torsional buckling is given
b) Boundary conditions at the lateral support by the general equation:
points,
C) Non-symmetric and non-prismatic nature of
the member, and
d) Location of transverse load with respect to
44cr = c,%[[[cy
(LLT)

shear centre.
The boundary conditions at the lateral supports have
two components:
a) Torsional restraint- Where the cross-section
is prevented from rotation about the shear where
1
- ( ~ 2 ?- ~c ~ Y , )

centre, and
c,, c,, c, = factors depending upon the loading and
h) warping restraint - Where the flanges are end restraint conditions (see Table 42).
prevented from rotating in their own plane K =effective length factors of the
about an axis perpendicular to the flange. unsupported length accounting for
The elastic critical moment corresponding to lateral boundary conditions at the end lateral
torsional buckling of a doubly symmetric prismatic supports. The effective length factor K
beam subjected to uniformmoment in the unsupported varies from 0.5 for complete restraint
length and torsionally restraining lateral supports is against rotation about weak axis to 1.0
given by: for free rotate about weak axis, with 0.7
for the case of one end fixed and other

]
0.5
end free. It is analogous to the effective
I I G I, (L,)* length factors for compression members
M.. = n2r Iy
@LT with end rotational restraint.
K, = warping restraint factor. Unless special
where provisions to restrain warping of the
I,, I,, I, = moment of inertia about the minor axis, section at the end lateral supports are
warping constant and St.Venants torsion made, K, should be taken as 1.0.
constant of the cross-section, y, = y distance between the point of
respectively; application of the load and the shear
G = modulus of rigidity; and centre ofthe cross-section and is positive
when the load is acting towards the shear
LLT = effective length against lateral torsional
centre from the point of application.
buckling (see 8.3).
This equation in simplified form for I-section has been y, = y,-0.5j (z~-~')~~AII,
presented in 8.2.2.1. A
y, = co-ordinate of the shear centre with
While the simplified equation is generally on the safe respect to centroid, positive when the
side, there are many situations where this may be very shear centre is on the compression side
conservative. More accurate calculation of the elastic of the centroid.
critical moment for general case of unsymmetrical
sections, loading away from shear centre and beams y , z = co-ordinates of the elemental area with
with moment gradient can be obtained from specialist respect to centroid of the section.
literature, by using an appropriate computer yj = can be calculated by using the following
programme or equations given below. approximation:

128
 where
y, = 0.8 (2Pr- 1 ) hyn.0 A, = area enclosed by
(when Pr > 0.5) the section, and
yj = 1.0 (2Pr- 1 ) hy12.0 6,t = breadth and thick-
(when pi S 0.5) ness of the elements
of the section,
-
respectively.
~

yj = 0.8 (2pr- 1) (I+ h ~ l hhy12 )

(when > 0.5) I , = The warping constant,
given by:
yi = (2Pf - I ) ( 1 + h ~ l hhy12
)
(when pr S 0.5) (1-Pf) p, Iy hyZforI-sections
mono-symmetric about
where weak axis
h, = height of the lip, = 0 for angle, Tee, narrow
h = overall height of the rectangle section and
section, and
approximately for hollow
hy = distance between shear sections
- of
centre of the two flanges
the cross-section. p, = 1, /(I, +I,) where I,, Ihare
the moment of inertiaof the
I, = torsion constant, given by: compression and tension
= zbir: 13 for open section flanges, respectively, about
the minor axis of the entire
= 4~~ l C'( b l t ) for hollow
section.
section
Table 42 Constants c,, c, and c,
(Clause E-1.2)

Leading and Support Condilions Bending Moment ~ i & r a m Value of K

 Table 42 (Concludedl
- -
Loading and Support Conditions Bending ,Moment Diagram Value o f K Constants

ANNEX F
(Clause 10.6.1)
CONNECTIONS
F-1 GENERAL -
should the streneth developed be less than 50 percent
of the effective strength of the material spliced. Wherever
The requirement for the design of splice and beam to
column connection as well as for their possible in welded coust~ction,flange plates shall be
design shall be as given below. joined by complete penetration butt welds. These butt
welds shall develop the full strength of the plates.
F-2 BEAM SPLICES Whenever the flange width or thickness changes at the
splice location, gradual transition shall be made in the
F-2.1 For rolled section beam splices located away
from the point of maximum moment, it may be
of the larger flange,
~-...
assumed that the flange splice carries all the moment F-2.3 When beam splice is located at the point of
and the web splice carries the shear (see Fig. 30). inflection of a continuous beam, the flange splicing
However in the case of a deep girder, the total moment requirement given abovemay be relaxed appropriately.
may be divided between the flange and the web in
accordance with the stress distribution. The web F-3 COLUMNSPLICE
connection should then be designed to resist its share F-3.1 where the ends of compression are
of moment and shear. Even web is designed to faced for bearing over the whole area, they shall be
shear force, the about the centroid spliced to hold the connected parts aligned. The ends
of the bolt group on either side of the splice should be of compression members faced for bearing shall
designed for moment due to eccentricity. invariably be machined to ensure perfect contact of
F-2.2 Flange joints should preferably not be located at surfaces in bearing (see Fig. 3 1).
points of m a x i m m s t r e s ~where splice plates M used
F-3.2 where such members are not faced for complete
(see Fig. 301, their area shall not be less than 5 percent
bearing the splices shall be designed to transmit all the
in excess of area of the flange element spliced; and
forces to which the member is subjected at the splice
theircentre of gravity shall coincide, as nearly as possible
with that of the element
.....
....cnlired.
r..-.
fasteners on each side of the splice to develop the load
-
There shall be enough
location,
F-3.3 Whereverpossible, splices shall be proportioned
in the element spliced plus 5 percent but in no case and arranged so that centroidal axis of the splice
 (OPTIONAL)
30A Conventional Splice (Typical) 308 End Plate Splice

FIG.30 BEAMSPLICES

coincides as nearly as possible with the centroidal axes separate lateral load resisting system is to be provided
of the members joined, in order to avoid eccentricity; in the form of bracings or shear walls. The connections
but where eccentricity is present in the joint, the shown in Fig. 32 (A), (B), (C) and (D) can be assumed
resulting stress considering eccentricity shall be as simple connections in framed analysis and need to
provided for. be checked only for the transfer of shear from beam to
column.
F-3.4 If a column flange is subjected to significant
tension or if the faces are not prepared for bearing, or F-4.2 Rigid Connections
if full continuity is required without slip, only HSFG In high-rise and slender structures, stiffness
bolts shall be used.
requirementsmay warrant the use of rigid connections.
Rigid corlnections transfer significant moments to the
columns and are assumed to undergo negligible
deformations at the joint. These are necessary in sway
frames for stability and also contribute in resisting
lateral loads. The connections shown in Fig. 32 (E),
(F), (G) can be assumed as rigid connection in frame
analysis and need to be checked for both shear and
moment transfer from beam to the column. Fully
welded connections can also be considered as rigid
beam to column connections.
F-4.3 Semi-rigid Connections
Semi-rigid connections fall between the two types
mentioned above. The fact is that simple connections
do have some degree of rotational rigidity as in the
semi-rigid connections. Similarly rigid connections do
experience some degree of joint deformation and this
can be utilised to reduce the joint design moments.
FIG. 31 COLUMN
SPLICE
(TYPICAL)
F-4 BEAM-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS The moment-rotation relationship of the connections
have to be determined based on experiments
F-4.1 Simple Connections conducted for the specific design or based on the
relationship derived from tests, ptesented in specialist
Simple connections are assumed to transfer only shear
literature. The simplest method of analysis wilI be to
at some nominal eccentricity and typically used in
idealize the connection as an equivalent rotational
frames up to about five stories in height, where strength
spring with either a bilinear or non-linear moment-
rather than stiffness govern the design. In such frames
 32A Single Web Angle 328 Double Web Angle

32C TOPand Seat Angle with 32D Top and Seat Angle without
Double Web Angle Double Web Angle

32E End Plate without Column Stiffeners 32F End Plate with Column stiffeners

--ICtw
32H Header Plate
rotation characteristics. The classification proposed
. . F-4.3.2 Connection Models
by Bjorhovde combined with the Frey-Morris model Frye-Morris has derived the following polynomial
can be used with convenience to model semi-rigid model for the moment curvature relationship of semi-
connections, as given in the next section. rigid connections:
F-4.3.1 Connection Class$cation 8, = C,(KM)l + C, (KM)' + C, (KMS
-
Connections are classified according to their ultimate where
strength or in terms of their initial elastic stiffness M = moment at thejoint, in kN m;
and Bjorhovde's classification. It is based on the
non-dimensional moment parameter (m'= M,I M,,) K = standardization parameter which depend
and the non-dimensional rotation (0' = B,/B.) on the connection type and geometry;
-
parameter, where 9, is the plastic rotation. The
?
and
Bjorhovde's classification is based on a reference C , ,C,, C, = curve fitting constants
length of the beam equal to 5 times the depth of the Table44 shows thecurve fitting constants
beam. The limits used for connection classification and standardization constants for Frye-
are shown in Table 4 3 and are graphically Morris Model [All size parameters in the
represented in Fig. 33. table are in mm (see Fig. 32)l.

Table 43 Connection Classification Limits

SL No. Nature of the Connection In Terms of Strength In Terms of
Stiffness
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Rigid connection m' ? 0.7 m'z2.58'
ii) Semi-rigid connection 0.7 > m' > 0.2 2.58'>m1>0.50'
iii) Flexible connection m' 5 0.2 nt'~0.56"
 Table 44 Connection Constants in Frye-Morris Model
(Clause F4.3.2)
- -

Sl Type Connection Type Curve-Fitting Standardization constants

No. Constants
(1) (2) (3)
i) A Single web angle connection

ii) B Double web angle connection

~ ; = 8 . 1 8x 10"
iii) C Top and seat angle connection with double web C,=2.24 x 10.' K = ~ . I . ~ W ~ , I . I % .O.41$
,
angle C>=1.86 x lo4 /61)6"(g- 0.5da)'-"
C,=3.23 x 10'
iv) D Top and seat angle connection without double C , = 1.63 x l o ' K=~.I.I~,oI,~.o.~~~.~.I
web angle C2=7.Z5 x 10"
C,=3.31 x 10"
V) E End plate connection without column stiffeners C, = 1.78 x 10' K = d,. ~4 I p . ~If.
~ 1.5
c2=-9.55 x l0l6
c;=5.54 x lom
vi) F End plate connection with calumn stiffeners CI-2.60 x 10' K =d;LQio6
ci=5.37 x lo"
C,=l.31 x lo2'
vii) G T-stub connection C, -4.05 x 10' ~=~-1.5~~.os/,.a'~-l-'
c,=4.45 x i n "

viii) H Header plate connection

C,=6.06 x 10"
where (see Fig. 32) I,= thickness of the weh angle, in mm
d = depth of beam IF thickness offlange T-stub connector, in mrn
d,= depth ofthe angle, in mm t,= thickness ofweb of the beam in the connection, in mm
db= diameter ofthe bolt, in mm t,= thickness of end plate, header plate, in mm
dz= center-to-centre of the outermost bolt of the end plate I.= length of the angle, in mm
connection, in mm A= length of the T-stub connector, in mm
g = gauge distance ofbolt line
I.= thickness of the top angle, in mm
NOTE - For preliminaty analysis using a bilinear moment curvature relationship, the stifmess given in Table 45 may be assumed
depending on the type of connection. The values are based on the secant stiffness at a rotation of 0.01 radian and typical dimension of
connecting angle and other components as given in the table.

Table 45 Secant Stiffness

(Table 44)
SI Type of Connection Dimension Secant Stiffeness
No. mm kNm/radian
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Single web connection angle d,=250, t,= 10, g=35 1 150
ii) Double web-angle connection d,= 250, t.= 10, g = 77.5 4 450
iii) Top and seat angle connection without double web d,=300, t,=IO, 1,=140, db=20 2 730
angle connection
iv) Header plate d,= 175, 1,s 10, g = 7 5 , t,= 7.5 2 300

F-5 COLUMN BASES of the joint between the base plate and the foundation
F-5.1 Base Plates shall be determined taking account of the material
properties and dimensions of both the grout and the
Columns shall be provided with base plates capable of concrete foundation.
distributing the compressive forces in the compressed
parts of the column over a bearing area such that the F-5.2 Holding Down Bolts (Anchor Bolts)
bearing pressure on the foundation does not exceed F-5.2.1 ~ ~ l down d bolts
i ~ shall
~ be provided if
the design strength of the point. The design strength necessary to resist the effects of the design loads.
They shall be designed to resist tension due to uplift F-5.2.4 If no special elements for resisting the shear
forces and tension due to bending moments as force are provided, such as block or bar shear
appropriate. connectors, it shall be demonstrated that sufficient
resistance to transfer the shear force between the
F-5.2.2 When calculating the tension forces due to column and the foundation is provided by one of the
bending moments, the lever arm shall not he taken as following:
more than the distance between the centroid of the
bearing area on the compression side and the centroid a) Frictional resistance of the joint between the
of the bolt group on the tension side, taking the base plate and the foundation.
tolerances on the positions of the holding down bolts b) Shear resistance of the holding down bolts.
into account. C) Shear resistance of the surrounding part of
F-5.2.3 Holding down bolts shall either be anchored the foundation.
into the foundation by a hook or by a washer plate or d) Shear and hearing resistance of the shear key
by some other appropriate load distributing member plates welded to the base plate and embedded
embedded in the concrete. in the pedestallfoundation.

ANNEX G
(Clause 17.16)
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR STEELWORK TENDERS AND CONTRACTS

G-1 GENERAL the proposed location and main dimensions

of the building or structure;
G-1.1 The recommendations given in this Annex are
b) Ground levels, existing and proposed;
in line with those generally adopted for steelwork
construction and are meant for general information. c) Particulars of buildings or other constructions
which may have to remain on the actual site
6-1.2 These recommendations do not form part of the of the new building or structure during the
requirements of the standard and compliance with these erection of the steelwork;
is not necessary for the purpose of complying with this
d) Particulars of adjacent buildings affecting, or
standard. affected by, the new work;
6 - 1 . 3 The recommendations are unsuitable for e) Stipulation regarding the erection sequence
inclusion as a block requirement in a contract, but in or time schedule;
drawing up a contract the points mentioned should be f) Conditions affecting the position or continuity
given consideration. of members:
6 - 2 EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION g) Limits of length and weight of steel members
in transit and erection:
Before the steelwork design is commenced, the h) Drawings of the substructure, proposed or
building designer should be satisfied that the planning existing, showing:
of the building, its dimensions and other principal
factors meet the requirements of the building owner I) levels of stanchion foundations, if already
and comply with regulations of all authorities determined;
concerned. Collaboration of building designer and 2 ) any details affecting the stanchion bases
steelwork designer should begin at the outset of the or anchor bolts;
project by joint consideration of the planning and of 3) permissible bearing pressure on the
such questions as the stanchion spacing, materials to foundation; and
be used for the construction, and depth of basement. 4) provisions for grouting.
G - 3 INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THE NOTE - In the case of new work, the substructure
should be designed in accordance with the relevant
STEELWORK DESIGNER standards dcaling with foundations and substructure.
6-3.1 General j) The maximum wind velocity appropriate to
the site (see IS 875); and
a) Site plans showing in plan and elevation of
 k) Environmental factors, such as proximity to d) Accessibility of site and details of power
sea coast, and corrosive atmosphere. supply:
Reference to bye-laws and regulations Whether the steelwork contractor will be
e)
affecting the steelwork design and required to survey the site and set out or check
construction.
-
the building or structure lines, foundations and
G-3.2 levels;
Further Information Relating to Buildings
0 Setting-out plan of foundations, stanchions
a) Plans of the floors and roof with principal and levels of bases;
dimensions, elevations and cross-sections
g) Cross-sections and elevations of the steel
showing heights between floor levels. structure, as necessary, with large-scaledetails
b) The occupancy of the floors and the positions of special features;
of any special loads should be given.
h) Whether the connections are to be bolted,
c) The building drawings, which should be fully riveted or welded. Particular attention should
dimensioned, should preferably be to the scale be drawn to connections of a special nature,
of 1 to 100 and should show all stairs, fire- such as turned bolts, high strength friction grip
escapes, lifts, etc, suspended ceilings, flues bolts, long rivets and overhead welds;
and ducts for heating and ventilating. Doors
j) Quality of steel, and provisions for
and windows should be shown, as the identification;
openings may be taken into account in the
computations of dead load. k) Requirements in respect of protective
paintings at works and on site, galvanizing or
Requirements should be given in respect of cement wash;
any maximum depth of beams or minimum
head room. m) Approximate dates for commencement and
completion of erection;
Large-scale details should be given of any
special features affecting the steelwork. n) Details of any tests which have to be made
during the course of erection or upon
d) The inclusive weight per m2 of walls, floors, completion; and
roofs, suspended ceilings, stairs and
partitions, or particulars of their construction p) Schedule of quantities. Where the tenderer is
required to take off quantities, a list should
and finish for the computation of dead load.
be given of the principal items to be included
The plans should indicate the floors, which in the schedule.
are to be designed to carry partitions. Where
the layout of partitions is not known, or a .4.2 ~ d d i t i o n aInformation
i Relating to Buildings
given layout is liable to alteration, these facts
should be specially noted so that allowance a) Schedule of stanchions giving sizes, lengths
may be made for partitions in any position and typical details of brackets, joints, etc;
(see IS 875). b) Plan of rilla ages showing sizes, lengths and
levels of grillage beams and particulars of any
e) The superimposed loads on the floors
appropriate to the occupancy, as given in stiffeners required;
IS 875 or as otherwise required. c) Plans of floor beams showing sizes, lengths
and levels eccentricities and end moments.
f) Details of special loads fromcranes, runways,
tips, lifts, bunkers, tanks, plant and equipment. The beam reactions and details of the type of
connection required shonld be shown on the
g) The grade of fire resistance appropriate to the plans;
occupancy as may be required.
d) Plan of roof steelwork. For a flat roof, the plan
G-4 INFORMATION REQUIRED BY TENDERER should give particulars similar to those of a
( IF NOT ALSO DESIGNER ) floor plan. Where the roof is pitched. details
should be given of trusses, portals, purlins,
G-4.1 General -
bracinn. etc:
a) All information listed under G-3.1; e) The steelwork drawings should preferably he
h) Climatic conditions at site-seasonal variations to a scale of 1 to 100 and should give
of temperature, humidity, wind velocity and identification marks against all members; and
direction; f) Particulars of holes required for services,
C) Nature of soil. Results of the investigation of pipes, machirlery fixings, etc. Such holes
sub-soil at site of building or structure; should preferably be drilled at works.
 ~. ~

:~
.,.
~. 6 - 4 3 Information Relating to Execution of Building 6-8.1 Access to Contractor's Works
.,
I:I
..
.. Work The contractor should offer facilities for the inspection
%.
a) Supply of Materials; of the work at all stages.
. .~
b) Weight of Steelwork for Payment:
*. 6-8.2 Inspection of Fabrication
c) Wastage of Steel;
d) Insurance, Freight and Transport from Shop Unless otherwise, agreed, the inspection should be
to Site; carried out at the place of fabrication. The contractor
should be responsible for the accuracy of the work
e) Site Facilities for Erection;
and for any error, which may be subsequently
f) Tools and Plants; discovered.
g) Mode and Terms of Payment;
6-8.3 Inspection on Site
h) . Schedules;
j) Forced Majeure (Sections and provisions for To facilitate inspection, the contractor should during
liquidation and damages for delay in all working hours, have a foreman or properly
completion); and accredited charge hand available on the site, together
k) Escalation Sections. with a complete set of contract drawings and any
further drawings andinstructions which may have been
G-5 DETAILING issued from time to time.
In addition to the number of copies of the approved G-9 MAINTENANCE
drawings or details required under the contract,
dimensioned shop drawings or details should be G-9.1 General
submitted in duplicate to the engineer who should Where steelwork is to be encased in solid concrete,
retainone copy and return the other to the steel supplier brickworkar masonry, the question of maintenance
or fabricators with his comments, if any. should not arise, but where steelwork is to be housed
in hollow fire protection or is to be unprotected,
6 - 6 TIME SCHEDULE particularly where the steelwork is exposed to a
As the dates on which subsequent trades can corroding agent, the question of painting or protective
commence, depend on the progress of erection of the treatment of the steelwork should be given careful
steel framing, the time schedule for the latter should consideration at the construction stage, having regard
be carefully drawn up and agreed to by the parties to the special circumstances of the case.
concerned at a joint meeting.
G-9.2 connections
6 - 7 PROCEDURE ON SITE Where connections are exposed to a corroding agent,
The steelwork contractor should be responsible for the they should be periodically inspected, and any corroded
positioning and levelling of all steelwork. Any checking part should be thoroughly cleaned and painted.
or approval of the setting out by the general contractor G-9.2.1 Where bolted connections are not solidly
or the engineer should not relieve the steelwork encased and are subject to vibratory effects of
contractor of his responsibilities in this respect. machinery or plant, they should be periodically
inspected and all bolts tightened.
G-8 INSPECTION
References may be made to IS 7215 for general
guidance.
 ANNEX H
(Informative)
PLASTIC PROPERTIES OF BEAMS
Table 46 Plastic Properties of Beams (see also IS 808)

Designation Weight per Sectional Depth of Section Width of Thickness of Thickness of Radii of Gyration Section Plastic Shape Factor
Metre AM Flange Flange Web A Modulus Modulus
(0) (br) ((1) (PJ (ry)\ (23 (Gz) (zpzG)
kdm cm2 mm mm mm mm cm em em' cm3
(1)
ISWE 600
ISWB 600
ISMB 600
-- - ..-
ISLE 600
ISME 550
ISWB 500

ISMB 500
ISHB 450
ISHB 450
ISLE 500
ISWB 450
ISHB 400
ISHB 400
ISMB 450
ISLB 450
ISWB 400
ISHB 350
ISHB 350
ISME 400
ISLB 400
ISWB 350
~-300
ISHB -..
ISHB 300
ISMC 400
lSMB 350
ISLB 350

l s w e 300
ISHB 250
ISLB 325
&--L 7"" -+>.I 58.25 400
. .. L.7.7,
, ./>l.Y 851.11
100 14.0 8.0
>.t 1.132 0
ISWB 300 48.1 61.33 300 200 10.0 15.50 2.81 699.5 825.02 1.1794
ISHB 250 54.7 69.71 7.4 12.66 4.02 654.8
250 250 9.7 731.21 1.1167
ISLB 325 '43.1 54.90 325 8.8 10.70 5.37 638.7 708.43
165 9.8 7.0 1.1092
13.41 3.05 607.7 687.76 1.131 7
, , , , , . _ . , *: I ... ,,l.".?,.~,,I. , , ... ,.>,,.,,,: " . ! , ' , , ? , , , , ,
Table 46 (Continued)

Designation Weight per Sectional Depth of Section Width of Thickness of Thickness of Radii of Gyration Seetion. Plastic Shape Factor
Metre Area Flange Flange Web A Modulus Modulus
(D) ( br) Of) (I!+) ' (r,) (rr)' (23 (ZPS (Z,/ z-1
cm2 cm3 cm3 .
(3) (10) (11) (12)

ISHB 250 , 51.0 .

..
ISMC 350 *42.l 350 LOO
ISMB 300 '44.2 300 140
ISLC -350
---- - '38.8 350 100
ISLB 300 -37.7
ISHB 225 46.8
ISWB 250 40.9
ISHB 225 43.1
ISMC 304 '35.8
ISMB 250 37.3
ISLC 300 '33.1
ISLB 275 '33.0
ISHB 200 40.0
ISHB 200 37.3
ISWB 225 33.9
ISMC 250 *30.4
ISMB 225 31.2
..---~ ~

ISLC 250 28.0

ISWB 200 28.8
ISMC 225 *25.9
ISLC 225 '24.0
ISLB 225
-.-- *23.5
ISMB 200 25.4
ISHB 150 34.6
ISHB 150 30.6
ISHB 150 27.1
ISMC 200 '22.1
ISLC 200 *20.6
ISWB 175 22.1
ISLB 200 *19.8
ISMB 175 '19.3
LSMC 175 '19.1
ISLC 175 '17.6
ISLB 175 -16.7
 Table 46 (Concluded) 3
- - - -

Designation Weight per

Metre
Sectional
Alea
Depth of Section Width of
Flange
Thickness of
Flange
Thickness of
Web
Radii of Gyration
A
Section
Modulus
Plastic
Modulus
ShapeFactar ..
0
0
N

(0 (bt) (1,) (C) '(4 (rJ3 (Zd (Zpz/W

0
o
.
l

kdm cm' mm mm mm mm cm cm em' cm'

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (91 (10) (11) (12)
ISMC IS0 16.4 20.88 150 75 9.0 5.4 6.11 2.21 103.9 119.82 1.1533
ISMB 150 14.9 19.00 150 80 7.6 4.8 6.18 1.66 96.9 110.48 1.140 1
ISLC I50 14.4 18.36 150 75 7.8 4.8 6.16 2.37 93.0 106.17 1.141 6
ISLB 150 14.2 18.08 150 80 6.8 4.8 6.17 1.75 91.8 104.50 1.1384
ISlC 175 '11.2 14.24 175 60 6.9 3.6 7.1 1 1.88 82.3 94.22 1.1449
ISJB 200 '9.9 12.64 200 M) 5.0 3.4 7.86 1.17 78.1 90.89 1.163 9
ISM8 125 13.0 16.60 125 75 7.6 4.4 5.20 1.62 71.8 81.85 1.1399
ISMC 125 12.7 16-19 125 65 8.1 5.0 5.07 1.92 66.6 77.15 1.158 5
ISLB 125 11.9 15.12 125 75 6.5 4.4 5.19 1.69 65.1 73.93 1.135 6
ISJC I50 9.9 12.65 150 55 6.9 3.6 6.9 1.73 62.8 72;W 1.1472
ISLC 125 10.7 13.67 125 65 6.6 4.4 5.1 1 2.05 57.1 65.45 1.146 2
ISJB 175 '8.1 10.28 175 50 4.6 3.0 6.83 0.97 54.8 64.22 1.1799
ISMB 100 8.9 11.4 100 50 7.0 4.2 4.00 1.05 36.6 41.68 1.138 9
ISJB 150 '7.1 9.01 150 50 4.6 3.0 5.98 1.01 42.9 49.57 1.1556
r
p lSlC 125 7.9 10.07 125 50 6.6 3.0 5.18 1.60 43.2 49.08 1.1362
lSMC100 9.2 11.70 IF' 50 7.5 4.7 4.00 1.49 37.3 43.83 1.1750
ISLE 100 8.0 10.2 1 100 50 6.4 4.0 4.06 1.12 33.6 38.89 1.1573
ISLC 100 7.9 10.02 100 50 6.4 4.0 4.06 1.57 32.9 38.09 1.1576
lSlC 100 -5.8 7.41 100 45 5.1 3.0 4.09 1.42 24.8 28.38 1.1442
ISMC 75 6.8 8.67 75 40 7.3 4.4 2.96 1.21 20.8 24.17 1.1904
ISLB 75 6.1 7.71 75 50 5.0 3.7 3.07 1.14 19.4 22.35 1.1522
ISLC 75 $5.7 7.26 75 40 6.0 3.7 3.02 1.26 17.6 20.61 1.171 0
NOTE- Sections having 'weight per meter' marked with an asterik ('1 may be chosen as the section is lighter having high Z, as compared to rcctionr below it.
 ANNEX J
(Foreword)
COMMITTEE COMPOSITION
Structural Engineering and Structural Sections Sectional Committee, CED 7
Orgnnization Representativeis)
Indian Institute of Technology, Chennai Dn V. KALYANARAMAN
(Chairman)
In personal capacity (P-244 Scheme VI M, CIT Rood, SHnr A. Bnsu (Former Chairman)
20. Kankuqoehi, Kolhta 700054)
Bengal Engineering & Science University, Howrah DRSAIBAL KUMAR GHOSH
Dn S U ~ R ACHACKRABORTY
TA (Alternate)
Bhillai Institute of Technology, Durg Dn MOHAN
GUPTA
C. R. Narayana Rao, Chennai DR C. N. SRINIVASAN
S ~ n C.
l R. A ~ V I N(Alternate)
D
Central Electricity Authority, New Delhi SHRIKARNAIL S~NFH
SHRIS. K. ROYCHOWDHURY
(Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi CHIEFENGINEER
S~PER~NTEND~NG
ENGINEER
(ANernate)
Centre for High Technology, New Delhi SHRl S. K. BAHAL
Central Water Commission. New Delhi DlnEno~.GATESDESIGN
SHKIA. K. B a w (Alternate)
Consulting Engineering Services India (Pvt) Ltd. New Delhi SHWS. GHOSH
S ~ n S.
t K. HaznA CHOWDHU~Y
(Alternate)
Construma Consultancy Pvt Limited. Mumbai Dn ~ A R S H A V A R D H A NSUB~ARAO

Development Commissioner for Iron & Steel Control, Kolkata SHRIEl. D. GHOSH
S ~ n R.
l N. GUIN(Alternate)
~ i n c t b r a t eGeneral of Supplies & Disposals, New Delhi SHRl R. K. ACARWAL
SHRl S. K. AGARWAL
(Alternate)
Engineer-in-Chief's Branch. New Delhi SHR~1. B. SHARMA
SHRIYOOESH KUMAR
SINOHAL
(Alternate)
Engineers India Limited, New Delhi SHRl V. Y. SALPEKAR
SHRIARVIND KUMAR
(Alternate)
GAIL India Ltd, New Delhi SHRl S. SHYAM SUNDER
Gammon India Limited, Mumbai SHRIV. M. DHARAP
S ~ n M.
r V. J A T K A(Alternate)
~
Hindalco Industries Limited, Mirzapur Dn. 1. MUKHOPADYAY
SHRIAIAYKUMAR
AOARWAL
(Alternate)
Hindustan Steel Works Construction Limited. Kolkata SUPERINTENDING
ENGINEER
DEPUTY
CHIEFENGINEER
(Alternate)
lndian Institute of Technology. Chennai Dn SATISH KuMAn
Indian Oil Cor8oration. Noida SHRl T. BANDYOPADHYAY
S H ~P.I V. Raran~M(Alternate)
Institute of Steel Development & Growth (INSDAG). Kolkata DR T. K. BANDYOPAOHYAY
Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRl P. 8. VIIAY
Jindal Vijaya Nagar Steel Limited. Bellary DIRECTOR
Lasen & Toubro Limited. Chennai SHRl T.VENKATESH
RAO
M. E F E B ~(Alternate)
SHRIMATI N
M. N. dastur & Company Pvt Limited, Kolkata SHRISATYAXI SEN
SHnl PnnrlP B H A ~ H A R(Alternate)
YA
Metallurgical & Engg Consultants Limited, Ranchi GENERALMANAOER
SHnl K. K. DE (Alternate)
Ministry of Road Transport & Highways (Rep. IRC), New Delhi SECRETARYIRC
DtnEmn IRC (Alternale)
 Orgoniznfion Repnseniartve(s)
Mvmbai Port Trust. Mumbai S U P E R ~ H T E ~ENOINEER
~D~NC
EXECUTIVE ENGINEER(Alternate)
National Thqnial Power Corporation. Noida DR S. N, MANDAL
SHRl R. K. Gum* (Alrernara)
Northern Railway, New Delhi RBPRESENTATIYE
Oil and Natural Gas Commission. Dehradun REPRESENTATIVE
Oil Industry Safety Directorate. New Delhi SHRl S. K. NaNDY
Research. Designs & Standards Organization. Lucknow EXECUTIVE
DIPEWOR
Dln~cron(Alfernole)
Rites Ltd, Gurgaon SHRt SR~NIVASAN
Steel Authority of India Limited, Ranchi SHRI T. K. G ~ o s a r
S ~ n R.
l M. C H A ~ P * D H Y(Alternate)
AY
Steel Authority of India Limited. Bokaro SHRI S. K. BANERIEE
SHRISHYAMA NANDTERIAR
(Alrernnre)
Steel Authority of India Limited. Bhilai SHRl BHARAT
LAL
SHRIRANJAN
HALDAR
(Alternate)
Steel Re-Rolling Mills Association of India. Kolkata SHRI R. P. BHATIA
S ~ nANIL
l KUMAXJ A ~[Alternate)
I
STUP Consultants Pvt Lfd, Kolkata SHRI A. GHOSHAL
DR N. BANDOPADHYAY
(Alternore)
Structural Engineering Research Centre, Chennai Dn N. LAKSHMANAN
Dn S. SEETHARAMAN
[Alrert~~fe)
Visakhapatnam Steel Project. Visakhapatnam SHRIU. V. SWAMV
S H RS.~ GHOSH[Alrernofe)
BIS Directorate General SHRI A. K. SAINI. Scientist 'F'& Head (CED)
[Representing Director General (Ex-gyieioMember)]
SHRIS. K. JAIN,Scientist 'F'& Head (Former) (CED)
[Representing Director General (Er-oflclo Member)]

Member Secretaries
SHRI J . ROYCHOWDHURY
Scientist 'E'(CED), BIS
S H RS~. CHATURYEDI
Scientist 'E' (CEDI, BIS
(Farmer Member Secretary)
S ~ n AMAN
l DEEPGARO
Scientist 'B' (CED). BIS
(Farmer Member Secretnry)

Use of S t r u c t u r a l S t e e l in General B u i l d i n g Construction S u b c o m m i t t e e , CED 7:2

Ministry of Railways. New Delhi SHnl A. K. HARIT(Convener)
Bengal Engineering & Science University, Howrah PROFESSOR
& HEAD
Bharat Heavy Electricals Limited. Trichy S ~ n R.
i MATHIANNAL
SHRl R. JEYAKUMAR(Aftentare)
Brailhwait & Company Limited, Hoogly DEPUTYMANAGER
ASSISTANT (Alrernnre)
MANAGER
C. R. Narayana Rao. Chennai

Central Electricity Authority, New Delhi

 Orgnnizolion
Engineer-in-Chief's Branch, New Delhi
Engineers India Limited, New Delhi SHKIARVIND KUMAR
SHRIS. 8 . JAIN(AlIern(11e)
Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi HEAD
Indian Institute of Technology. Kanpur Dn DURGESHC. RAI
DR C. V. R. MURTHY
(Ahemote)
Institute of Steel Development and Growth (INSDAG), Koikata Dn T. K. BANDYOPAUHYAY
Jadavpur University, Kolkata PROFK. K. OHOSH
Larsen & Toubro Limited, Chennai Dn. K. NATARAUN
M. N. Dastur Company Pvt Limited, Kolkata SHRl S. R. KULKARNI
SHnl SATYAKISEN (Alrernale)
Metallurgical & Engineering Consultants Limited. Ranchi SHRI A. K. CHAKROBORTY
SHnl R. PRAMANIK (Allernale)
National Thermal Power Corporation, Noida

Public Works Department, Mumbai

Research, Designs and Standards Organization. Lucknow
Richardson & Cruddas Limited. Nagpur
Steel Authority OF India Ltd. Bokaro SHRl S . K. BANERIEE
SHnl SHYAMA NANDTERIAR
(Alternate)
Structural Engineering Research Centre, Chcnnai DR D. S. RAMcHANDRAMURTHY
SHnl G. S. PALANI
(Allemale)
Tnta Iron & Steel Company Limited. Jamshedpur SHRIS. N. GHATAK
S H ~K.I S. RANGANATHAN
(A1ler)zafe)

Ad-hoc Group for Preparation of Final Draft for Revision of IS 800

Indian Institute of Technology, Chennai Dn V. K A L Y A N A R ~ ~ A N

Instilute of Steel Development & Growth (INSDAG). Kolkata Dn T. K. BANDYDPADHYAY
Bureau of Indian Standards

BIS is a statutory institution established under the Biireau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 to promote
harmonious development of the activities of standardization, marking and quality certification of goods
and attending to connected matters in the country.

Copyright

BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced in any form
without the prior permission in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the course of
implementing the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade designations.
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (Publications), BIS.

Review of Indian Standards . .

Amendments are issued to standards as the need arises on the basis of comments. Standards are also reviewed
periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when such review indicates that no changes are
needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken up for revision. Users of Indian Standards
should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments or edition by referring to the latest issue of
'BIS Catalogue' and 'Standards : Monthly Additions'.

This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc : No. CED 7 (7182).

Amendments Issued Since Publication

Amend No. Date of Issue Text Affected

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

Headquarters :
Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110 002 Telegrams : Manaksanstha
Telephones : 2323 0131,2323 3375,2323 9402 (Common to all offices)

Regional Offices : Telephone

Central : Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg
NEW DELHI 110 002
Eastern : 1/14 C.I.T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Kankurgachi
KOLKATA 700 054
Northern : SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH 160 022

Southern : C.I.T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600 113

Western : Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East)

MUMBAI 400 093
Branches : AHMEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR. COIMBATORE. FARIDABAD.
GHAZIABAD. GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD. JAIPUR. KANPUR. LUCKNOW. NAGPUR.
PARWANOO. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM. VISAKHAPATNAM.

Printed at Rabhat Offset Press. New Dclhi-2